Home

Compact NSX - elektro oprema

1. 002 5 71 2 3 45 10 20 30 5070100 200300 Mr Example 1 Fault I 500 A Vir 45 5 55 T C 20 C 40 C 60 C tmin 8s 6s 5s t max 80s 60s 50s values Thermal protection curve with minimum and maximum Temperature derating Compact NSX100 to 250 equipped with thermal magnetic trip units The overload protection is calibrated at 40 C in the lab This means that when the ambient temperature is less or greater than 40 C the Ir protection pick up is slightly modified To obtain the tripping time for a given temperature m see the tripping curves for 40 C see pages E 2 and E 3 m determine tripping times corresponding to the Ir value thermal setting on the device corrected for the ambient temperature as indicated in the tables below Settings of Compact NSX100 to 250 equipped with TM D and TM G trip units as a function of the temperature The table indicates the real Ir A value for a given rating and temperature 16 18 4 187 18 18 17 16 6 16 15 6 15 2 14 8 14 5 14 13 8 25 28 8 28 27 5 27 26 3 25 6 25 24 5 24 23 5 23 22 21 32 36 8 36 35 2 34 4 33 6 32 8 32 31 3 30 5 30 29 5 29 28 5 40 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 50 57 5 56 55 54 52 5 51
2. Micrologic 5 2 and 6 2 A or E 40 160 A Micrologic 5 2 and 6 2 A or E 250 A 10 000 40A Ir 16 40A a 000 Tun 100 A Ir 36 1004 FH HH amp 5000 250 A Ir 90 250 A 1 000 1 000 500 500 200 200 100 100 50 50 20 20 10 10 5 5 t s t s 2 2 11 1H HHEN 5 5 2 2 1 It OFF 4 lt OFF 05 05 02 02 a a He 005 005 t lt 10ms p gt ERBEN I 1 QO ian 002 PEF 002 HE Pee ii 1 5 15 In III A i 15 12ne I 57 1 2345710 20 5 7 10 20 30 50 574 2 345 7 10 20 5 7 10 20 30 50 iir a iln ip M1 In gt Reflex tripping Micrologic 6 2 A or E ground fault protection 10 000 5 000 2 000 fee 40A Ig 0 4 1xIn 1 000 gt 40 A lg 0 2 1xIn 500 200 100 50 20 1 t s It OFF ar nan ao 05 02 01 005 002 001 05 07 1 2 345 7 1 2 345 7 10 20 30 e 1 In The tripping curve is identical to that of Micrologic 5 Ground fault protection is shown separately 559E5100 indd Schneider version 1 0 DB115715 DB114775 Additional characteristics Tripping curves Compact NSX100 to 250 Motor protection MA magnetic trip units MA2 5 MA100 MA150 and MA220 10 000 A 10 000 5 000 5 5 000 2 000 2 000 1 000 1000 500 500 Thermal withstand 200 200 MA220 1m Thermal withstand 100 z MATSO 50 50 20 20 10 10 5 5 t s t s 2 2 1 Im 6 14xIn
3. Upstream CB e no gt g Q a N 8 Oo N O 5 5 8 E Ea BE E o p R 2E 8 Se NETT Es 2 53 7 SE o S p O gt A rl Saz tz nm CSG A Ce 77 ee N 2h Gadd Z en bate ZZi eA Z eee el a a lie vZNDO zv aioe ae i vz No 1 mm O _ O Ai ie 8 A mm Q QO m ad vere T IN IZ 0 052 Tr Gan ine ee IZ IA 1Z O 05 z ya amp Z ns IZO me ee ee 2 12 8 ele TIER v E LOCO loco num ooo NSX cord 3P or 4P energised all devices open connected and The diagram is shown with circuits de charged and relays in normal position 60291419Q open closed Drau raut amp closed amp open Q Fault Connected Q Disconnected DB115710 ree i i 1 i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i n a x 4 Nis ist Nis i i Nit i i OM N lt i 10 D 1D i i BIN CI a CH sides i 1 TI LA EN FN IN N i i l i i i zlo w zla z O x gt olx oO 1 1 gt te N ata olt a als o i i O iD lt F D i i N co m 108 O Q o O gt gt 5 lo o 5 CE CD W W gt gt O io v roe
4. 2 Line terminator 3 ULP symbol ULP wiring ULP connection system Control wiring Remote tripping by MN or MX release Power consumption is approximately m 30 VA for pick up of the MN and MX releases m 300 VA to 500 VA for the motor mechanism The table below indicates the maximum permissible cable length for different supply voltages and cable cross sectional areas Recommended maximum cable lengths in metres U source 100 U source 85 MX U source 100 U source 85 Motor mechanism U source 100 U source 85 Note the indicated length is that of each of the two wires MN 160 960 480 65 110 17 28 External neutral voltage tap ENVT This connection is required for accurate power measurements on 3 pole circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic 5 6 E trip units in installations with a distributed neutral It can be used to measure phase neutral voltages and calculate power using the 3 wattmeter method Compact NSX 3 pole circuit breakers come with a wire installed on the device for the connection to the ENVT This wire is equipped with a connector for connection to an external wire with the following characteristics m cross sectional area of 1 mm to 2 5 mm m maximum length of 10 metres External neutral current transformer ENCT This connection is required to protect the neutral on 3 pole circuit breakers
5. Compact NSX100 to 630 Reflex tripping Compact NSX100 to 630 devices incorporate the exclusive reflex tripping a system 29 This system breaks very high fault currents The device is mechanically tripped via a NSX630 piston actuated directly by the pressure produced in the breaking units by the short ni circuit 10 NSX400 For high short circuits this system provides A a faster break thereby ensuring ms discrimination Reflex tripping curves are exclusively a 6 function ofthe circuit breaker rating 5 hiram 4 NSX100 NSX160 3 2 3 4 6 10 20 30 40 60 100 200 Schneider version 1 0 559E5100 indd ectric DB115719 The limiting capacity of a circuit breaker is its aptitude to let through a current during a short circuit that is less than the prospective short circuit current Isc Prospective Isc peak 1 W Prospective current Prospective Isc Actual current Limited Isc gt tc t The exceptional limiting capacity of the Compact NSX range is due to the rotating double break technique very rapid natural repulsion of contacts and the appearance of two arc voltages in series with a very steep wave front Current and energy limiting curves Ics 100 Icu The exceptional limiting capacity of the Compact NSX range greatly reduces the forces created by fault currents in devices The result is
6. lt 148 gt S A _ fi Type DI P3 P5 Y I a NSX100 160 250 75 88 123 Note door cutout dimensions are given for a device position in h S NSX400 630 100 112 147 ne ia where A 2 100 h x 5 with respect to the door 559E3300 indd ee version 1 0 Dimensions and Front panel cutouts connection Visu function for Compact NSX100 to 630 fixed version Compact NSX100 to 250 with Interpact INV100 to 250 Visu function Bare sheet metal DB115099 DB115100 DB115101 DB115102 DB115103 DB115440 Compact NSX400 630 with Interpact INV400 to 630 Visu function Bare sheet metal DB115104 DB115105 DB115106 DB115107 DB115108 DB115441 Schgeider NT 559E3300 indd Motor mechanism module for Compact and Vigicompact NSX100 to 630 Bare sheet metal NSX100 to 250 NSX400 630 Fixed plug in or withdrawable circuit breaker o o I 127 O H j i gt 63 5 ee 127 gt With IP30 front panel escutcheon NSX400 630 Fixed plug in or withdrawable circuit breaker H 127 Bu J i 63 5 me 127 With IP40 front pa
7. 71 AIE Communication MN undervoltage release H WH L BL data or BK RD 24 V DC power supply MX Sh htrelease AIE ZSI Zone Selective Interlocking Z1 ZSI OUT SOURCE Motor mechanism MT Z2 ZSI OUT A4 opening order Z3 ZSI IN SOURCE i A2 d Z4 ZSI IN ST short time on e ies a Z5 ZSI IN GF ground fault Ar ee iar a Note Z3 Z4 Z5 for NSX400 630 only L1 manual position manu l AIE ENCT external neutral current transformer B2 as interlocking mandatory for automatic or remote shielded cable with 1 twisted pair T1 T2 rec arging shielding earthed at one end only CT end BPO opening pushbutton Connection L 30 cm max BPF closing pushbutton maximum length of 10 metres cable size 0 4 to 1 5 mm Communicating motor mechanism MTc recommended cable Belden 8441 or equivalent B4 A1 motor mechanism power supply E ENVT external neutral voltage tap for connection to the BSCM breaker status and control module neutral via a 3P circuit breaker RD red VT violet OF2 OF1 device ON OFF indication contacts WH white GY grey OF4 OF3 device ON OFF indication contacts NSX400 630 YE yellow OR orange SDE fault trip indication contact BK black BL blue short circuit overload ground fault earth leakage GN green SD trip indication contact CAF2 CAF1 early make contact Terminals shown in red O O must be connected by the customer rotar
8. Schneider version 1 0 559E3500 indd Electric DB115471 DB115475 Connection with accessories cont Spreaders 3P DB115472 4P E3 DB115473 N an Type c3 C4 E1 E2 E3 F1 F2 NSX100 160 235 114 45 159 100 11 NSX250 255 114 45 159 100 11 NSX400 630 44 135 525 187 5 1525 15 170 70 240 166 15 One piece spreader for NSX100 to 250 only 5 180 5 gt 140 gt 1 45 lt 45 F 45 gt Tey u 559E3500 indd BH Y U version 1 0 DB115474 NSX100 to 250 NSX400 630 gt 04 DB115477 98 26 N 7 DB115478 DB115480 DB115483 Dimensions and connection Power connections Compact and Vigicompact NSX100 to 630 plug in and withdrawable versions Connection locations m M Type M A5 Bi NSX100 to 250 100 200 35 NSX400 630 156 5 313 45 D1 75 100 DB115479 et eee E A t LI theirs is TEI Note m for mounting on a backplate the insulating screen supplied with the plug in base must be installed m for withdrawable versions terminal shields are recommended Connection without accessories Front connection mounting on backplate M or rails V NSX100 to 250 NSX400 630 DB11
9. Schneider version 1 0 559E3200 indd Electric FDM121 switchboard display DB114991 DB114992 Through panel DB114993 DB114994 DB114995 On panel DB114996 DB115270 DB115121 DB115122 10 000 5 000 2 000 1 000 500 200 100 Connector optional 559E3200 indd Schneider version 1 0 Dimensions and Front panel accessories connection Compact NSX100 to 630 IP30 front panel escutcheons For toggle rotary handle or motor mechanism module DB114997 DB114998 DB114999 DB115000 DB115001 DB115002 DB115003 DB115004 j 2 g 5 8 i i i i El 4 IP40 front panel escutcheons For toggle rotary handle or motor mechanism module and protection collar DB115064 DB115010 DB115011 a i x d 3 5 H6 5 For Vigicompact with protection collar or ammeter module fa fen ads a ci a are 3 5 H 6 5 Schneider version 1 0 559E3200 indd Electric DB115017 DB115021 DB115025 DB115030 IP40 front panel escutcheons cont For Vigicompact 2 2 amp ee 79 8 ea Ea I lt 69 3 5 gt tt lt 6 5 Protection collars for IP40 front panel escutcheons Fo
10. 63 5 127 With IP40 front panel escutcheon 10 000 5 000 DB115131 DB115271 DB115132 DB115133 2 000 1 000 500 With IP40 front panel escutcheon DB115134 DB115135 DB115117 DB115118 m A o al Type DI P40 P P142 NSX100 160 250 75 89 90 123 NSX400 630 10 112 113 147 559E3400 indd Schneider version 1 0 DB115136 DB115140 Dimensions and Front panel cutouts connection Indication and measurement modules for Compact NSX100 to 630 Fixed or plug in circuit breakers with ammeter module and voltage presence indicator Bare sheet metal With toggle Rotary handle amp 4 10000 g 10000 8 5 000 5 5 000 a a a 2 000 2 000 1 000 1 000 500 500 200 200 100 100 50 50 20 20 10 10 5 5 t s t s 2 2 1 1 5 TM160D 5 8xIn 2 2 1 1 With IP40 front panel escutcheon With toggle DB115141 1 DB115142 DB115143 TH lt 27 gt 45 D1 gt lt P4 D1 P11 Type D1 J1 J2 J3 K1 K2 P3 P4 P10 P11 NSX100 160 250 75 78 5 67 5 55 46 5 74 88 89 89 90 NSX400 630 100 122 129 122 5 64 5 90 112 113 112 113 Schneider version 1 0 559E3400 indd Electric 559E3400 indd Schneider version 1 0 Dimensions and
11. DB115457 DB115452 70 Ber NSX400 630 g i B 14 a Vigi module m 64 5 or NSX250 z 66 5 a Right angle terminal extensions upstream only NSX100 to 250 DB115459 D DB115460 b NSX250 Straight terminal extensions for NSX100 to 250 only DB115462 1 wo S gt 559E3500 indd Schneider ectric version 1 0 HOHE 0 w NSX400 630 DB115463 DB115466 DB115469 Dimensions and Power connections connection Compact and Vigicompact NSX100 to 630 fixed version Connection with accessories cont Edgewise terminal extensions NSX100 to 250 NSX400 630 8 a a lt 30 gt SG 113 5 y 45 terminal extensions NSX100 to 250 NSX400 630 3 H 5 A 5 gt 10 13 54 i I l 61 5 i z 8 48 Double L terminal extensions NSX100 to 250 DB115470 N
12. Schematic representation ofthe communicating motor mechanism MT gt RSU screen for the communicating motor mechanism MTc mee ma lt fer eben ee ee ae o er Ge g nie ee ee en ea ee eee o y moye amr A P Gade Peet Senet meag ea sarean P e u Rie di Ale Mm Gab t Te ee ema e e ER ad a a ja tanos am hoas Ate er han s A Am i r er e Electric e e e 0 o e e RSU utility setup screen for the communicating fnotor Enable mechanism j e o uo D VAC 3 Close Open command command i Reset command Single line diagram of communicating motor mechanism Opening closing and reset orders are transmitted via the communication network The Enable automatic reset and Enable reset even if SDE parameters must be set using the RSU software via the screen by clicking the blue text Auto manu is a switch on the front of the motor mechanism Symbols Q circuit breaker B4 A1 motor mechanism power supply BSCM breaker status and control module Terminals shown in red O must be connected by the customer 559E4100 indd Schneider version 1 0 Wiring diagrams The diagram is shown with circuits de energised all devices open connected and charged and relays in normal position D1 SD3 SDx module power supply SD2 output 1 80 mA max SD4 output 2 80 mA max SD2 S
13. 30 i Double L extensions mounting through front panel N or on rails V NSX100 to 250 DB115505 Me 51 _ Schneider version 1 0 559E3500 indd Electric DB115511 DB115515 DB115518 Connection with accessories cont Spreaders mounting on backplate M or rails V 3P 4P NSX100 to 250 DB115512 DB115513 DB115514 E3 gt ee gt 274 bee O OHO gt Type E1 E2 E3 F1 F2 NSX100to250 114 45 159 130 11 TEENS en y NSX400 630 135 52 5 187 5 195 5 15 n 170 70 240 209 15 z Long insulated rear connectors mounting on backplate M or rails V Exterior mounted rear connectors NSX100 to 250 NSX400 630 B 7 8 108 5 a 75 5 8 gt 94 5 67 lt i A ER op Hii I ie 80 5 j 129 ST aan Eee A Interior mounted rear connectors NSX100 to 250 NSX400 630 8
14. 86FSLLAQ JosstLad eu ___ y y b o RAA g a 8 x E o r S t h I f Q x x 2 r 2 z EB z L6yS1180 oossHLad Ain gers Laad 66pS 1180 a u ee version 1 0 559E3500 indd Electric DB115506 DB115509 Dimensions and connection Connection with accessories cont Power connections Compact and Vigicompact NSX100 to 630 plug in and withdrawable versions 45 extensions mounting through front panel N or on rails V DB115507 NSX100 to 250 NSX400 630 g e57 33 8 ran Z A 8 gt Ha4 7 ett c FERRE u 218 C pii 140 I I 204 5 Al ee A E i iS 156 5 z 100 Emm i HN l Done N _IT_ _ vy a cos X gt 18 18 Double L extensions mounting on backplate M or rails V NSX100 to 250 DB115510 ee 47
15. Fixed NSX100 to 250 40to 100 NSX160 to 250 125 NSX250 250 1 Plug in or NSX100 to 250 40 to 100 withdrawable NSx160to 250 160 i NSX250 250 0 86 Fixed NSX400 250 to 400 0 97 NSX630 250 to 630 0 90 Plug in or NSX400 250 to 400 0 97 withdrawable NSX630 250 to 630 0 90 Note to provide the Visu function Compact NSX circuit breakers with or without a Vigi module are combined with INV switch disconnectors Tripping values for the selected combination are indicated in the Interpact catalogu bar in e version 1 0 DB115052 Installation recommendations Compact NSX thermal power loss values are used to calculate total temperature rise in the switchboard in which the circuit breakers are installed N L1 L2 With a Vigi module the deviation of the N and L3 bars required to pass through the toroid results in higher power losses compared to those of the L1 and L2 bars Power loss Resistance Compact NSX equipped with thermal magnetic trip units The values indicated in the tables below are typical values for a device at full rated load and 50 60 Hz Power loss per pole P pole in Watts W The value indicated is the power loss at 50 60 Hz for a three pole or four pole circuit breaker Measurement and calculation of power loss are carried out in compliance with the recommendations of Annex G of standard IEC 60947 2 Resistance per pole R pole in milliohms m0 The
16. Long RCs 2 x LV429236 R 2P 3P 3P 4P 5 Plug in kit LV429288 LV429289 LV429290 Comprising Base 1x LV429265 1x LV429266 1 x LV429267 Power connections 2 x LV429268 3 x LV429268 4 x LV429268 Short terminal shields 2 x LV429515 2 x LV429515 2 x LV429516 Safety trip interlock 1 x LV429270 1x LV429270 1x Lv429270 B g 3P 4P Vigicompact plug in kit LV429291 LV429292 Comprising Base 1 x LV429266 1 x LV429267 Power connections 3 x LV429269 4 x LV429269 Short terminal shields 2 x LV429515 2 x LV429516 Safety trip interlock 1 x LV429270 1 x LV429270 2P 3P 3P o Wae E 5 Kit for Compact Kit for Compact Kit for Compact a Plug in kit 1 x LV429288 1 x LV429289 1 x LV429290 Chassis side plates 1 x LV429282 1 x LV429282 1 x LV429282 for base Chassis side plates 1 x LV429283 1 x LV429283 1 x LV429283 forbreaker _ _ R 3P 4P 5 Kit for Vigicompact Kit for Vigicompact a Plug in kit 1 x LV429291 1 x LV429292 Chassis side plates 1 x LV429282 1 x LV429282 for base Chassis side plates 1 x LV429283 1 x LV429283 for breaker 559E6100 indd Schneider version 2 0 DB112225 DB112227 DB112726 DB112225 DB112226 DB112228 DB112724 DB115613 DB112231 08112240 DB112234 DB112233 DB112232 Ss et So ur DB112235 DB112236 Catalogue numbers Accessories Compact and Vigicompact NSX100 160 250 Connection accessor
17. Controls The module can be used to carry out communicating remote control operations open close and reset in different modes manual auto Mounting The BSCM module can be installed on all Compact NSX circuit breakers and switch disconnectors It simply clips into the auxiliary contact slots It occupies the slots of one O F contact and one SDE contact The BSCM is supplied with 24 V DC power automatically via the NSX cord when the communication system is installed BSCM module version 1 0 DB115569 Functions and characteristics Compact NSX uses the Modbus communication protocol compatible with SMS PowerLogic supervision systems Two downloadable utilities facilitate implementation of communication functions Firewall Site Intranet Ethernet TCP IP Modbus Masterpact jee eecccccrecceccesseccosce Compact Compact NSX communication Networks and software Modbus Modbus is the most widely used communication protocol in industrial networks It operates in master slave mode The devices slaves communicate one after the other with a gateway master Masterpact Compact NSX PowerLogic and Sepam products all operate with this protocol A Modbus network is generally implemented on an LV or MV switchboard scale Depending on the data monitored and the desired refresh rate a Modbus network connected to a gateway can serve 4 to 16 devices For larger installations a number
18. DB112737 DB112738 DB115615 DB112739 DB111428 Catalogue numbers Accessories cont Compact and Vigicompact NSX100 160 250 cont Interlocking Mechanical interlocking for circuit breakers al With toggles LV429354 E R LA With rotary handles Lv429369 Interlocking with key 2 keylocks 1 key for rotary handles ET Sa Keylock kit keylock not included LV429344 1 set of 2 keylocks Ronis 1351B 500 41950 1 key only keylock kit not included _ Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z 142878 Installation accessories Front panel escutcheons IP40 escutcheon for all control types _ Lv429317 IP40 escutcheon for Vigi module LV429316 IP40 escutcheon for Vigi or ammeter module LV429318 1 toggle cover 1v429319 Lead sealing accessories Or Bag of accessories LV429375 ER o P Din rail adapter 1 adapter LV429305 3P 60 mm busbar adapter 29372 1 For only 1 device Schneider version 2 0 559E6100 indd DB117159 DB117160 DB117161 DB115885 DB117162 DB117164 DB117166 DB117165 DB117167 DB117168 DB117170 DB117169 DB117171 DB117172 DB117173 DB117163 DB111426 Catalogue numbers Plug in withdrawable version accessories Insulation accessories gt Auxiliary connections EBEN Plug in base accessories Chassis accessories a gt 559E6100 indd Accessories cont
19. Maximum size of cables depending on the type of connector Compact NSX circuit 100 160 250 400 630 breaker Steel connectors 1 5 to 95 mm a Aluminium connectors 25 to 95 mm a a 120 to 185 mm 2 cables 50 to 120mm m a 2 cables 35 to 240 mm a a 35 to 300 mm a a Distribution connectors 6 cables 35 mm a Polybloc distribution blocks 6 or 9 cables 10 16 mm m a Rear connection Device mounting on a backplate with suitable holes enables rear connection Bars or cables with lugs Rear connections for bars or cables with lugs are available in two lengths Bars may be positioned flat on edge or at 45 angles depending on how the rear connections are positioned The rear connections are simply fitted to the device connection terminals All combinations of rear connection lengths and positions are possible on a given device Bare cables For the connection of bare cables the 1 cable connectors for Compact NSX100 to 250 may be secured to the rear connections using clips Schneider version 1 0 ectric DB111346 DB111344 Functions and characteristics Connection is identical for both withdrawable and plug in versions The same accessories as for fixed devices may be used Four positions DB111345 Two lengths R DB111337 DB111340 DB111342 Accessories and auxiliaries Connection of withdrawable and plug in devices Bars or cables with lu
20. Mechanical switching device having only one position of rest operated otherwise than by hand capable of making carrying and breaking currents under normal circuit conditions including operating overload conditions A contactor is provided for frequent opening and closing of circuits under load or slight overload conditions It must be combined and coordinated with a protective device against overloads and short circuits such as a circuit breaker Schneider version 1 0 559E7100 indd Electric ai Contactor utilisation categories gt A 37 IEC 60947 4 1 Current limiting circuit breaker gt A 36 IEC 60947 2 Disconnector IEC 60947 3 Be Switch disconnector IEC 60947 3 4 A 56 Switch disconnector utilisation gt A 57 category IEC 60947 3 The standard defines four utilisation categories AC1 AC2 AC3 and AC4 depending on the load and the control functions provided by the contactor The class depends on the current voltage and power factor as well as contactor withstand capacity in terms of frequency of operation and endurance A circuit breaker with a break time short enough to prevent the short circuit current reaching its otherwise attainable peak value Mechanical switching device which in the open position complies with the requirements specified for the isolating function A disconnector serves to isolate upstream and downstream circuits It is used to open or close circuits under no load conditions
21. Mixed RCkit 8 R Kit 3P Short RCs 2 x LV432475 Long RCs 1x LV432476 j Kit 4P Short RCs 2x LV432475 Long RCs 2x LV432476 The pitch of all Compact and Vigicompact NSX400 630 devices is 45 mm Spreaders are available for fixed front plug in or withdrawable connection with pitch of 52 5 mm or 70 mm Upstream or downstream spreaders 8 52 5 mm 3P LV432490 5 i AP Lv432491 u oj e 70 mm 3P Lv432492 4P LV432493 8 3P 4P 5 Plug in kit LV432538 LV432539 Comprising Base 1 x LV432516 1 x LV432517 Power connections 3 x LV432518 4 x LV432518 Short terminal shields 2 x LV432591 2 x LV432592 Safety trip interlock 1 x LV432520 1 x LV432520 g BC 3P 4P 5 Vigi plug in kit LV432540 LV432541 Comprising Base 1 x LV432516 1 x LV432517 Power connections 3 x LV432519 4 x LV432519 Short terminal shields 2 x LV432591 2 x LV432592 Safety trip interlock 1 x LV432520 1 x LV432520 559E6200 indd Schneider version 2 0 DB111468 DB117174 Catalogue numbers Withdrawable version fixed FC device withdrawable kit Kit for Compact Plug in kit Chassis side plates for base Chassis side plates for breaker Plug in kit Chassis side plates for base Chassis side plates for breaker 3P Kit for Compact 1 x LV432538 1x LV432532 1 x LV432532 3P Kit for Vigicompact 1 x LV4325
22. On backplate Through panel eer DB115056 DB115057 DB115058 Possible recommended or mandatory accessories With operating voltage lt 500V Insulated bars type of conductor Extension terminals Cables crimp lugs baa Bare cables connectors e Extension terminals Cables crimp lugs gt 500 V Insulated bars 2 Bare cables connectors M that a ef No insulating Interphase accessory barriers shields shields shield lt gt Short terminal shields Long terminal Short terminal Short terminal DB115059 DB115060 DB115061 DB115061 DB115061 Possible Possible Possible Possible for Possible for Possible for NSX100 to 250 NSX100 to 250 NSX100 to 250 version 1 0 559E2100 indd DB115698 Installation example Safety clearance Minimum distance between two Minimum distance between circuit adjacent circuit breakers breaker and front or rear panels 3 g Front F 2 8 panel T a a A gt A1 a PUG IE B 0 gt F Bare or painted sheetmetal Note if F lt 8 mm an insulating screen or long terminal shield is mandatory see page A 73 Minimum distance between circuit breaker and top bottom or side panels s I S y EN 3 8 D1 3 py 8 D1 Devices without
23. Currents of squirrel cage motors at full rated load Standardised values in kW Standardised values in HP Rated Standardised values in kW Rated Indicative values of the rated operational currents le A for operational currents le A for operational 110 200 V 208 V 220 380 440 550 powe 230V 400V 500 V 690 V power 120 V 240V 415V 480V 600V kW A A A A hp 0 06 0 35 0 32 0 16 0 12 1 2 4 4 2 5 2 4 2 2 1 3 1 1 0 9 0 09 0 52 0 3 0 24 0 17 3 4 6 4 3 7 3 5 3 2 1 8 1 6 1 3 0 12 0 7 0 44 0 32 0 23 1 8 4 4 8 4 6 4 2 2 3 2 1 1 7 0 18 1 0 6 0 48 0 35 11 2 12 6 9 6 6 6 3 3 3 2 4 0 25 1 5 0 85 0 68 0 49 2 13 6 7 8 7 5 6 8 4 3 3 4 2 7 0 37 1 9 1 1 0 88 0 64 3 19 2 11 10 6 9 6 6 1 4 8 3 9 0 55 26 1 5 12 0 87 5 30 4 17 5 16 7 15 2 9 7 7 6 6 1 0 75 33 19 15 11 7112 44 25 3 24 2 22 14 11 9 11 47 27 22 16 10 56 32 2 30 8 28 18 14 11 15 63 36 29 21 15 84 48 3 46 2 42 27 21 17 22 85 49 39 28 20 108 62 1 59 4 54 34 27 22 3 113 65 52 38 25 136 78 2 74 8 68 44 34 27 7 15 85 68 29 30 160 92 88 80 51 40 32 55 20 115 92 67 40 208 120 114 104 66 52 41 75 27 15 5 12 4 89 50 260 150 143 130 83 65 52 11 38 22 176 12 8 60 177 169 154 103 77 62 15 51 29 23 17 T5 221 211 192 128 96 77 18 5 61 35 28 21 100 285 273 248 165 124 99 22 72 41 33 24 125 359 343 312 208 156 125 30
24. Highest current of the 3 phases and neutral Imax of 11 12 13 IN Ground fault Micrologic 6 lg pick up setting u a 7 Current unbalance between phases lavg Voltages V Phase to phase U12 U23 U31 a a a Phase to neutral V1N V2N V3N Average of phase to phase voltages Uavg U12 U21 U23 3 Average of phase to neutral voltages Vavg V1N V2N V3N 3 a Ph Ph and Ph N voltage unbalance Uavg and Vavg m Phase sequence 1 2 3 1 3 2 Frequency Hz Power system t a Power Active kW P total and per phase E E Reactive kVAR Q total and per phase a Apparent kVA S total and per phase Power factor andcos fundamental PF and cos p total and per phase Maximeters minimeters Associated with instantaneous rms Reset via Micrologic or FDM121 display unit m measurements Energy metering Energy Active kW reactive kVARh apparent Total since last reset kVAh Absolute or signed mode 1 Demand and maximum demand values Demand current A Phases and neutral Present value on the selected window a Maximum demand since last reset 7 m Demand power Active kWh reactive kVAR Present value on the selected window apparent kVA Maximum demand since last reset Calculation window Sliding fixed or com synchronised Adjustable from 5 to 60 minutes in 1 minute 2 steps Power quality Total
25. LV429414 LV429427 LV429412 33680 LV429413 33681 LV429414 MN LV429404 LV429405 I 559E6100 indd DB112265 DB112265 Catalogue numbers Accessories cont Compact and Vigicompact NSX100 160 250 cont Motor mechanism Motor mechanism module supplied with SDE adapter Voltage MT100 160 MT250 AC 48 60 V 50 60 Hz LV429440 LV431548 110 130 V 50 60 Hz LV429433 LV431540 220 240 V 50 60 Hz and LV429434 LV431541 208 277 V 60 Hz 380 415 V 50 60 Hz and LV429435 LV431542 440 480 V 60 Hz DC 24 30 V LV429436 LV431543 48 60 V LV429437 LV431544 110 130 V LV429438 LV431545 250 V LV429439 LV431546 Communicating motor mechanism module supplied with SDE adapter Motor mechanism module MTc NSX100 160 220 240 V 50 60 Hz LV429441 MTc NSX250 220 240 V 50 60 Hz LV431549 Breaker and Status BSCM LV434205 Communication Module NSX cord Wire length L 0 35 m LV434200 Wire length L 1 3m LV434201 Wire length L 3m LV434202 U gt 480 VAC wire length L 0 35 m LV434204 559E6100 indd Schneider version 2 0 DB112256 DB112256 DB112257 DB112257 DB112258 DB112259 DB112260 Catalogue numbers Accessories cont Compact and Vigicompact NSX100 160 250 cont Indication and measurement modules Ammeter module Rating A 100 160 250 3P LV429455 LV430555 LV431565 4P LV429456 LV430556 LV431566 I max ammeter module Rating A 100 160 250 3P
26. SMS is a family of web enabled software products for high end power monitoring applications It is designed for large power systems SMS products offer detailed analysis of electrical events long duration data logging and extensive economical report building capabilities e g consumption monitoring and tariff management Awide variety of screens can be displayed in real time including more than 50 tables analogue meters bargraphs alarms logs with links to display waveforms and predefined reports on energy quality and service costs Other software Compact NSX devices can forward their measurement and operating information to special software integrating the electrical installation and other technical facilities m SCADA process control software Vijeo CITECT m BMS Building Management System software Vista Please consult us Schneider version 1 0 PB103843 18 PB103842 47 PB103583 18 Functions and characteristics External neutral voltage tap cat no LV434208 External 24 V DC power supply module Accessories for Micrologic trip units External neutral current transformer ENCT The external transformer is a sensor required for a three pole circuit breaker in a system with a distributed neutral to measure the neutral current in order to m protect the neutral conductor m protect against insulation faults This current transformer can be connected to Micrologic 5 6 trip units The transformer
27. Schneider Electric solutions Electrical switchboard supervision via MPS100 or EGX400 Web servers Asimple solution for customers who want to consult the main electrical parameters of switchboard devices without dedicated software Up to 16 switchboard devices are connected via Modbus interfaces to an MPS100 or EGX400 Ethernet gateway integrating the functions of a web page server The embedded Web pages can be easily configured with just a few mouse clicks The information they provide is updated in real time The Web pages can be consulted using a standard Web browser on a PC connected via Ethernet to the company Intranet or remotely via a modem Automatic notification of alarms and threshold overruns is possible via e mail or SMS Short Message Service Electrical installation supervision via PowerView software PowerLogic PowerView software is ideally suited to the supervision needs of small system applications monitoring up to 32 devices Installed on a PC under Windows it represents a cost effective and easy to implement power monitoring solution that offers automatic detection of compatible devices m real time monitoring of data including power consumption m a report generator with a number of pre defined reports that can be exported to Excel m cost allocation m time stamped data logging possibilities m Modbus serial and Modbus TCP IP compatible communication SMS electrical engineering expert system software PowerLogic
28. making it possible to service machines safely by isolating them from all power sources E installation in universal and functional type enclosures m NA switch disconnector version Special applications Protection of industrial control panels Industrial control panels Compact NSX circuit breakers equipped for public distribution or motor protection functions as described in the previous pages can be used in industrial control panels The accessories for the Compact NSX range are suitable for the special needs of these switchboards Auxiliaries All auxiliaries can be added to the circuit breaker by the user m padlocking devices in the OFF position m rotary handle m status indication auxiliary contacts ON OFF and tripped m shunt MX or undervoltage MN releases m early make or early break contacts Rotary handle Direct or extended versions for mounting up to 600 mm behind the front m black front with black handle m yellow front with red handle for machine tools or emergency off as per IEC 204 VDE 0013 All rotary handles can be padlocked in the OFF position Optional door interlock recommended for MCC panels motor control centres When the device is equipped with an extended rotary handle a control accessory mounted on the shaft makes it possible to operate the device with the door open The device can be padlocked in the OFF position in compliance with UL508 Early make or early break contacts These
29. 1 base for extended rotary handle LCD display for electronic trip unit 77 5 transparent covers for trip unit Gg we 5 opaque covers for Micrologic 5 6 M6 for NSX100N H L M8 for NSX160 250N H L Small cut out Compact NS type small cut out Micrologic 5 Micrologic 6 Micrologic G E M TM MA NA Micrologic 2 Micrologic 5 6 version 2 0 Lv429312 LV429234 LV430554 LV429528 29315 LV429226 Lv429502 LV429483 LV429484 LV429486 LV429481 LV429481 LV429478 LV429479 559E6100 indd DB111439 DB111440 DB111441 DB111442 DB115621 DB111445 DB111444 DB115623 DB115622 DB111443 DB112278 DB112736 DB112729 Catalogue numbers Monitoring and control test tools Compact and Vigicompact NSX100 160 250 Monitoring and control remote operation Circuit breaker acces ULP display module sories Breaker Status Control Module BSCM Switchboard front display module FDM121 FDM mounting accessory diameter 22 mm ULP communication module ULP wiring accessori Modbus interface es NSX cord L 0 35 m NSX cord L 1 3m NSX cord L 3 m Modbus SL communication interface module NSX cord for U gt 480 VAC L 0 35 m 10 stacking connectors for communication interface modules 10 Modbus line terminators RS 485 roll cable 4 wires length 60 m 10 RJ45 connectors female female 10 ULP line terminators 10 RJ45 RJ45 male cord L 0 3 m 10 RJ45
30. 3 Base plate with mechanical interlocking 4 Electrical interlocking unit IVE 5 Coupling accessory downstream connection Standard device accessories may be used for the coupling accessory on the base plate Source changeover systems Remote operated and automatic source changeover systems Coupling accessory on base plate Remote operated systems It is made up of two devices with motor mechanisms mounted on a base plate and combined with m an electrical interlocking unit m optional mechanical interlocking system Electrical interlocking unit IVE Interlocks two devices equipped with motor mechanisms and auxiliary contacts The IVE unit is mandatory to ensure the necessary time delays required for safe switching Mechanical interlocking system The mechanical interlocking system is strongly recommended to limit the effects of design or wiring errors and to avoid manual switching errors Automatic systems An automatic controller can manage switching from one source to the other The controller can be m a device provided by the customer m an integrated BA controller m an integrated UA controller An integrated BA or UA automatic controller manages source transfer according to user selected sequences that can include source priorities start up of a generator return to the Normal source etc An ACP auxiliaries control plate facilitates installation of the BA and UA controllers The plate includes two circuit breakers
31. Compact and Vigicompact NSX100 160 250 cont 1 connection adapter for plug in base 3P 4P 1 9 wire fixed connector for base 1 9 wire moving connector for circuit breaker 1 support for 2 moving connectors 9 wire manual auxiliary connector fixed moving 2 long insulated right angle terminal extensions Setof 2 2 IP40 shutters for base Base 2P 3P Base 4P 2 power connections 2 3 4P 1 short terminal shield 2 3P 1 short terminal shield 4P 1 safety trip interlock 2 3 4P Escutcheon collar Toggle Escutcheon collar Vigi module Locking kit keylock not included Keylock keylock adapter not included Ronis 1351B 500 Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z 2 carriage switches connected disconnected position indication Schneider version 2 0 Electric Lv429306 LV429307 Lv429273 LV429274 LV429275 LV429272 LV429276 Lv429271 LV429265 LV429266 LV429267 LV429268 LV429515 LV429516 Lv429270 Lv429284 LV429285 LV429286 41940 42888 Lv429287 DB111431 DB115620 DB111430 DB111432 DB111433 DB111438 DB111429 DB111435 DB111436 DB115886 Catalogue numbers Accessories cont Compact and Vigicompact NSX100 160 250 cont Spare parts Ss 10 spare toggle extensions NSX250 LV429313 w Bag of screws 12 snap in nuts fixed FC NS retrofit escutcheon IP40 toggle escutcheon 1 set of 10 identification labels
32. Lv429348 04031 04033 04034 LV429223 LV429224 LV429308 LV429309 LV429261 LV429262 LV429263 LV429264 LV429221 LV429222 LV431563 LV431564 LV431060 LV431061 LV431064 559E6100 indd DB112237 DB112238 DB112239 DB112241 DB112240 DB112734 DB112242 Catalogue numbers cont Crimp lugs for copper cable j For cable 120 mm For cable 185 mm Crimp lugs for aluminium cable For cable 150 mm l l For cable 185 mm Insulation accessories 1 short terminal shield for breaker or plug in base 1 long terminal shield for breaker or plug in base Interphase barriers for breaker or plug in base Connection adapter for plug in base 2 insulating screens for breaker 45 mm pitch 1 Supplied with 2 or 3 interphase barriers 559E6100 indd Schneider Accessories cont Compact and Vigicompact NSX100 160 250 version 2 0 Setof 3 Set of 4 Set of 3 Set of 4 Set of 3 Set of 4 Set of 3 Set of 4 Set of 3 Set of 4 3P 4P 3P 4P Set of 6 3P 4P 3P Lv429252 waze2ss LV429253 LV429257 Be LV429258 LVA29504 LV429505 LV429506 LV429507 LV429515 LV429516 LV429517 LV429518 LV429329 LV429306 LV429307 LV429330 LV429331 DB112254 DB112275 DB112276 DB111454 DB115631 Catalogue numbers Accessories cont Compact and Vigicompact NSX100 160 250 cont Electrical auxiliarie
33. Micrologic 2 2 40 160 A Micrologic 2 2 250 A 10 000 AI ADA g 10 000 Ir ad 21090 100 A Ir 36 100 A a 2 000 250 A Ir 90 250 A 2 000 160 A Ir 57 160 A 2 000 1 000 1 000 500 500 200 200 100 100 50 50 20 20 10 10 5 5 t s t s 2 2 4 t Isd 1 5 10 x Ir 4 e Isd 1 5 10 x Ir 5 5 2 2 Fal 1 05 05 02 02 01 01 t lt 10 ms t lt 10ms 005 gt 005 L gt PEPE TTT PEt ttt 002 a 002 he 001 amp li 15x In 001 li 12x In 5 7 1 2 345 7 10 20 30 5070100 200300 5 7 1 2 345 7 10 20 30 5070100 200300 lIr Il lr Reflex tripping Micrologic 2 2 G 40 160 A Micrologic 2 2 G 250A ea 40 A Ir 16 40A can 100 A Ir 36 100 A a 250 A Ir 90 250 A 2000 160 A Ir 57 160 A 2000 1 000 1 000 500 500 200 200 100 100 50 50 20 20 10 10 5 5 t s t s 2 2 Isd 1 5 9 x Ir P Isd 1 5 9 x Ir 5 5 2 2 A 1 05 05 02 02 01 t lt 10 ms 01 t lt 10 ms 005 gt 005 l gt 002 ae 002 en 001 li 15x In 001 i li 12 x In 5 7 1 2 345 7 10 20 30 5070100 200300 5 71 2 345 7 10 20 30 5070100 200300 lt i llr illr Reflex tripping Schneider version 1 0 559E5100 indd ectric DB114770 DB114772 Micrologic 5 2 and 6 2 A or E electronic trip units
34. Serial number P07451 Part number LU432091 5111947 Metering meter 559E1200 indd 1 02 kWh DB112137 DB112139 DB112141 Main Menu X Metering A Alarms NPI e116 Metering U average D Contrast Brightness Language Services Navigation Five buttons are used for intuitive and fast navigation The Context button may be used to select the type of display digital bargraph analogue The user can select the display language Chinese English French German Italian Portuguese Spanish etc Other languages can be downloaded Screens Main menu When powered up the FDM121 screen automatically displays the ON OFF status of the device Quick view Metering Alarms Services When notin use the screen is not backlit Backlighting can be activated by pressing one of the buttons It goes off after 3 minutes Fast access to essential information m Quick view provides access to five screens that display a summary of essential operating information I U f P E THD circuit breaker On Off Access to detailed information m Metering can be used to display the measurement data I U V f P Q S E THD PF with the corresponding min max values m Alarms displays active alarms and the alarm history m Services provides access to the operation counters energy and maximeter reset function maintenance indicators identification of modul
35. Switchgear etc and for each item Adapter for plug in base Connection terminal etc this glossary provides m the page number in the concerned catalogue m the reference standard m the standardised IEC symbol m the definition Text in quotation marks is drawn from the standards Alcepesosies v oo00000000000000000000000000000020000000000000E0 HEHE EEE EEE EEE EEE EEE EEE EEE EEE EEE Adapter for plug in base gt A 72 Bare cable connector gt A 71 Connection terminals gt A 70 One piece spreader gt A 70 Spreaders gt A 70 The adapter is a plastic component that can be installed upstream and or downstream of the plug in base and enables use of all the connection accessories of the fixed device Conducting part of the circuit breaker intended for connection to power circuits On Compact NSX it is an aluminium part that screws to the connection terminals of the circuit breaker There are one or more holes single or multiple cable connector for the ends of bare cables Flat copper surface linked to the conducting parts of the circuit breaker and to which power connections are made using bars connectors or lugs The spreader is a plastic component with copper connectors that can be installed upstream and or downstream of a Compact NSX100 to 250 circuit breaker with a pole pitch of 35 mm It increases the pitch of the circuit breaker terminals to the 45 mm pitch of a NSX400 630 device to facilitate connection of larg
36. VA or W Pick up 30 Response time ms 50 Circuit breaker control by MN or MX When the circuit breaker has been tripped by an MN or MX release it must be reset before it can be reclosed MN or MX tripping takes priority over manual closing In the presence of a standing trip order closing of the contacts even temporary is not possible m Connection using wires up to 1 5 mm to integrated terminal blocks version 1 0 PB103585 40 PB103607 50 PB103608 50 PB103586 50 Functions and Accessories and auxiliaries characteristics Rotary handles There are two types ofrotary handle Direct rotary handle m direct rotary handle Standard handle m extended rotary handle Degree of protection IP40 IK07 There are two models The direct rotary handle maintains m standard with a black handle m visibility of and access to trip unit settings m red handle and yellow front for machine m suitability for isolation m indication of the three positions O OFF ON and tripped m access to the push to trip button Device locking The rotary handle facilitates circuit breaker locking m Padlocking standard situation in the OFF position using 1 to 3 padlocks shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm not supplied with a simple modification in the ON and OFF positions Locking in the ON position does not prevent free circuit breaker tripping if a fault occurs In this case the handle remains the ON position after the circuit breaker
37. m CE ULmarking m 24 V DC power supply with tolerances 24 V 20 19 2 V to 24 V 10 26 4 V When the FDM121 is connected to the communication network the 24 V is supplied by the communication system wiring system m Consumption 40 mA Mounting The FDM121 is easily installed in a switchboard m Standard door cut out 92 x 92 mm m Attached using clips To avoid a cut out in the door an accessory is available for surface mounting by drilling only two 22 mm diameter holes The FDM121 degree of protection is IP54 in front IP54 is maintained after switchboard mounting by using the supplied gasket during installation Connection The FDM121 is equipped with m a 24 V DC terminal block plug in type with 2 wire inputs per point for easy daisy chaining power supply range of 24 V 20 19 2 V to 24 V 10 26 4 V m two RJ45 jacks The Micrologic connects to the internal communication terminal block on the Compact NSX via the pre wired NSX cord Connection to one ofthe RJ45 connectors on the FDM121 automatically establishes communication between the Micrologic and the FDM121 and supplies power to the Micrologic measurement functions When the second connector is not used it must be fitted with a line terminator Schneider version 1 0 559E 1200 indd Electric DB112135 DB112136 DB112138 DB112140 Escape Down OK Up Context Alarm LED AnARwWH Erd Produit id Micrologic 5 3A
38. m a mechanical problem related to a process malfunction e g excessive torque or damage to the motor e g bearing vibrations These two causes will also result in excessively long starting times Impedant short circuits 10 x In lt I lt 50 x In This type of short circuit is generally due to deteriorated insulation of motor windings or damaged supply cables Short circuits I gt 50 x In This relatively rare type of fault may be caused by a connection error during maintenance m Phase unbalance or phase loss protection Phase unbalance or phase loss can cause temperature rise and braking torques that can lead to premature ageing of the motor These effects are even greater during starting therefore protection must be virtually immediate Additional electronic protection m Locked rotor m Under load m Long starts and stalled rotor m Insulation faults Motor feeder solutions Standard IEC 60947 defines three types of device combinations for the protection of motor feeders Three devices m magnetic circuit breaker contactor thermal relay Two devices m thermal magnetic circuit breaker contactor One device m thermal magnetic circuit breaker contactor in an integrated solution e g Tesys U version 1 0 559E1500 indd Schneider Electric Device coordination The various components of a motor feeder must be coordinated Standard IEC 60947 4 1 defines three types of coordination depending on the operating
39. t lt 10 ms t lt 10 ms 005 La 005 gt i II TEE i PrP brid 002 En 002 Enz 001 i m li 17 xin 001 m li 15x In 5 71 2 345 7 10 20 30 5070100 200300 5 71 2 345 7 10 20 30 5070100 200300 a le nn a E Reflex tripping Micrologic 6 E M ground fault protection 10 000 5 000 2 000 25A lg 0 6 1 x In 1 000 50A lg 0 3 1xIn gt 50A lg 0 2 1xIn 500 200 100 50 20 1 t s ar nan ao 02 01 005 002 001 05 07 1 2 345 7 1 2 345 7 10 20 30 lt _ _ 1 In The tripping curve is identical to that of Micrologic 6 Ground fault protection is shown separately 559E5100 indd Schneider version 1 0 Additional characteristics Tripping curves Compact NSX400 to 630 Protection of distribution systems Micrologic 2 3 5 3 and 6 3A or E electronic trip units DB114780 DB114782 Micrologic 2 3 250 400 A Micrologic 2 3 630 A 10 000 5 410000 5 000 250 A Ir 63 250 A 5 5 000 FREE N 5 630 A Ir 225 630 A 2 000 2 000 1 000 1 000 500 500 200 200 100 100 50 50 20 20 10 10 5 5 t s t s 2 2 1 Isd 1 5 10 x Ir Isd 1 5 10 x Ir 5 5 2 2 4 1 05 05 02 02 01 01 002 001 5 7 1 gt t lt 10 ms III TI li 12x In 20 30 50 70100 2 345 7 10 lt i llr Reflex tripping Micrologic 5 3 and 6 3 A or E 400 A 10 000 2 A 10000 5 000 400 A Ir 100 400 A a 5000 63
40. with transfer from one to the other after mechanical unlocking m connected the power circuits are connected m disconnected the power circuits are disconnected the device can be operated to check auxiliary operation m removed the device is free and can be removed from the chassis Parts of a withdrawable configuration Awithdrawable configuration requires two side plates installed on the base and two sides plates mounted on the circuit breaker Similar to the plug in version a safety trip causes automatic tripping ifthe device is ON before engaging or withdrawing it and enables device operation in the disconnected position Accessories Accessories are the same as for the base with in addition m auxiliary contacts for installation on the fixed part indicating the connected and disconnected positions m locking by 1 to 3 padlocks shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm to D prevent insertion for connection lock the circuit breaker in connected or disconnected position m toggle collar for circuit breakers with a toggle mounted through a front panel intended to maintain the degree of protection whatever the position of the circuit breaker supplied with a toggle extension m telescopic shaft for extended rotary handles The door can then be closed with the device in the connected and disconnected positions DB112219 Protection collar for toggle and toggle Telescopic shaft extension to provide IP4 in the connected and disconne
41. 0 1 0 1 40 3 42 5 47 0 10 0 05 0 2 0 1 0 1 50 1 64 4 11 0 15 0 08 0 3 0 1 0 1 63 2 17 8 61 0 3 0 15 0 4 0 1 0 1 80 1 37 8 77 0 4 0 2 0 6 0 1 0 1 100 0 88 8 8 0 7 0 35 1 0 2 0 2 NSX160 80 1 26 8 06 0 4 0 2 0 6 0 1 0 1 100 0 77 7 7 0 7 0 35 1 0 2 0 2 125 0 69 10 78 1 1 0 55 1 6 0 3 0 3 160 0 55 13 95 1 8 0 9 2 6 0 5 0 5 NSX250 125 0 61 9 45 1 1 0 55 1 6 0 3 0 3 160 0 46 11 78 1 8 0 9 2 6 0 5 0 5 200 10 39 15 4 2 8 1 4 4 0 8 0 8 250 0 3 18 75 4 4 2 2 6 3 1 3 1 3 NSX100 2 5 148 42 0 93 0 0 0 0 0 6 3 99 02 3 93 0 0 0 0 0 12 5 4 05 0 63 0 0 0 0 0 25 1 66 1 04 0 0 0 1 0 0 50 0 67 1 66 0 2 0 1 0 3 0 1 0 1 100 0 52 5 2 0 7 0 35 1 0 2 0 2 NSX160 150 0 38 8 55 1 35 0 68 2 6 0 45 0 45 NSX250 220 0 3 14 52 2 9 1 45 4 89 0 97 0 97 NSX400 320 0 12 12 29 3 2 1 6 6 14 1 54 1 54 NSX630 500 0 1 25 13 99 T 15 3 75 3 75 Schneider version 1 0 559E2100 indd Compact NSX equipped with electronic trip units The values indicated in the table below are typical values for a device at full rated load and 50 60 Hz The definitions and information are the same as that for circuit breakers equipped with thermal magnetic trip units Compact NSX100 to 630 equipped with Micrologic trip units NSX100 40 0 84 1 34 0 1 0 05 0 2 0 1 0 1 100 0 468 4 68 0 7 0 35 1 0 2 0 2 NSX160 40 0 73 1 17 0 4 0 2 0 6 0 1 0 1 100 0 36 3 58 0 7 0 35 1 0 2 0 2 160 0 36 9
42. 1 5 5 2 2 A 05 05 02 02 01 01 t lt 10 ms t lt 10 ms 005 gt 005 gt 002 002 001 001 3 71 2 345 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200300 St 4A 2 345 7 10 20 30 5070100 200300 e E A Reflex tripping Micrologic 2 2 M electronic trip units t s Micrologic 2 2M 25A Micrologic 2 2 M 50 220 A en 5 Rn 50A Ir 25 50 A 25 A Ir 12 a 100 A Ir 50 100 A 1 000 1 000 220A Ir 100 220 A 500 class 20 500 class 20 200 class 10 200 class 10 class 5 class 5 100 100 50 50 20 20 10 10 5 5 t s 2 2 4 Isd 5 13 x Ir 1 i Isd 5 13 x Ir 5 5 2 2 1 A 05 05 02 02 01 j 01 t lt 10 ms t lt 10 ms 005 ED 005 gt i E ATI Tall 002 pi 002 001 i li 17 xin 001 li 15xIn 5 74 2 345 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200300 S67 4 2 345 7 10 20 30 5070100 200300 De H A Reflex tripping Schneider version 1 0 559E5100 indd ectric DB114777 DB114791 Micrologic 6 2 E M and 6 E M electronic trip units Micrologic 6 2 E M 25A Micrologic 6 2 E M 50 220 A tt 5 ee 50A Ir 25 50A 25A Ir 12 25A a 80 A Ir 35 80 A 2000 2000 150A Ir 70 150A ano class 30 Tooo 220 A Ir 100 220 A class 20 300 class 10 500 class 30 class 5 class 20 200 200 i class 10 100 100 I class 5 50 50 20 20 10 10 5 5 t s t s 2 2 p Isd 5 13 x Ir 1 Isd 5 13 x Ir 5 5 2 2 A 05 05 02 02 01 j 01
43. 1 0 559E1500 indd Electric Magnetic trip units MA 2 5 to 220 B me Circuit breaker Compact NSX100 a Compact NSX160 Compact NSX250 Im Pick up A Im Inx Adjustable from 6 to 14 x In Adjustable from 9 to 14 x In accuracy 20 settings 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 settings 9 10 11 12 13 14 N Time delay ms tm fixed t Micrologic 1 3 M Circuit breaker Compact NSX400 Compact NSX630 Isd Pick up A Isd Adjustable directly in amps pee ae 9 settings 1600 1920 2440 2560 9 settings 2500 3000 3500 4000 2880 3200 3520 3840 4160 A 4500 5000 5500 6000 6500 A li Time delay ms tsd Non adjustable i Non tripping time 20 Maximum break time 60 Pick up A linon adjustable 4800 6500 accuracy 15 Non tripping time 0 Maximum break time 30 ms 1 Motor standards require operation at 65 C Circuit breaker ratings are derated to take this requirement into account 559E1500 indd Schneider version 1 0 PB103376 Functions and characteristics Micrologic 2 M trip units provide built in thermal and magnetic protection They are used in 2 device motor feeder solutions on Compact NSX100 to 630 circuit breakers with performance levels B F H N S L They provide protection for motors up to 315 kW at 400 V against m short circuits m overloads with selection of a trip class 5 10 or 20 m phase unbalance DB11
44. 10 x In for 200 and 250 A ratings m fixed pick up for 16 to 630 A ratings Protection against insulation faults Two solutions are possible by adding m a Vigi module acting directly on the trip unit of the circuit breaker m a Vigirex relay connected to an MN or MX voltage release Protection versions m 3 pole 3P 3D 3 pole frame 3P with detection on all 3 poles 3D 3P 2D 3 pole frame 3P with detection on 2 poles 2D m 4 pole 4P 3D 4 pole frame 4P with detection on 3 poles 3D 4P 4D 4 pole frame 4P with detection on all 4 poles same threshold for phases and neutral MA magnetic trip units DB112047 Ima3100 2000 2900 MA 220 2700 2450 2200 220A 65 C A NG Im In distribution applications circuit breakers equipped with MA magnetic only trip units are used for m short circuit protection of secondary windings of LV LV transformers with overload protection on the primary side m as an alternative to a switch disconnector at the head of a switchboard in order to provide short circuit protection Their main use is however for motor protection applications in conjunction with a thermal relay and a contactor or motor starter see Motor protection page A 36 Protecti n arena rerseteree ee a Magnetic protection Im Short circuit protection with an adjustable pick up Im that initiates instantaneous tripping if exceeded u m Im Inx setin amps on an ad
45. 16 1 8 0 9 2 6 0 5 0 5 NSX250 100 0 27 2 73 1 1 0 55 1 6 0 2 0 2 250 10 28 17 56 44 2 2 6 3 1 3 1 3 NSX400 400 0 12 19 2 3 2 1 6 9 6 2 4 2 4 NSX630 630 0 1 39 69 6 5 3 25 19 49 5 95 5 95 1 The power loss values for the Vigi modules and withdrawable circuit breakers are given for 570A 559E2100 indd Schneider version 1 0 PO71I8502 7 Compact NSX Dimensions and connection Contents Functions and characteristics A 1 Installation recommendations B 1 Dimensions and mounting Compact NSX100 to 630 fixed version C 2 Vigicompact NSX100 to 630 fixed version C 3 Compact NSX100 to 630 plug in version C 4 Compact NSX100 to 630 withdrawable version C 6 Vigicompact NSX100 to 630 plug in and withdrawable versions C 8 Visu function for Compact NSX100 to 250 fixed version C 9 Visu function for Compact NSX400 630 fixed version C 10 Motor mechanism module for Compact NSX100 to 630 C 11 Direct rotary handle for Compact and Vigicompact NSX100 to 630 C 12 MCC and CNOMO type direct rotary handles for Compact NSX100 to 630 fixed version C 13 Extended rotary handle for Compact NSX100 to 630 C 14 Indication and measurement modules for Compact NSX100 to 630 fixed version C 15 One piece spreader for Compact NSX100 to 250 fixed version C 16 FDM121 switchboard display C 17 Front panel accessories Compact NSX100 to 630 C 18 Front panel cutouts Compact NSX100 to 630 fixed version C 20 Vigicompact NSX100 to 630 fixed version C 22 Compa
46. 1BSCM module m 1 NSX cord internal terminal block for both communication and 24 V DC supply to the BSCM Communication of status conditions is compatible with a standard motor mechanism and a rotary handle Communication of status indications and controls This requires in addition to the previous auxiliaries m 1 communicating motor mechanism connected to the BSCM Communication of measurements Available on Micrologic 5 6 the system consists of m 1 NSX cord internal terminal block for both communication and 24 V DC supply to the Micrologic Communication of measurements is compatible with a standard or communicating motor mechanism and a rotary handle Communication of status indications controls and measurements Available on Micrologic 5 6 the system consists of m 1BSCM module m 1 NSX cord internal terminal block for both communication and 24 V DC supply to the BSCM and the Micrologic m 1 communicating motor mechanism connected to the BSCM Installation of SDx or SDTAM is compatible with communication The following table indicates auxiliary possibilities depending on the type of trip unit NA Micrologic 1 3 M Micrologic 2 Motor mechanism rotary handle UU Communicating motor mechanism UU EI I NSX cord DB115595 NSX cord eeccccccccccccces O oooco
47. 200300 llir _____ gt 002 001 version 1 0 559E5100 indd DB114789 DB 115634 Micrologic 6 3 E M and 6 E M electronic trip units Micrologic 6 3 E M 320 A Micrologic 6 3 E M 500 A 10 000 g 10 000 5 000 320 A Ir 160 320 A 5000 500 A Ir 250 500 A 2 000 2 000 1 000 1 000 class 30 class class 20 500 H class 10 500 class 10 200 class 5 200 class 5 100 100 50 50 20 20 10 10 5 5 t s t s 2 2 i Isd 5 13 x Ir i Isd 5 13 x Ir 5 5 2 2 A 05 05 02 02 01 01 t lt 10 ms t lt 10 ms 005 gt 005 gt MPEP ttt i III bet 002 Eiz 002 E li 001 lt lt li 15x In 001 j li 13 x In 5 7 1 2 345 7 10 20 30 5070100 200300 5 7 1 2 345 7 10 20 30 5070100 200300 D l A A AH AAA m om Reflex tripping Micrologic 6 E M motor protection 10 000 5 000 2 000 1 000 500 200 100 50 20 1 t s an nn ano 02 01 005 002 001 05 07 1 2 345 7 1 2 345 7 10 20 30 lt _ __ 1 In The tripping curve is identical to that of Micrologic 6 Ground fault protection is shown separately 559E5100 indd Schneider version 1 0 Additional characteristics Tripping curves
48. 5 x Ir steps using the keypad Time delay s tsd keypad Off 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 setting 12On a aa ws A Non tripping time ms 20 80 140 230 350 Maximum break time ms 80 140 200 320 500 Pick up A li Inx keypad setting Adjustment in steps of 0 5 x In over the range 1 5 x In to accuracy 15 15 x In NSX100 160 12 x In NSX250 400 or 11 x In NSX630 Non tripping time 10 ms Maximum break time 50 ms for gt li Pick up A Ig Inx dial setting accuracy 100A In 40A 04 04 05 06 07 08 09 1 Off In gt 40A 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 1 off Fine adjustment in 0 05 A steps using the keypad Time delay s tg keypad Off 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 setting ROn 01 02 03 04 Non tripping time ms 20 80 140 230 350 Maximum break time ms 80 140 200 320 500 Test Ig function built in 1 Ifthe trip units are used in high temperature environments the Micrologic setting must take into account the thermal limitations of the circuit breaker See the temperature derating table 559E1200 indd Schneider version 1 0 PB103365 DB112211 DB112131 DB112133 Functions and characteristics In addition to protection functions Micrologic 5 6 trip units offer all the functions of Power Meter products as well as operating assistance for the circuit breaker m display of settings m measurement functions o Ammeter A o Energy E E alarms E time stamped histories and event tables m maintenance indicator m communication Micr
49. 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 63 72 71 69 68 66 65 63 61 5 60 58 57 55 54 80 92 90 88 86 84 82 80 78 76 74 72 70 68 100 115 113 110 108 105 103 97 5 95 92 5 90 87 5 85 125 144 141 138 134 131 128 125 122 119 116 113 109 106 160 184 180 176 172 168 164 160 156 152 148 144 140 136 200 230 225 220 215 210 205 200 195 190 185 180 175 170 250 288 281 277 269 263 256 250 244 238 231 225 219 213 Example 1 What is the tripping time of a Compact NSX100 equipped with a TM100D trip unit set to 100 A for an overload 500 A The overload I Ir is calculated as a function of the temperature Use the above values and the curve on page E 3 shown on the left to determine the corresponding time m At40 C Ir 100A I Ir 5 and the tripping time is between 6 and 60 seconds m At 20 C Ir 110A I Ir 4 54 and the tripping time is between 8 and 80 seconds m At60 C Ir 90A I Ir 5 55 and the tripping time is between 5 and 50 seconds Example 2 What is the setting to obtain a real Ir of 210A taking into account the temperature for a Compact NSX250 equipped with a TM250D trip unit The necessary dial setting in amperes is shown below m At 40 C Ir 210 250 x 250 A 210A m At 20 C Ir 210 277 x 250 A 189 5 A m At 60 C Ir 210 225 x 250 A 233A Additional derating coefficient for an add on module The values indicated in the previous tables are valid for fixed circuit breakers equipped with o
50. 50 60 Hz LV429384 LV429404 48 V 50 60 Hz LV429385 LV429405 110 130 V 50 60 Hz LV429386 LV429406 220 240 V 50 60 Hz and 208 277 V60Hz LV429387 LV429407 380 415 V 50 Hz and 440 480 V 60 Hz LV429388 LV429408 525 V 50 Hz and 600 V60 Hz LV429389 LV429409 DC 12V LV429382 LV429402 24V LV429390 LV429410 30 V LV429391 LV429411 48V LV429392 LV429412 60 V LV429383 LV429403 125V LV429393 LV429413 250 V LV429394 LV429414 MN 48 V 50 60 Hz with fixed time delay Composed of MN 48 V DC LV429412 Delay unit 48 V 50 60 Hz LV429426 MN 220 240 V 50 60 Hz with fixed time delay Composed of MN 250 VDC LV429414 Delay unit 220 240 V 50 60 Hz LV429427 MN 48 V DC AC 50 60 Hz with adjustable time delay Composed of MN 48 V DC LV429412 Delay unit 48 V 50 60 Hz 33680 MN110 130 V DC AC 50 60 Hz with adjustable time delay Composed of MN 125 VDC LV429413 Delay unit 110 130 V 50 60 Hz 33681 MN 220 250 V 50 60 Hz with adjustable time delay Composed of MN 250 VDC LV429414 Delay unit 220 250 V 50 60 Hz 33682 559E6200 indd Schneider version 2 0 ectric DB111475 DB111476 Catalogue numbers Accessories cont Compact and Vigicompact NSX400 630 cont Motor mechanism Motor mechanism module AC DC Operation counter Communicating motor mechanism module Motor mechanism module Breaker status Communication Module NSX cord Voltage 48 60 V 50 60 Hz 110 130 V 50 60 Hz 220 240 V 50 60 Hz and 208 277 V 60 Hz 380
51. 7 8 108 5 a 75 5 lhe a gt 94 5 67 HH 63 5 104 30 m u 2 0 M Long insulated connectors are mandatory 559E3500 indd Schneider version 1 0 DB112168 DB112172 DB112177 DB115657 DB112173 DB112174 Dimensions and connection DB115653 DB115654 Bar L Lug Accessories for NSX100 to 250 Straight terminal extensions A f Tinned copper Spreaders separate parts Tinned copper For U gt 600 V the mandatory insulation kit is not compatible with spreaders made up of separate parts DB112176 DB115655 Double L terminal extensions Tinned copper one piece spreader The one piece spreader must be used Accessories for NSX400 and 630 Spreaders made up of separate parts for 52 5 and 70 mm pitch A o fl 8 5 2 Tinned copper For U gt 600 V use ofthe 52 5 mm pitch spreaders requires a specific insulation kit The 70 mm pitch spreaders may not be used Accessories for NSX100 to 630 Right angle terminal extensions Tinned copper To be mounted on upstream side 45 terminal extensions Tinned copper DB112175 Edgewise terminal extensions Tinned copper DB115655 DB115655 DB115658 Power connections Connection of insulated bars or cables with lugs to Compact and Vigicompact NSX100 to 630 Direct connection to NSX100 to 630 Dimensions NSX100 NSX160 250 NS
52. 96 55 44 32 150 414 396 360 240 180 144 37 115 66 53 39 200 552 528 480 320 240 192 45 140 80 64 47 250 604 403 302 242 55 169 97 78 57 300 722 482 361 289 75 230 132 106 77 Note 1 hp 0 7457 kW 90 278 160 128 93 110 340 195 156 113 132 400 230 184 134 160 487 280 224 162 Asynchronous motor starting parameters 200 609 350 280 203 The main parameters of direct on line starting of three phase asynchronous motors 250 748 430 344 250 90 of all applications are listed below 315 940 540 432 313 m Ir rated current This is the current drawn by the motor at full rated load e g approximately 100 Arms t for 55 kW at 400 V m Id starting current This is the current drawn by the motor during starting on average 7 2 Infora duration td of 5 to 30 seconds depending on the application e g 720 Arms for 10 seconds These values determine the trip class and any additional long start protection devices that may be needed m Id peak starting current This is the subtransient current during the first two half waves when the system is energised on the average 14 In for 10 to 15 ms e g 1840 A peak Starting time P The protection settings must effectively protect the motor notably via a suitable thermal relay trip class but let the peak starting current through Typical motor starting curve Schneider version 1 0 559E1500 indd Electric Compact NSX motor circuit breakers are designed for motor feede
53. A 1 Installation recommendations B 1 Dimensions and connection C 1 Wiring diagrams D 1 Additional characteristics E 1 NSX100 to 250 F 3 NSX400 to 630 F 29 Glossary G 1 559E6000 indd Schneider version 1 0 Schneider version 1 0 559E6000 indd ectric Compact NSX Compact NSX100 to 250 Contents NSX100 160 250F complete fixed FC device F 4 Compact NSX100 160 250F 36 kA 380 415 V F 4 NSX100 160 250N complete fixed FC device F 5 Compact NSX100 160 250N 50 kA 380 415 V F 5 NSX100 160 250H complete fixed FC device F 6 Compact NSX100 160 250H 70 kA 380 415 V F 6 NSX100 160 250NA complete fixed FC device F 7 Compact NSX100 160 250NA F 7 NSX100 160 250F N H SI L fixed FC device based on separate components F 8 Compact and Vigicompact F 8 Trip unit accessories F 10 Compact and Vigicompact NSX100 160 250 F 10 Installation and connection F 11 Compact and Vigicompact NSX100 160 250 F 11 Accessories F 12 Compact and Vigicompact NSX100 160 250 F 12 Monitoring and control test tools F 21 Compact and Vigicompact NSX100 160 250 F 21 559E6100TDM indd Schneider version 2 0 DB112222 DB112223 DB112224 Catalogue numbers NSX100 160 250F complete fixed FC device Compact NSX100 160 250F 36 kA 380 415 V Compact NSX100 160 250F With thermal magnetic trip unit TM D gt Compact NSX100F 36 kA at 380 415 V Rating 3P 2d 3P 3d 4P 3d 4P 4d TM16D LV429627 LV429637 LV429647 LV429657 TM25D LV429626 LV429636
54. A _ Y i Note door cutout dimensions are given for a device position in A the enclosure where A 2 100 h x 5 with respect to the door h hinge Schneider GF Electric version 1 0 DB115088 DB115090 Dimensions and Front panel cutouts connection Compact NSX100 to 630 plug in and withdrawable versions Plug in version i DB115089 Bare sheet metal See Compact NSX100 to 630 fixed version page C 20 With IP30 front panel escutcheon See Compact NSX100 to 630 fixed version page C 20 With IP40 front panel escutcheon See Compact NSX100 to 630 fixed version page C 21 With toggle cover See Compact NSX100 to 630 fixed version page C 21 Withdrawable version NSX100 to 250 NSX400 630 With protection collar and IP40 front panel escutcheon HM DB115091 DB115066 DB115067 Schgeider er 559E3300 indd DB115092 DB115095 Vigicompact NSX100 to 630 plug in and withdrawable versions Plug in version DB115094 Bare sheet metal See Compact NSX100 to 630 fixed version page C 22 With IP30 front panel escutcheon See Compact NSX100 to 630 fixed version page C 22 With IP40 front panel escutcheon See Compact NSX100 to 630 fixed version page C 23 Withdrawable version NSX100 to 250 NSX400 630 With protection collar and IP40 front panel escutcheon DB115096 DB115097 DB115098
55. LV429646 LV429656 TM32D LV429625 LV429635 LV429645 LV429655 TM40D LV429624 LV429634 LV429644 LV429654 TM50D LV429623 LV429633 LV429643 LV429653 TM63D LV429622 LV429632 LV429642 LV429652 TM80D LV429621 LV429631 LV429641 LV429651 TM100D LV429620 LV429630 LV429640 LV429650 Compact NSX160F 36 kA at 380 415 V Rating 3P 2d 3P 3d 4P 3d 4P 4d TM80D LV430623 LV430633 LV430643 LV430653 TM100D LV430622 LV430632 LV430642 LV430652 TM125D LV430621 LV430631 LV430641 LV430651 TM160D LV430620 LV430630 LV430640 LV430650 Compact NSX250F 36 kA at 380 415 V Rating 3P 3d 3P 3d 4P 3d 4P 4d TM125D LV431623 LV431633 LV431643 LV431653 TM160D LV431622 LV431632 LV431642 LV431652 TM200D LV431621 LV431631 LV431641 LV431651 TM250D LV431620 LV431630 LV431640 LV431650 With electronic trip unit Micrologic 2 2 LS protection Compact NSX100F 36 kA at 380 415 V Rating 3P 3d 4P 3d Ad 3d N 2 40 LV429772 LV429782 100 LV429770 LV429780 Compact NSX160F 36 kA at 380 415 V Rating 3P 3d 4P 3d 4d 3d N 2 100 LV430771 LV430781 160 LV430770 LV430780 Compact NSX250F 36 kA at 380 415 V Rating 3P 3d 4P 3d 4d 3d N 2 100 LV431772 LV431782 160 LV431771 LV431781 250 LV431770 LV431780 With electronic trip unit Micrologic 5 2 A LSI protection ammeter Compact NSX100F 36 kA at 380 415 V Rating 3P 3d 4P 3d Ad 3d N 2 3d OSN 40 LV429882 LV429887 100 LV429880 LV429885 Compact NSX160F 36 kA at 380 415 V Rating 3P 3d AP 3d Ad 3d N
56. LV432516 LV432517 LV432518 LV432591 Lv432592 LV432520 LV432534 LV429285 LV429286 41940 42888 LV429287 559E6200 indd Catalogue numbers Accessories cont Compact and Vigicompact NSX400 630 cont Spare parts Additional toggle extension for NSX400 630 32595 DB115633 DB111430 DB115620 DB111493 DB111433 DB111495 DB111438 DB111435 DB111436 DB115907 559E6200 indd 5 spare toggle extensions LV432553 Bag of screws LV432552 Compact NS retrofit escutcheon Small cut out LV432571 IP40 toggle escutcheon Compact NS type small cut out 32556 1 set of 10 identification labels LV429226 1 base for extended rotary handle LV432498 LCD display for electronic trip unit Micrologic 5 LV429483 Micrologic 6 LV429484 Micrologic E M LV429486 5 transparent covers for electronic trip unit Micrologic 2 LV432459 Micrologic 5 6 LV432461 5 opaque covers for Micrologic 5 6 LV432460 S chneider version 2 0 DB111439 DB111440 DB112278 DB111445 DB111444 DB115623 DB115622 DB111443 DB115621 DB111442 DB111441 DB112736 DB112729 Catalogue numbers Monitoring and control test tools Compact and Vigicompact NSX400 630 Monitoring and control remote operation Circuit breaker accessories Breaker Status Control Module ULP display module ULP communication module S Modbus interface ULP wiring accessories NSX cord L 0
57. Micrologic 5 6 A Ammeter or E Energy trip units can be used on Compact NSX100 to 630 circuit breakers with performance levels B F H N S L They all have a display unit They offer basic LSI protection Micrologic 5 or LSI and ground fault protection G Micrologic 6 They also offer measurement alarm and communication functions Measurement O Display Settings Maintenance Ir tr Isd jtsd li xin ee S N VA 2B 30 O O CTO Trip unit menus Isd fault Ir tr isd tsd li xin Ar a AD a AZA a is 3 A a N WA 2 B 3 C OO ODO Faulty phase Interrupted current Display of interrupted current gQ SDx remote indication relay module with its terminal block Note all the trip units have a transparent lead sealable cover that protects access to the adjustment dials DB112109 Protection of distribution systems Micrologic 5 6 Aor E trip units z 720A g2 gt 105 440 180 175 S Ir tr isd tsd li xin 3 gt 3 xr 425 200 13 10 225 fi 100 250 se a E r A De Zn Lre 2 vv v 3 8 o N 1A 2B 3C 2 ms o 15 40 5 t amp amp Isd xIr PIGIECHON ana Nj Settings can be adjusted in two ways using the dials and or the keypad The keypad can be used to make fine adjustments in 1 Asteps below the maximum value defined by the setting on the dial Access to setting modifications via the keypad is protected
58. NSX circuit breakers in 400 Hz 440 V systems Circuit breaker Breaking capacity Icu NSX100 10 kA NSX160 10 kA NSX250 10 kA NSX400 10 kA NSX630 10 kA Trip units equipped with thermal magnetic protection The 400 Hz current settings are obtained by multiplying the 50 Hz values by the following adaptation coefficient m K1 for thermal trip units m K2 for magnetic trip units These coefficients are independent of the trip unit setting Thermal trip units The current settings are lower at 400 Hz than at 50 Hz K1 lt 1 Magnetic trip units The current settings are conversely higher at 400 Hz than at 50 Hz K2 gt 1 Consequently when the trip units are adjustable they must be set to the minimum value Adaptation coefficients for thermal magnetic trip units Circuit Trip unit In A Thermal at 40 C Im A Magnetic breaker 50Hz K1 400Hz 50Hz K2 400 Hz NSX100 TM16G 16 0 95 15 63 1 6 100 TM25G 25 0 95 24 80 1 6 130 TM40G 40 0 95 38 80 1 6 130 TM63G 63 0 95 60 125 1 6 200 NSX100 TM16D 16 0 95 15 240 1 6 300 TM25D 25 0 95 24 300 1 6 480 TM40D 40 0 95 38 500 1 6 800 TM63D 63 0 95 60 500 1 6 800 TM80D 80 0 9 72 650 1 6 900 TM100D 100 0 9 90 800 1 6 900 NSX250 TM100D 100 0 9 90 800 1 6 900 TM160D 160 0 9 144 1250 1 6 2000 TM200D 200 0 9 180 1000 to 2000 1 6 1600 to 3200 TM250D 250 0 9 225 1250 to 2500 1 6 2000 to 4000 Example NSX100 equipped with a TM16G with 50 Hz se
59. NSX400 630 spreaders with 52 5 mm pitch B1 157 5 mm B2 210 mm 206 1 The OT holes are required for rear connection only For two pole circuit breakers the middle holes are not required On rails DB112072 DB111412 2 3P NSX400 630 NSX100 to 630 3P 4P A F1 F1 5 gt F1 4 F14F1 A len T en mFt errr 5 ARE g ax KAL ax 4 6 4 6 4P wo v DB112069 DB112070 i ite Bi A 7 N Schneider version 1 0 559E3100 indd Electric 3 4P Vigicompact NSX100 to 630 fixed version 3 4P Dimensions 2898 TA oO 1 wuolow w Q i w a o o N IT N NOK yN 9 wm Or AN OM y fo o 2 e N ope 2 o i OS TOT w S S i Ta q d un a a SEBSR 2 i 2k a A A 92021190 ow Ww g2r28 2 ezoziaa zeoz aa Proz me v o mae rse E E Q ia a 2 We E e 2 u a aeg s a e ay ry 5 N j j _ Zen BE ja 9 gt 2 Tae E odSmoo 2 x uf A me A L NVN GD x om a no tot e Ge Hoo toto 4 NONNA z PS ees EE eee RR a Leoz aa nM wre AN I syoz aa s202 1 9Q ET DL oO to no LAL vv ito os v e8s8eaxns T Nm No z Mo O to m O N lo 9 N
60. RJ45 male cord L 0 6 m 5 RJ45 RJ45 male cord L 1m 5 RJ45 RJ45 male cord L 2 m 5 RJ45 RJ45 male cord L 3m 1 RJ45 RJ45 male cord L m Power supply modules External power supply module 100 240 V AC 110 230 V DC 24 V DC 3 A class 2 Battery module External power supply module 24 V DC 1 A OVC IV 24 30 V DC 48 60 V DC 100 125 VAC 110 130 VAC 200 240 V AC 380 415 VAC 24 V DC battery module 1 SDE adapter mandatory for trip unit TM MA or Micrologic 2 LV429451 2 For measurement display with Micrologic A and E or status display with BSCM 3 See Telemecanique catalogue 559E6100 indd version 2 0 LV434205 TRV00121 TRV00128 TRV00210 LV434200 LV434201 LV434202 LV434204 TRV00217 VW3A8306DRC B 50965 TRV00870 TRV00880 TRV00803 TRV00806 TRV00810 TRV00820 TRV00830 TRV00850 ABL8RPS24030 8 54440 54441 54442 54443 54444 54445 54446 DB111449 DB111451 DB111450 DB111452 DB111448 DB111453 DB117158 Catalogue numbers cont Monitoring and control test tools Compact and Vigicompact NSX100 160 250 cont Test tool software demo Test tool Software Pocket battery for Micrologic NSX100 630 Maintenance case Comprising USB maintenance interface Power supply Micrologic cord USB cord RJ45 RJ45 male cord Spare USB maintenance interface Spare power supply 110 240 VAC Spare Micrologic cor
61. Service breaking capacity Ics gt A 6 Short circuit making capacity gt A 58 Icm Suitability for isolation gt A 5 see also Positive contact indication page G 5 Suitable for isolation with gt A 5 positive contact indication see also Suitability for isolation page G2 Ultimate breaking capacity Icu gt A 6 Glossary A value of voltage which combined with a rated operational current determines the application of the equipment and to which the relevant tests and the utilisation categories are referred For multipole equipment it is generally stated as the voltage between phases This is the maximum continuous voltage at which the equipment may be used Value of short time withstand current assigned to the equipment by the manufacturer that the equipment can carry without damage under the test conditions specified in the relevant product standard Generally expressed in KA for 0 5 1 or 3 seconds This is an essential characteristic for air circuit breakers It is not significant for moulded case circuit breakers for which the design targets fast opening and high limiting capacity Expressed as a percentage of Icu it provides an indication on the robustness of the device under severe conditions It is confirmed by a test with one opening and one closing opening at Ics followed by a check that the device operates correctly at its rated current i e 50 cycles at In where temperature rise remains within tole
62. U12 U21 U23 3 a Unbalance between phase to phase voltages Uavg Phase sequence 1 2 3 1 3 2 Frequency Hz Power system E a Power Active kW reactive kVAR apparent kVA P Q S total and per phase Power factor and cos fundamental PF cos p total and per phase Maximeters minimeters Associated with instantaneous rms Reset via Micrologic and the display unit measurements Energy metering Energy Active kWh reactive kVARh Total since last reset apparent kVAh Absolute or signed mode 1 Demand and maximum demand values Demand current A Phases Present value on the selected window 2 Maximum demand since last reset 2 Demand power Active kWh reactive KVARh apparent Present value on the selected window 2 kVAh Maximum demand since last reset 2 Calculation window Sliding fixed or com synchronised Adjustable from 5 to 60 minutes in 1 minute steps 2 Absolute or signed mode 2 Power quality Total harmonic distortion Of voltage with respect to rms value THDU THDV of the Ph Ph and Ph N voltage Of current with respect to rms value THDI of the phase current Personalised alarms Settings Up to 10 alarms can be assigned to all measurements and events as well as to phase lead lag four quadrants phase sequence and thermal image Time stamped histories Trips last 17 Ir Isd li Ig lunbal ljam lund llong Alarms last 10 Operating
63. Utilisation cat IEC 60947 5 1 AC12 AC15 DC12 DC14 AC12 AC15 DC12 DC14 Operational 24V AC DC 6 6 6 1 5 3 5 1 current A 48V AC DC 6 6 25 02 5 3 25 02 110V AC DC 6 5 0 6 0 05 5 25 0 6 0 05 220 240 V AC 6 4 5 2 250 V DC 0 3 0 03 5 0 3 0 03 380 440 V AC 6 2 5 1 5 480 V AC 6 15 5 1 660 690 V AC 6 0 1 559E1860 indd version 1 0 PB103377 20 PB103376 20 DB115603 SDx and SDTAM are relay modules with two static outputs They send different signals depending on the type of fault They may not be used together SDTAM relay module with its terminal block 24 to 415 V SDT or output 1 SDx wiring diagram DB115604 SDx and SDTAM modules for Micrologic SDx module The SDx module remotes the trip or alarm conditions of Compact NSX circuit breakers equipped with electronic protection The SD2 output available on all Micrologic trip units corresponds to the overload trip indication The SD4 output available on Micrologic 5 6 is assigned to m overload pre alarm Micrologic 5 m ground fault trip indication Micrologic 6 These two outputs automatically reset when the device is closed turned ON For Micrologic 5 6 the SD2 and SD4 outputs can be reprogrammed to be assigned to other types of tripping or alarm Output characteristics It is possible to assign a function m latching with a time delay Return to the initial state occur
64. ZSI gt A 8 PAB gt A 8 gt A 18 Cascading implements the current limiting capacity of a circuit breaker making it possible to install downstream circuit breakers with lower performance levels The upstream circuit breaker reduces any high short circuit currents This makes it possible to install downstream circuit breakers with breaking capacities less than the prospective short circuit current at their point of installation The main advantage of cascading is to reduce the overall cost of switchgear Because the current is limited throughout the circuit downstream of the limiting circuit breaker cascading applies to all the devices located downstream Discrimination based on the difference between the current protection settings of the circuit breakers The difference in settings between two successive circuit breakers in a circuit must be sufficient to allow the downstream breaker to clear the fault before the upstream breaker trips Discrimination is ensured between upstream and downstream circuit breakers if when a fault occurs only the circuit breaker placed immediately upstream of the fault trips Discrimination is the key to ensuring the continuity of service of an installation This function is specific to Compact NSX see Reflex tripping on page G 7 and supplements the other types of discrimination Discrimination is partial if the conditions for total discrimination are not met up to the ultimate short circuit cu
65. a high overcurrent An overly long start means the current drawn remains too high or too low for too long with respect to the starting current In all cases the load cannot be driven and the start must be interrupted The resulting temperature rise must be taken into account before restarting This protection function steps in ifthe current values and or the unbalance in the three phases supplying the motor exceeds tolerances Currents should be equal and displacement should be one third of a period Phase loss is a special case of phase unbalance Start up of a three phase asynchronous motor is characterised by m a high inrush current approximately 14 In for 10 to 15 ms m a starting current approximately 7 2 In for 5 to 30 seconds m return to the rated current after the starting time Time after which the motor ceases to draw the starting current and falls back to the operating current Ir lt In The thermal image models the thermal behaviour of a motor rotor and stator taking into account temperature rise caused by overloads or successive starts and the cooling constants For each motor power rating the algorithm takes into account a theoretical amount of iron and copper which modifies the cooling constants Protection against overcurrents following an inverse time curve I t constant which defines the maximum permissible temperature rise for the motor Tripping occurs after a time delay that decreases with increasing curren
66. a major increase in breaking performance In particular the service breaking capacity Ics is equal to 100 of Icu The Ics value defined by IEC standard 60947 2 is guaranteed by tests comprising the following steps m break three times consecutively a fault current equal to 100 of Icu m check that the device continues to function normally that is o it conducts the rated current without abnormal temperature rise o protection functions perform within the limits specified by the standard o suitability for isolation is not impaired Longer service life of electrical installations Current limiting circuit breakers greatly reduce the negative effects of short circuits on installations Thermal effects Less temperature rise in conductors therefore longer service life for cables Mechanical effects Reduced electrodynamic forces therefore less risk of electrical contacts or busbars being deformed or broken Electromagnetic effects Fewer disturbances for measuring devices located near electrical circuits Economy by means of cascading Cascading is a technique directly derived from current limiting Circuit breakers with breaking capacities less than the prospective short circuit current may be installed downstream of a limiting circuit breaker The breaking capacity is reinforced by the limiting capacity of the upstream device It follows that substantial savings can be made on downstream equipment and enclosures Current and energ
67. accessories Devices with interphase barriers or long terminal shields Minimum safety clearances for Compact NSX100 to 630 US440V for devices equipped with m no accessories E interphase barriers m long terminal shields 440V lt U lt 600V for devices equipped with m interphase barriers m long terminal shields U gt 600V for devices equipped with 20 10 10 10 10 10 Spacing lt 60 mm Spacing gt 60 mm m long terminal shields 20 100 100 f Bars 1 Only for NSX100 to 250 Y 2 For all cases F1 F1 i Clearances with respect to live bare busbars Minimum clearances for Compact NSX100 to 630 lU USU Eg 4 NANA U lt 440V F2 U lt 440 V lt 600 V 120 120 U gt 600V prohibited insulating screen required between device and busbars These clearances can be reduced for special installations as long as the configuration is checked by tests Live busbars 559E2100 indd Schneider version 1 0 DB115699 DB115700 DB115701 DB115702 Installation recommendations N L1 L2 L3 3P N an Wire ready for connectior External wire External neutral voltage tap ENVT L1 L2 L3 3P N supply from the top _J oon T2 OOc
68. adjustable pick up Isd delayed 200 ms in compliance with the requirements of marine classification companies Short circuits Non adjustable instantaneous protection li Instantaneous short circuit protection with a fixed pick up required for generator protection Neutral protection m On 3 pole circuit breakers neutral protection is not possible m On four pole circuit breakers neutral protection may be set using a three position switch 4P 3D neutral unprotected 4P 3D N 2 neutral protection at half the value of the phase pick up i e 0 5 x Ir 4P 4D neutral fully protected at Ir Indications Front indications m Green Ready LED flashes slowly when the circuit breaker is ready to trip in the event of a fault m Orange overload pre alarm LED steady on when gt 90 Ir m Red overload LED steady on when gt 105 Ir Remote indications An SDx relay module installed inside the circuit breaker can be used to remote the overload trip signal This module receives the signal from the Micrologic electronic trip unit via an optical link and makes it available on the terminal block The signal is cleared when the circuit breaker is closed The module is described in detail in the section dealing with accessories version 1 0 559E1600 indd Schneider Electric Micrologic 2 2 G Circuit breaker Compact NSX100 a t Compact NSX160 Compact NSX250
69. adjustment dials Protection of distribution systems TM thermal magnetic and MA magnetic trip units TM D and TM G thermal magnetic trip units DB 112046 Ir Im 2500 1250 2250 i 250 175 TM 250 D i 225 200 2000 750 1500 250A 40 C i 17 A A n Ir Im Circuit breakers equipped with thermal magnetic trip units are used mainly in industrial and commercial electrical distribution applications m TM D for protection of cables on distribution systems supplied by transformers m TM G with a low pick up for generators lower short circuit currents than with transformers and distribution systems with long cable lengths fault currents limited by the impedance of the cable Protection N Thermal protection Ir Thermal overload protection based on a bimetal strip providing an inverse time curve 12t corresponding to a temperature rise limit Above this limit the deformation of the strip trips the circuit breaker operating mechanism This protection operates according to m Ir that can be adjusted in amps from 0 7 to 1 times the rating of the trip unit 16 Ato 250 A corresponding to settings from 11 to 250 A for the range of trip units m anon adjustable time delay defined to ensure protection of the cables Magnetic protection Im Short circuit protection with a fixed or adjustable pick up Im that initiates instantaneous tripping if exceeded m TM D fixed pick up Im for 16 to 160 A ratings and adjustable from 5 to
70. captors Comparison with the settings forms the basis for orders to the electronic trip units Microprocessor gt A 8 A microprocessor is a more general purpose device than an ASIC In Micrologic a microprocessor is used for measurements and it can be programmed It is not used for the main protection functions that are carried out by the ASIC Controb EEEE EEE E A EE AE AE AET E E A T E A Communicating motor gt A 82 For Compact NSX remote control via the communication system a communicating mechanism motor mechanism is required Except for the communication function it is identical to the standard motor mechanism module and connects to and controlled by the BSCM module CNOMO machine tool rotary DA 84 Handle used for machine tool control enclosures and providing IP54 and IK08 handle Direct rotary handle gt A 84 This is an optional control handle for the circuit breaker It has the same three positions ON O OFF and TRIPPED as the toggle control It provides IP40 IKO7 and the possibility due to its extended travel of using early make and early break contacts It maintains suitability for isolation and offers optional locking using a keylock or a padlock 559E7100 indd Schneider version 1 0 Compact NSX Emergency off Extended rotary handle Failsafe remote tripping Manual toggle control MCC rotary handle Motor mechanism module gt A 83 gt A 84 gt A 83 gt A 89 gt A 84 gt A 82 Glos
71. circuit breakers in the Compact NSX range offer positive contact indication and are suitable for isolation in accordance with standards IEC 60947 1 and 2 For information on other switch disconnector ranges see the Interpact offering positive contact indication and visible break and Fupact fusegear catalogues A source changeover system can be m manual with mechanical device interlocking m remote controlled with mechanical and or electrical device interlocking m automatic by adding a controller to manage switching from one source to the other on the basis of external parameters version 1 0 DB112018 Functions and characteristics Schneider Electric Standardised characteristics indicated on the rating plate 1 Type of device frame size and breaking capacity class 2 Ui rated insulation voltage 3 Uimp rated impulse withstand voltage 4 Ics service breaking capacity 5 Icu ultimate breaking capacity for various values of the rated operational voltage Ue Ue operational voltage Colour label indicating the breaking capacity class Circuit breaker disconnector symbol Reference standard 10 Main standards with which the device complies Note when the circuit breaker is equipped with an extended rotary handle the door must be opened to access the rating plate COND Introduction General characteristics of the Compact NSX range Compliance with standards Compact NSX circuit breakers and
72. contact in conjunction with a rotary handle can be used to anticipate device opening or closing ACE CD contact indicates that the chassis is connected disconnected Indication contacts CE CD carriage switches Accessories and auxiliaries Indication contacts These common point changeover contacts provide remote circuit breaker status information They can be used for indications electrical locking relaying etc They comply with the IEC 60947 5 international recommendation Functions Breaker status indications during normal operation or after a fault Asingle type of contact provides all the different indication functions m OF ON OFF indicates the position of the circuit breaker contacts m SD trip indication indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to an overload a short circuit an earth fault Vigi or a ground fault Micrologic 6 operation of a voltage release operation of the push to trip button disconnection when the device is ON The SD contact returns to de energised state when the circuit breaker is reset m SDE fault trip indication indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to an overload a short circuit an earth fault Vigi or a ground fault Micrologic 6 The SD contact returns to de energised state when the circuit breaker is reset m SDV indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to an earth fault It returns to de energised state when the Vigi module
73. device m Mounted on the front of the circuit breaker m Degree of protection IP43 IK07 Toggle cover Retrofit front covers These replacement front covers make it possible to install NSX devices in existing switchboards containing NS devices by installing the NS type retrofit covers on the NSX devices m NS100 to 250 cover m NS400 630 cover Schneider version 1 0 559E1880 indd Electric 559E1880 indd Schneider version 1 0 Ayajes Buljzesodo Compact NSX Installation recommendations Contents Functions and characteristics A 1 Operating conditions Operating conditions B 2 Installation in switchboards Power supply and weights B 3 Safety clearances and minimum distances B 4 Installation example B 5 Control wiring Control wiring B 6 Temperature derating Compact NSX100 to 250 equipped with thermal magnetic trip units B 8 Compact NSX equipped with electronic trip units B 9 Power loss Resistance Compact NSX equipped with thermal magnetic trip units B 10 Compact NSX equipped with electronic trip units B 11 Dimensions and connection C 1 Wiring diagrams D 1 Additional characteristics E 1 Catalogue numbers F 1 Glossary G 1 559E2000 indd Schneider version 1 0 DB111389 DB111390 DB111391 Installation recommendations Operating conditions Altitude derating Altitude does not significantly affect the characteristics of Compact NSX circuit breakers
74. equipped with Micrologic 5 6 Aor E trip units in installations with a distributed neutral For Micrologic 6 Aor E it is required for type G ground fault protection The ENCT is connected in the same way for fixed plug in or withdrawable devices m fixed devices are connected via terminals T1 and T2 of the internal terminal block m plug in and withdrawable devices are not connected via the auxiliary terminals The wires must be connected disconnected inside the device via terminals T1 and T2 The ENCT must be connected to the Micrologic trip unit by a shielded twisted pair The shielding should be connected to the switchboard earth only atthe CT end no more than 30 cm from the CT m the power connections of the CT to the neutral H2 and H1 must be made in the same way for power supply from the top or the bottom see figure Make sure they are not reversed for devices with power supply from the bottom m cross sectional area of 0 4 mm to 1 5 mm m maximum length of 10 metres ULP connection system between Micrologic FDM 121 switchboard display and Modbus interface The ULP Universal Logic Plug wiring system used by Compact NSX for connections through to the Modbus network requires neither tools nor settings The prefabricated cords are sued for both data transfer and distribution of 24 V DC power Connectors on each component are identified by ULP Universal Logic Plug symbols ensuring total compatibility between each component Av
75. events last 10 events and type Modification of protection setting by dial Opening of keypad lock Test via keypad Test via external tool Time setting date and time Reset for maximeter minimeter and energy meter Time stamping Presentation Time stamped event tables Protection settings One of the following settings modified Time stamping of modification Previous value Date and time text status Ir tr Isd tsd li Ig tg Date and time of modification Value before modification Min Max Value monitored Time stamping of min max value Present min max value Maintenance indicators 1 12 13 Biz 2s si 7 Date and time of record Min max recorded for the value Counter Mechanical cycles Assignable to an alarm 2 Electrical cycles 3 Assignable to an alarm 2 Trips One per type of trip 2 Alarms One for each type of alarm 2 Hours Total operating time hours 2 Indicator Contact wear Load profile Hours at different load levels of hours in four current ranges 0 49 In 50 79 2 In 80 89 In 2 90 In Thermal image Stator and rotor of permissible temperature rise 2 1 Absolute mode E absolute E out E in Signed mode E signed E out E in 2 Available via communication system 3 The BSCM module page A 27 is required for these functions 559E1500 indd Schneider version 1 0 FDM121 display bneld or version 1 0 559E1600 indd ric 559E1600
76. indd Schneider version 1 0 PB103377 Functions and characteristics Micrologic G trip units are used for the protection of systems supplied by generators or comprising long cable lengths They can be mounted on all Compact NSX100 160 250 circuit breakers With extensive setting possibilities Micrologic 5 offers the same functions from 100 to 630A A thermal magnetic trip unit is also available for the NSX100 see page A 15 SDx remote indication relay module with its terminal block DB112118 Special applications Generator protection with Micrologic 2 2 G gt 30A Q gt 90 gt 105 5O wO lt Micrologic 2 2 G Ready lo Ir Isd 1i 3000A 5 140 189 475 9 ss si 125 2001 93 97 2 5 6 no 2251 92 98 2 7 100 250 9 u 15 So A xlo xIr Ir isd Circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic G trip units protect systems supplied by generators lower short circuit currents than with transformers and distribution systems with long cable lengths fault currents limited by the impedance of the Protection by cable Settings are made using the adjustment dials with fine adjustment possibilities Overloads Long time protection Ir Inverse time thermal protection against overloads with an adjustable current pick up Ir and a very short non adjustable time delay tr 15 seconds for 1 5 x Ir Short circuits Short time protection Isd with fixed time delay Short circuit protection with an
77. is identical to that of Micrologic 6 Ground fault protection is shown separately Electric version 1 0 DB115717 DB114787 Additional characteristics Tripping curves Compact NSX400 to 630 Motor protection Micrologic 1 3 M and 2 3 M electronic trip units Micrologic 1 3 M 320 A M 10 000 5 000 DB115718 2 000 1 000 500 200 100 Thermal withstand t s t s Isd 5 13 x In gt t lt 10ms PhP Pate li 15 xIn 20 30 50 70100 002 001 3 71 2 345 7 10 gt I In 200 300 Reflex tripping Micrologic 2 3 M 320A M 10 000 5 000 DB114788 320 A Ir 160 320 A 2 000 1 000 500 class 20 class 10 class 5 200 100 t s t s Isd 5 13 x Ir t lt 10ms gt PTL Parte MT li 15x In 5 7 1 2 345 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200300 1 ll I CX 002 001 Reflex tripping icrologic 1 3 M 500 A 10 000 5 000 2 000 1 000 500 200 100 Thermal withstand Isd 5 13 x In gt t lt 10 ms II 002 HZ 1i 13x In 001 5 7 1 2 345 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200300 I In icrologic 2 3 M 500 A 10 000 5 000 500 A Ir 250 500 A 2 000 1 000 500 class 20 class 10 class 5 200 100 50 20 1 Isd 5 13 x Ir SB GOAN mo 05 02 01 005 t lt 10 ms gt PTE Erte li 13xIn 5 71 2 345 7 10 20 30 5070100
78. is reset All the above auxiliary contacts are also available in low level versions capable of switching very low loads e g for the control of PLCs or electronic circuits Rotary handle position contact for early make or early break functions m CAM early make or early break function contacts indicate the position of the rotary handle They are used in particular for advanced opening of safety trip devices early break or to energise a control device prior to circuit breaker closing early make Chassis position contacts m CE CD connected disconnected contacts are microswitch type carriage switches for withdrawable circuit breakers Installation m OF SD SDE and SDV functions a single type of contact provides all these different indication functions depending on where it is inserted in the device The contacts clip into slots behind the front cover of the circuit breaker or the Vigi module for the SDV function The SDE function on a circuit breaker equipped with a thermal magnetic trip unit requires the SDE actuator m CAM function the contact fits into the rotary handle unit direct or extended m CE CD function the contacts clip into the fixed part of the chassis Electrical characteristics of auxiliary contacts Types of contacts All OF SD SDE SDV Rated thermal current A 6 5 Minimum load 100 mA at 24 V DC 1mAat4V DC
79. l U f P E and THD measurements for each device via navigation m Display of ON OFF status Open and close commands for each device Acommon or individual password must first be entered When all functions have been tested this utility is replaced by the supervision software selected for the installation version 1 0 559E1300 indd Schneider Electric DB111370 PE86106 62 DB112145 Schneider Electric electrical installation supervision management and expert system software integrates Compact NSX identification modules Connection symbol for Compact NSX compatible modules SMS software screen 559E1300 indd Supervision software Types of software Masterpact and Compact NSX communication functions are designed to interface with software dedicated to electrical installations m switchboard supervision m electrical installation supervision m power system management electrical engineering expert systems m process control m SCADA Supervisory Control amp Data Acquisition EMS Enterprise Management System or BMS Building Management System type software Integration of Compact NSX Compact NSX devices are integrated via Modbus interface modules connected via FDM121 display units or NSX cords For easy connection of the different modules the prefabricated cables are identified by ULP Universal Logic Plug symbols The connection points on compatible modules are marked in the same manner
80. lighting systems in shopping centres etc Industry m assembly lines m engine rooms on ships m critical auxiliaries in thermal power stations etc Infrastructures m runway lighting systems m port and railway installations m control systems for military installations etc Source changeover systems Presentation Manual source changeover This is the most simple system It is controlled manually by a maintenance technician and consequently the time required to switch from the normal source to the replacement source can vary Amanual source changeover system is made up of m two devices circuit breakers or switch disconnectors controlled manually m mechanical interlocking The interlock prevents connection to both sources at the same time even momentarily Remote operated source changeover systems This is the most commonly employed system No human invention is required The transfer from the normal to the replacement source is controlled electrically Aremote operated source changeover system is made up of two circuit breakers or switch disconnectors equipped with motor mechanisms and m an electrical interlocking system implemented in a number of manners m a mechanical interlocking system that protects against the consequences of an electrical malfunction and prevents incorrect manual operation Automatic source changeover systems An automatic controller may be added to the remote operated source changeover
81. made by adding a plug in kit to a fixed device To avoid connecting or disconnecting the power circuits under load conditions a Plug in Compact NSX250 Installation positions safety trip causes automatic tripping ifthe device is ON before engaging or withdrawing it The safety trip supplied with the kit must be installed on the device If the device is disconnected the safety trip does not operate The device can be operated outside the switchboard Accessories Optional insulation accessories are available m Terminal shields to protect against direct contact m Interphase barriers to reinforce insulation between phases and protect against direct contact DB112209 Mounting DB112206 DB112205 DB112207 a Mounting on a backplate Mounting through a front Mounting on rails panel Schneider Electric 559E1840 indd version 1 0 PB103599 42 DB112209 DB112210 poy B DI Ei Installation positions Connected Disconnected 559E1840 indd DB111369 DB112220 Withdrawable circuit breakers In addition to the advantages provided by the base installation on a chassis facilitates handling It offers three positions
82. measurements m Phase and neutral currents 11 12 13 IN m Average current of the 3 phases lavg m Highest current of the three phases Imax m Ground fault current Ig Micrologic 6 2 6 3 A m Maximeter minimeter for measurements Operating and maintenance assistance Indications alarms and histories m Indication of fault types m Alarms for high low alarm thresholds linked to I measurements m Trip alarm and operating histories m Time stamped tables for settings and maximeters Maintenance indicators m Operation trip and alarm counters m Operating hours counter m Contact wear m Load profile and thermal image Communication m Modbus with add on module DB112526 Introduction Overview of trip units for Compact NSX Schneider version 1 0 559E1100 indd 559E1100 indd DB112045 Ir tr isd tsd li xin gt S N VA 2B 310 OO OD O Energy Micrologic E l U f P E THD measurements Current measurements m Phase and neutral currents 11 12 13 IN m Average current of the 3 phases lavg m Highest current of the three phases Imax m Ground fault current Ig Micrologic 6 2 6 3 A m Maximeter minimeter for measurements m Current unbalance between phases Voltage measurements m Phase to phase U et phase to neutral V voltages m Average voltages Uavg Vavg m Ph Ph U and Ph N V voltage unbalance Frequency measurements m Frequency f Power quality
83. mm Set of 3 LV429504 Set of 4 LV429505 l For cable 300 mm Setof 3 LV429506 Setof 4 LV429507 Supplied with 2 or 3 interphase barriers 1 Supplied with 2 or 3 interphase barriers 559E6200 indd bnelder version 2 0 DB111472 DB111473 DB115626 DB115632 DB115627 DB115628 Catalogue numbers Insulation accessories Short terminal shield 45 mm 1 piece Long terminal shield 45 mm 1 piece Interphase barriers Connection adapter for plug in base 2 insulating screens 70 mm pitch Accessories cont Compact and Vigicompact NSX400 630 cont Seas 3P 3P 4P Long terminal shield for spreaders 52 5 mm 1 piece supplied with insulating plate 3P 4P Set of 6 3P 4P 3P 4P version 2 0 Lv432591 LV432592 LV432593 LV432594 LV432595 LV432596 LV432570 LV432584 LV432585 LV432578 LV432579 559E6200 indd Catalogue numbers Accessories cont Compact and Vigicompact NSX400 630 cont Electrical auxiliaries DB112254 DB112275 DB112276 DB111454 DB115631 Auxiliary contacts changeover OF or SD or SDE or SDV 29450 OF or SD or SDE or SDV low level 29452 SDx output module for Micrologic electronic trip unit Zz SDx module 24 415 V AC DC Lv429532 SDTAM contactor tripping module early break thermal fault signal for Micrologic 2 3 M 6 3 E M eax SDTAM 24 415 V AC DC overload fault indication Lv429424 Voltage MX MN AC 24 V
84. modules that can be combined with the above DB112291 Escutcheon for toggle without and with access to the trip unit DB112293 Escutcheon for Vigi module Wide escutcheon for ammeter 559E1880 indd Schneider version 1 0 PB101777 36 PB103780 36 PB103775 40 PB103820 35 Functions and characteristics Escutcheon with collar for toggle Escutcheon for Vigi module Toggle cover NS retrofit front cover DB112294 DB112297 DB112218 Accessories and auxiliaries Escutcheons and protection collars IP40 escutcheons for withdrawable devices IP40 for withdrawable devices The two types with a gasket are screwed to the door cut out m for rotary handle or motor mechanism standard IP40 escutcheon m for toggle with extension standard escutcheon collar for withdrawal DB112295 DB112296 Standard escutcheon with Standard escutcheon for Standard escutcheon with rotary handle motor mechanism collar for withdrawal for toggle IP40 for Vigi module on withdrawable devices The two types with a gasket are screwed to the door cut out m for rotary handle or motor mechanism standard IP40 escutcheon m for toggle standard escutcheon collar for withdrawal DB112298 DB112299 Escutcheon for Vigi module with escutcheons for the three types of control IP43 toggle cover Available only for devices with toggles Fits over toggle and front cover of the
85. or with a negligible current level It can carry the rated circuit current and for a specified time the short circuit current Switch which in the open position satisfies the isolating requirements specified for a disconnector A switch disconnector serves for switching and isolation The switch function breaks the circuit under load conditions and the disconnection function isolates the circuit Protection is not provided It may be capable of making short circuit currents if it has the necessary making capacity but it cannot break short circuit currents Compact NSX100 to 630 NA switch disconnectors have a making capacity The standard defines six utilisation categories AC 21A or B AC 22 A or B AC23 Aor B They depend on the rated operational current and the mechanical durability A for frequent operation or B for infrequent operation Compact NSX NA switch disconnectors comply with utilisation categories AC22A or AC23A I nree phase asynchronous motors and their protection urereneoseeeneeneneee Locked rotor protection ljam gt A 44 Long start protection long DA 44 Phase unbalance or phase gt A 43 loss protection lunbal Starting current gt A 38 Starting time gt A 38 Thermal image of the rotor gt A 44 and stator Thermal protection Trip class gt A 38 IEC 60947 4 1 Under load protection lund gt A 44 This function steps in when the motor shaft cannot or can no longer drive the load The result is
86. pole circuit breakers the middle holes are not required On rails 2 3P 4P 8 8 am 5 5 5 fer k 2 Hof LM Type A10 A11 A12 A13 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 c3 D1 E9 E10 E11 E12 E13 E14 NSX100 160 250 175 210 106 5 103 5 92 5 185 216 220 251 126 75 95 190 87 174 775 155 NSX400 630 244 281 140 140 110 220 250 265 295 168 100 150 300 137 274 125 250 Type E15 E16 E17 _ E18 E19 E20 F1 F2 F3 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 T1 NSX100 160 250 79 158 61 122 37 5 75 35 17 5 70 70 105 35 74 148 183 24 lt 32 NSX400 630 126 252 101 202 75 150 45 22 5 90 100 145 50 91 5 183 228 33 lt 35 559E3100 indd Schneider version 1 0 DB112666 DB 112670 Dimensions and connection Dimensions plug in version DB112667 Dimensions and mounting Vigicompact NSX100 to 630 plug in and withdrawable versions NSX100 to 250 3 4P DB112668 EEE Interphase barriers for base Short terminal shields on circuit breaker DB112671 Through front panel N Es Dimensions withdrawable version NSX400 630 3 4P DB112669 Long terminal shields also available for NSX400 630 spreaders with 52 5 mm pitch B1 157 5 mm B2 210 mm NSX100 to 630 3P DB 112672 Q Y 32
87. possible to the fault isolating only the circuit concerned The upstream circuit breaker is not affected and allows the other circuits to remain operational service continuity Direct access to maintenance Service continuity indicators Adding an SDTAM module allows remote indication of motor overloads and actuation of a contactor ensuring total service continuity gt the SDTAM switches the contactor instead of tripping the circuit breaker gt the module allows for machine restart directly from the contactor without having to operate circuit breakers Preventive maintenance Maintenance indicators provide information on the number of operations level of wear on contacts and total load rates This makes it far easier to monitor equipment ageing and optimise investments over time Maintenance is now preventive avoiding faults Schneider Electric expertise Schneider Electric commits to reducing energy costs and CO2 emissions for its customers It offers products solutions and services that integrate with all levels of the energy value chain Compact NSX is part and parcel of the Schneider Electric energy efficiency approach Solutions for the future P 30 With Compact NSX Schneider Electric works savings in energy costs through flexible solutions for commercial and industrial buildings Schneider Electric commits to help customers gradually move towards an active approach to their energy efficien
88. radio waves such as mobile telephones radios walkie talkies radar etc m electrostatic discharges produced by users Immunity levels for Compact NSX comply with the standards below m IEC EN 60947 2 Low voltage switchgear and controlgear part 2 Circuit breakers o Annex F Immunity tests for circuit breakers with electronic protection o Annex B Immunity tests for residual current protection m IEC EN 61000 4 2 Electrostatic discharge immunity tests m IEC EN 61000 4 3 Radiated radio frequency electromagnetic field immunity tests m IEC EN 61000 4 4 Electrical fast transient burst immunity tests m IEC EN 61000 4 5 Surge immunity tests m IEC EN 61000 4 6 Immunity tests for conducted disturbances induced by radio frequency fields m CISPR 11 Limits and methods of measurement of electromagnetic disturbance characteristics of industrial scientific and medical ISM radio frequency equipment Discrimination Compact NSX reinforces the discrimination capabilities of the Compact NS range by applying the rapid calculation capacity of the Micrologic trip units Total discrimination is now possible between NSX100 and modular Multi 9 circuit breakers rated lt 63 A see page A 8 Suitable for isolation with positive contact indication All Compact NSX circuit breakers are suitable for isolation as defined in IEC standard 60947 2 m The isolation position corresponds to the O OFF position m The operating handle cannot i
89. rating must be compatible with that of the circuit breaker Required current transformers for different circuit breaker models Type of circuit breaker Rating Catalogue number NSX100 160 250 25 100A LV429521 150 250 A LV430563 NSX400 630 400 630 A LV432575 External neutral voltage tap ENVT The neutral voltage transformer is required for Micrologic E power metering with a three pole circuit breaker in a system with a distributed neutral It is used to connect the neutral to the Micrologic trip unit to measure phase to neutral Ph N voltages External 24 V DC power supply module Use An external 24 V DC power supply is required for installations with communication whatever the type of trip unit On installations without communication it is available as an option for Micrologic 5 6 in order to make it possible to modify settings when the circuit breaker is open m display measurements when the current flowing through the circuit breaker is low 15 to 50 A depending on the rating maintain the display of the cause of tripping and interrupted current Characteristics Asingle external 24 V DC supply may be used for the entire switchboard The required characteristics are m output voltage 24 V DC 5 m ripple 1 m overvoltage category OVC IV as per IEC 60947 1 External 24 V DC power supply modules with an output current of 1 Aare available Available external power supply modules Ca
90. set the protection functions and alarms for each Masterpact and Compact NSX device After connection to the network and entry of the circuit breaker Modbus address the software automatically detects the type of trip unit installed There are two possible operating modes Off line with the software disconnected from the communication network For each selected circuit breaker the user can do the following Determine the protection settings The settings are carried out on a screen that shows the front of the trip unit The Micrologic setting dials keypad and screen are simulated for easy use of all Micrologic setting functions Save and duplicate the protection settings Each configuration created can be saved for subsequent device programming It can also be duplicated and used as the basis for programming another circuit breaker On line with the software connected to the network Similarly for each selected circuit breaker the user can do the following Display the current settings The software displays the trip unit and provides access to all settings View the corresponding protection curves Agraphic curve module in the software displays the protection curve corresponding to the settings It is possible to lay a second curve over the first for discrimination studies Modify settings in a secure manner m There are different levels of security password by default it is the same for all devices but can be differentiated fo
91. supply to the BSCM and the Micrologic m 1 communicating motor mechanism connected to the BSCM Installation of SDx or SDTAM is compatible with communication The following table indicates auxiliary possibilities depending on the type of trip unit NA TMD TMG MA Micrologic 2 Motor mechanism rotary handle oc E me NSX cord Communicating motor mechanism DB115587 cecococsososos O sooosoooosooo Motor mechanism rotary handle Uk er I Communicating motor mechanism Up DB115589 NSX cord ec eccccccccces Q sesosooocosoo 559E1860 indd Schneider version 1 0 DB115590 DB115592 Functions and characteristics Accessories and auxiliaries Selection of auxiliaries for Compact NSX400 630 Standard All Compact NSX400 630 circuit breakers and switch disconnectors have slots for the electrical auxiliaries listed below 7 indication contacts see page A 80 m 4 ON OFF OF1 OF2 OF3 OF4 m 1 trip indication SD m 1 fault trip indication SDE m 1 earth fault indication SDV when the device is equipped with a Vigi module 1 remote tripping release see page A 83 m either 1 MN undervoltage release m or 1 MX shunt release Remote indications Circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic trip units may be equipped with a fault trip indicat
92. switch disconnectors from 100 to 630 NA A 56 Source changeover systems Presentation A 58 Manual source changeover systems A 59 Remote operated and automatic source changeover systems Coupling accessory on base plate A 60 Accessories and auxiliaries Overview of Compact NSX100 to 630 fixed version A 62 Overview of Compact NSX100 to 630 plug in and withdrawable versions A 64 Device installation A 66 Connection of fixed devices A 78 Connection of withdrawable and plug in devices A 70 Insulation of live parts A 71 Selection of auxiliaries for Compact NSX100 160 250 A 72 Selection of auxiliaries for Compact NSX400 630 A 74 Connection of electrical auxiliaries A 76 Indication contacts A 78 SDx and SDTAM modules for Micrologic A 79 Motor mechanism A 80 Remote tripping A 81 Installation recommendations B 1 Rotary handles ee A 82 Dimensions and connection C 1 Additional measurement and indication modules A 84 Wiring diagrams D 1 Locks A 86 Additional characteristics E 1 Sealing accessories A 87 Catalogue numbers F 1 Individual enclosures A 88 Glossary G 1 Escutcheons and protection collars A 89 559E1000 indd Schneider version 1 0 Functions and Introduction characteristics Overview of applications Functions Compact NSX100 to 630 offers high performance and a wide range of interchangeable trip units to protect most applications Electronic versions provide highly accurate protection with wide setting ranges and can integrate measure
93. system for automatic source control according to programmable operating modes This solution ensures optimum energy management m switching to a replacement source depending on external requirements m source management m load shedding m emergency source replacement etc Schneider version 1 0 559E1700 indd Electric DB112198 DB112194 DB112195 DB112196 Interlocking of two or three toggle controlled devices Interlocking of two devices with rotary handles Interlocking with keylocks Interlocking on a base plate 559E1700 indd Manual source changeover systems Interlocking of two or three toggle controlled devices Interlocking system Two devices can be interlocked using this system Two identical interlocking systems can be used to interlock three devices installed side by side Authorised positions m one device closed ON the others open OFF m all devices open OFF The system is locked using one or two padlocks shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm This system can be expanded to more than three devices There are two interlocking system models m one for Compact NSX100 to 250 m one for Compact NSX400 630 Combinations of Normal and Replacement devices All toggle controlled fixed or plug in Compact NSX100 to 630 circuit breakers and switch disconnectors ofthe same frame size can be interlocked The devices must be either all fixed or all plug in versions Interlocking o
94. that moves a core This trips the circuit breaker operating mechanism Action is instantaneous The pick up setting may be adjustable Reflex tripping gt A 8 Compact NSX circuit breakers have a patented reflex tripping system based on the energy of the arc and that is independent of the other protection functions It operates extremely fast before the other protection functions It is an additional safety function that operates before the others in the event of a very high short circuit Release Device mechanically connected to a mechanical switching device e g a circuit IEC 60947 1 breaker which releases the holding means and permits the opening or the closing of the switching device For circuit breakers releases are often integrated in a trip unit Shunt release MX gt A 83 This type of release operates when supplied with current The MX release provokes circuit breaker opening when it receives a pulse type or maintained command Thermal magnetic trip unit BD A 14 Trip unit combining thermal protection for overloads and magnetic protection Thermal release gt A 14 Release in which a bimetal strip is heated by the Joule effect Above a temperature rise threshold that is a function of the current and its duration l t curve constant which is representative of temperature rise in cables the bimetal strip bends and releases the circuit breaker opening mechanism The pick up setting may be adjustable Undervoltage release MN B
95. the configuration and maintenance module 559E1400 indd Test battery This pocket battery connects to the Micrologic test connector It powers up the Micrologic and the Ready LED It supplies the screen and allows settings to be made via the keypad Battery module The battery module is a back up supply for the external power supply module The input output voltages are 24 V DC and it can supply power for approximately three hours 100 mA 24 V DC power supply terminal block The 24 V DC power supply terminal block can be installed only on Micrologic 5 6 trip units It is required to power the trip unit when the trip unit is not connected to an FDM121 display unit or to the communication system When used it excludes connection of an NSX cord NSX cord m For voltage U lt 480 V available in 3 prefabricated lengths 0 35 m 1 3 m and 3 m m For voltages U gt 480 V a special 0 35 m cord with an insulation accessory is required m A set of cords with RJ45 connectors is available to adapt to different distances between devices Maintenance case The case includes m configuration and maintenance module m power supply 110 220 V AC 50 60 Hz 24 V DC 1A m special cable for connection to the trip unit test connector m standard USB cable m standard RJ45 cable m user manual m optional Bluetooth link to PC Configuration and maintenance module Included in the maintenance kit this module tests Micrologic oper
96. to protect the control circuits and two contactors to control the motor mechanisms of the devices Coupling accessory on base plate This accessory may be used with a manual or remote operated source changeover system with or without an automatic controller It respects the mounting distance between the devices secured to the ACP plate and provides downstream coupling of the two sets of busbars It is compatible with standard device accessories The short terminal shields of the device can be installed on the upstream connectors of the coupling accessory Downstream it is possible to use the connection accessories and the long or short terminal shields of the device Short terminal shields Terminals Interphase barriers Long terminal shields Ron Schneider version 1 0 559E1700 indd Electric PB100855 30 PB100856 30 PB100857 35 By combining a remote operated source changeover system with an integrated BA or UA automatic controller it is possible to automatically control source transfer according to user selected sequences UA controller Auxiliary control plate for a BA or UA controller 559E1700 indd Functions of the BA and UA controllers Controller Compatible circuit breakers 4 position switch BA Compact NSX100 to 630 UA circuit breakers Automatic operation a Forced operation on Normal source Forced operation on Replacemen
97. via the trip unit keypad the FDM121 display unit or the communication system Energy metering The Micrologic E also measures the energy consumed since the last reset of the meter The active energy meter can be reset via the keypad and the FDM121 display unit or the communication system Demand and maximum demand values Micrologic E also calculates demand current and power values These calculations can be made using a block or sliding interval that can be set from 5 to 60 minutes in steps of 1 minute The window can be synchronised with a signal sent via the communication system Whatever the calculation method the calculated values can be recovered on a PC via Modbus communication Ordinary spreadsheet software can be used to provide trend curves and forecasts based on this data They will provide a basis for load shedding and reconnection operations used to adjust consumption to the subscribed power Power quality Micrologic E calculates power quality indicators taking into account the presence of harmonics up to the 15th order including the total harmonic distortion THD of current and voltage version 1 0 559E1200 indd Pick ups A and delays PB103354 All settings can be displayed Instantaneous rms measurements PB103360 Ir tr Isd tsd li lg tg PB103364 FDM121 Currents A Phases and neutral 11 12 13 IN a a a Average of phases lavg 11 12 13 3
98. without holes for cable entry through bottom and or top Dimensions H x W x D in mm m Metal enclosures o Compact NSX100 160 450 x 350 x 250 o Compact NSX250 and Vigicompact NSX100 to 250 650 x 350 x 250 o Compact NSX400 650 x 350 x 250 D Compact NSX630 and Vigicompact NSX400 630 850 x 350 x 250 m Insulating enclosures o Compact NSX100 160 360 x 270 x 235 o Compact NSX250 and Vigicompact NSX100 160 540 x 270 x 235 o Compact NSX400 630 720 x 360 x 235 o Vigicompact NSX250 630 720 x 360 x 235 Schneider version 1 0 559E1880 indd PB103590 43 PB103606 50 Escutcheons are an optional feature mounted on the switchboard door They increase the degree of protection to IP40 IK07 Protection collars maintain the degree of protection whatever the position ofthe device connected disconnected IP30 escutcheon IP30 escutcheon with access to the trip unit DB112290 DB112292 Escutcheons and protection collars IP30 or IP40 escutcheons for fixed devices IP30 The three types are glued to the cut out in the front door of the switchboard m escutcheon for all control types toggle rotary handle or motor mechanism o without access to the trip unit o with access to the trip unit m for Vigi modules can be combined with the above IP40 The four types with a gasket are screwed to the door cut out m three escutcheons identical to the previous but IP40 m a wide model for Vigi and ammeter
99. 0 Protection functions of Compact NSX circuit breaker Short circuits a Overloads Insulation Ground fault a faults Special motor Phase unbalance functions Locked rotor m Under load Long start Built in Power Meter functions I U energy Operating assistance Counters cycles trips a alarms hours Contact wear indicator Load profile and thermal image 559E1500 indd version 1 0 Functions and characteristics MA magnetic trip units are used in 3 device motor feeder solutions They can be mounted on all Compact NSX100 160 250 circuit breakers with performance levels B F H N S L They provide short circuit protection for motors up to 110 kW at 400 V Micrologic 1 3 M trip units are used in 3 device motor feeder solutions on Compact NSX400 630 circuit breakers with performance levels B F H N S L They provide short circuit protection for motors up to 250 kW at 400 V They also provide the benefits of electronic technology m accurate settings E tests m Ready LED Note all the trip units have a transparent lead sealable cover that protects access to the adjustment dials DB112110 DB112106 Motor protection MA and Micrologic 1 3 M instantaneous trip units MA magnetic trip units Im 3100 2000 2900 MA 220 2700 A 2200 2204765 c A nm Im Circuit breakers with an MA trip unit are combined with a thermal relay and a contactor or a starter Protect
100. 0 A Ir 225 630 A 2 000 2 000 1 000 1 000 500 500 200 200 100 100 tr 0 5 1 tr 05 1 50 50 20 20 10 10 5 E 5 HE NUN t s Isd t s Os 2 2 1 WSS SS 1 5 Ss sH WETE ji LI LI 2 SN i T 2 4 Lt OFF I 4 t OFF si SA i 02 02 gt 01 005 t lt 10ms gt 005 002 001 5 7 1 li 1 5 12 In I 2345710 205 7 10 20 30 50 lt 1 tr _1 Reflex tripping 200 300 002 001 5 71 gt t lt 10 ms Pilih tl j li 11xIn 2 345 7 10 20 30 50 70100 _ I Ir 200 300 Micrologic 5 3 and 6 3 Aor E 630A 002 001 5 71 li 1 5 11 In I I 2 345 710 205 7 10 20 30 50 lt i iln version 1 0 559E5100 indd DB114772 Micrologic 6 3 A or E electronic trip units cont Micrologic 6 3 A or E ground fault protection 10 000 5 000 2 000 SE 40A lg 0 4 1xIn 1 000 gt 40 A Ig 0 2 1xIn 500 200 100 50 20 10 t s rw un a It OFF 05 02 01 005 002 001 05 07 1 2 345 7 1 2 345 7 10 20 30 In gt gt The tripping curve
101. 100 to 250 NSX400 630 Wiring for NSX100 to 630 A 2 poles in series Earthed neutral 250 500 V B and F 3P 2D version N and H 3P 3D version uo a ano x sak Micrologic 400 630 TM D Micrologic 5 2 A Z Micrologic 5 3 A Z DB115577 DB115578 559E1600 indd Schneider version 1 0 PB103366 Functions and characteristics Compact NSX circuit breakers may be used on 400 Hz systems Micrologic TM D trip unit Special applications Protection of 400 Hz systems 400 Hz distribution systems The main 400 Hz applications are in aeronautics and certain military ships Modern aircraft have three phase 115 200 V 400 Hz networks Impact on protective devices Due to the higher frequency circuit breakers are subjected to additional temperature rise for identical current levels resulting from higher losses caused by Foucault currents and an increase in the skin effect reduction in the useful CSA of conductors To remain within the rated temperature rise limits of devices current derating is required The power levels of 400 Hz applications rarely exceed a few hundred kW with relatively low short circuit currents generally not exceeding four times the rated current The standard Compact NSX and Masterpact NT NW ranges are suitable for 400 Hz applications if derating coefficients are applied to the protection settings See the derating table below Breaking capacity of Compact
102. 160H 70 kA at 380 415 V Rating 3P 3d 4P 3d 4d 3d N 2 100 LV430791 LV430801 160 LV430790 LV430800 Compact NSX250H 70 kA at 380 415 V Rating 3P 3d 4P 3d 4d 3d N 2 100 LV431792 LV431802 160 LV431791 LV431801 250 LV431790 LV431800 Micrologic 5 2 A LSI protection ammeter Compact NSX100H 70 kA at 380 415 V 5 Rating 3P 3d 4P 3d 4d 3d N 2 OSN S 40 LV429794 LV429804 100 LV429793 LV429803 Compact NSX160H 70 kA at 380 415 V Rating 3P 3d 4P 3d 4d 3d N 2 OSN 100 LV430795 LV430805 160 LV430794 LV430804 Compact NSX250H 70 kA at 380 415 V Rating 3P 3d 4P 3d 4d 3d N 2 OSN 100 LV431797 LV431807 160 LV431796 LV431806 250 LV431795 LV431805 With electronic trip unit Micrologic 5 2 E LSI protection energy meter To be ordered with 2 catalogue numbers 1 basic frame 1 trip unit With electronic trip unit Micrologic 6 2 A LSIG protection ammeter To be ordered with 2 catalogue numbers 1 basic frame 1 trip unit With electronic trip unit Micrologic 6 2 E LSIG protection energy meter To be ordered with 2 catalogue numbers 1 basic frame 1 trip unit With electronic trip unit Micrologic 6 2 E M LSIG motor protection energy meter To be ordered with 2 catalogue numbers 1 basic frame 1 trip unit Schneider version 2 0 559E6100 indd ectric DB112244 Catalogue numbers NSX100 160 250NA complete fixed FC device Compact NSX100 160 250NA Compact NSX100 160 250NA switch disconnector With NA swit
103. 180 200 230 250 280 320 360 400 In 630A lo 250 280 320 350 400 450 500 570 630 Ir lox 9 fine adjustment settings from 0 9 to 1 0 9 0 92 0 93 0 94 0 95 0 96 0 97 0 98 1 for each value of lo Time delay s tr non adjustable accuracy 0 to 20 15xIr 400 6xIr 16 7 2xIr 11 Thermal memory 20 minutes before and after tripping E Short time protection with fixed time delay 74 Pick up A Isd Irx 1 5 2 3 4 5 6 Y 8 10 accuracy 10 Time delay ms tsd non adjustable Non tripping time 20 Maximum break time 80 Pick up A linon adjustable 600 1500 2400 3000 4800 6900 accuracy 15 Non tripping time 10 ms Maximum break time 50 ms for gt 1 5 li 1 Ifthe trip units are used in high temperature environments the Micrologic setting must take into account the thermal limitations of the circuit breaker See the temperature derating table Micrologic 1 3 M Circuit breaker Compact NSX400 Compact NSX630 Isd Pick up A Isd adjustable directly in amps accuracy ioie 9 settings 1600 1920 2440 2560 9 settings 2500 3000 3500 4000 2880 3200 3520 3840 4160 A 4500 5000 5500 6000 6500 A li Time delay ms tsd non adjustable Non tripping time 20 Maximum break time 60 Pick up A linon adjustable 4800 6500 Bea 37 Non tripping time 0 Maximum break time 30 ms 559E1200 indd Schneider version 1 0 DB115566 DB115567 PB103377 Functions and characteristics
104. 2 3d OSN 100 LV430881 LV430886 160 LV430880 LV430885 Compact NSX250F 36 kA at 380 415 V Rating 3P 3d AP 3d Ad 3d N 2 3d OSN 100 LV431862 LV431867 160 LV431861 LV431866 250 LV431860 LV431865 With electronic trip unit Micrologic 5 2 E LSI protection energy meter To be ordered with 2 catalogue numbers 1 basic frame 1 trip unit With electronic trip unit Micrologic 6 2 A LSIG protection ammeter To be ordered with 2 catalogue numbers 1 basic frame 1 trip unit With electronic trip unit Micrologic 6 2 E LSIG protection energy meter To be ordered with 2 catalogue numbers 1 basic frame 1 trip unit With electronic trip unit Micrologic 6 2 E M LSIG motor protection energy meter To be ordered with 2 catalogue numbers 1 basic frame 1 trip unit Schneider version 2 0 559E6100 indd ectric DB112222 DB112223 DB112224 Catalogue numbers NSX100 160 250N complete fixed FC device Compact NSX100 160 250N 50 kA 380 415 V Compact NSX100 160 250N rmal magnetic trip unit TM D Compact NSX100N 50 kA at 380 415 V Rating 3P 3d 4P 3d 4P 4d TM16D LV429847 LV429857 LV429867 TM25D LV429846 LV429856 LV429866 TM32D LV429845 LV429855 LV429865 TM40D LV429844 LV429854 LV429864 TMS50D LV429843 LV429853 LV429863 TM63D LV429842 LV429852 LV429862 TM80D LV429841 LV429851 LV429861 TM100D LV429840 LV429850 LV429860 Compact NSX160N 50 kA at 380 415 V Rating 3P 3d 4P 3d 4P 4d TM80D LV430843 LV430853 LV430863
105. 2 E 100 A LV429095 Micrologic 5 2 E 160 A LV430491 Micrologic 5 2 E 250A LV431491 Micrologic 6 2 A LSIG protection ammeter Rating 3P 3d Micrologic 6 2 A 40 A LV429111 Micrologic 6 2 A 100 A LV429110 Micrologic 6 2 A 160 A LV430505 Micrologic 6 2A250 A LV431505 Micrologic 6 2 E LSIG protection energy meter Rating 3P 3d Micrologic 6 2 E40 A LV429116 Micrologic 6 2 E 100 A LV429116 Micrologic 6 2 E 160 A LV430506 Micrologic 6 2 E 250A LV431506 NSX100 160 250F N H S L fixed FC device based on separate components Compact and Vigicompact 3P LV429003 LV429006 LV429004 LV429018 LV429005 3P LV430403 LV430406 LV430404 LV430391 LV430405 3P LV431403 LV431406 LV431404 LV431391 LV431405 Schneider Electric 4P LV429008 LV429011 LV429009 LV429019 LV429010 4P LV430408 LV430411 LV430409 LV430396 LV430410 4P LV431408 LV431411 LV431409 LV431396 LV431410 4P 3d LV429047 LV429046 LV429045 LV429044 LV429043 LV429042 LV429041 LV429040 LV430441 LV430440 LV431441 LV431440 4P 3d Ad 3d N 2 LV429082 LV429080 LV430480 LV431480 4P 3d Ad 3d N 2 3d OSN LV429101 LV429100 LV430495 LV431495 4P 3d Ad 3d N 2 3d OSN LV429106 LV429105 LV430496 LV431496 4P 3d 4d 3d N 2 3d OSN LV429136 LV429135 LV430515 LV431515 4P 3d Ad 3d N 2 3d OSN LV429141 LV429140 LV430516 LV431516 version 2 0 4P 4d LV429057 LV429056 LV429055 LV429054 LV429053 LV4290
106. 2111 SDTAM remote indication relay module with its terminal block Note all the trip units have a transparent lead sealable cover that protects access to the adjustment dials Motor protection Micrologic 2 M electronic trip units gt gt 30A gt 95 4 a 5 on a o 5 nT O A Micrologic 2 2 M Ir Class Isd li 3300A 155 170 185 Jo 8 2 40 140 200 7 14 120 210 5 20 6 12 100 220 s Ms A xir Circuit breakers with a Micrologic 2 2 2 3 M trip unit include protection similar to an inverse time thermal relay They are combined with a contactor PE OCOC EOD areca td acteanceni uta nnana IN Settings are made using a dial Overloads or thermal protection Long time protection and trip class Ir Inverse time thermal protection against overloads with adjustable pick up Ir Settings are made in amperes The tripping curve for the long time protection which indicates the time delay tr before tripping is defined by the selected trip class Trip class class The class is selected as a function of the normal motor starting time m Class 5 starting time less than 5s m Class 10 starting time less than 10 s m Class 20 starting time less than 20 s For a given class it is necessary to check that all motor feeder components are sized to carry the 7 2 Ir starting current without excessive temperature rise during the time corresponding to the class Short circuits Short time protection Isd Protection
107. 29212 LV429213 MH type for NSX100 160 200 to 440 V LV429210 LV429211 MH type for NSX250 200 to 440 V LV431535 LV431536 MH type for NSX100 160 440 to 550 V LV429215 LV429216 MH type for NSX250 440 t0 550 V LV431533 LV431534 Connection for a 4P Vigi on a 3P breaker Lv429214 Insulation monitoring module g 3P 4P 200 to 440 VAC LV429459 LV429460 2 Connection for a 4P insulation monitoring LV429214 module on a 3P breaker 559E6100 indd Schneider version 2 0 DB112733 DB112730 DB115665 DB112736 DB112729 Catalogue numbers Trip unit accessories Compact and Vigicompact NSX100 160 250 Trip unit accessories External neutral CT for 3 pole breaker with Micrologic 5 6 25 100A LV429521 150 250 A LV430563 24 V DC wiring accessory for Micrologic 5 6 lt 24 V DC power supply connector LV434210 ZSI wiring accessory for NS630b NW with NSX ZSI module LV434212 24 30 V DC 54440 48 60 VDC 54441 100 125 VDC 54442 110 130 VAC 54443 200 240 VAC 54444 380 415 VAC 54445 24 V DC battery module 54446 Schneider version 2 0 559E6100 indd ectric Catalogue numbers Installation and connection Compact and Vigicompact NSX100 160 250 Fixed RC device fixed FC device rear connection kit 3 Short RC kit 5 Kit3P 3x Lva29235 S Kit 4P 4 x LV429235 Mixed RC kit Kit 3P ShortRCs 2x Lv429235 Bu LongRCs 1x LV429236 _ Kit 4P Short RCs 2 x LV429235
108. 30 For toggle DB115123 DB115038 DB115039 s A _ Type P3 P4 y 4 NSX100 160 250 88 89 Note door cutout dimensions are given for a device position in A NSX400 630 112 113 the enclosure where A gt 100 h x 5 with respect to the door hinge 559E3300 indd Schneider version 1 0 Gf Electric DB115072 DB115076 DB115080 Dimensions and Front panel cutouts connection Vigicompact NSX100 to 630 fixed version Bare sheet metal NSX100 to 250 NSX400 630 For toggle DB115073 DB115074 DB115075 DB115077 DB115078 DB115079 el Y Vo 38 p ry 29 a a With IP30 front panel escutcheon NSX100 to 250 NSX400 630 For toggle DB115081 DB115074 DB115075 Schgeider er 559E3300 indd DB 115082 DB 115084 With IP30 front panel escutcheon cont For toggle with access to trip unit DB115083 NSX100 to 250 NSX400 630 DB115078 DB115079 NSX100 to 250 NSX400 630 Type NSX100 160 250 NSX400 630 P3 88 112 DB115085 P4 89 113 DB115086 DB115087 147 al 58 559E3300 indd S
109. 35 m NSX cord L 1 3m NSX cord L 3m 10 Modbus line terminators 10 RJ45 connectors female female 10 ULP line terminators 10 RJ45 RJ45 male cord L 0 3 m 10 RJ45 RJ45 male cord L 0 6 m 5 RJ45 RJ45 male cord L 1m 5 RJ45 RJ45 male cord L 2 m 5 RJ45 RJ45 male cord L 3 m 1 RJ45 RJ45 male cord L 5 m Power supply modules 24 30 V DC 48 60 V DC 100 125 VAC 110 130 V AC 200 240 V AC 380 415 V AC Battery module 24 V DC battery module 1 For measurement display with Micrologic A and E or status display with BSCM 2 See Telemecanique catalogue BSCM EF Switchboard front display module FDM121 FDM mounting accessory diameter 22 mm Modbus SL communication interface module NSX cord for U gt 480 VAC L 0 35 m 10 stacking connectors for communication interface modules RS 485 roll cable 4 wires length 60 m External power supply module 24 V DC 1 AOVC IV Schneider Electric External power supply module 100 240 V AC 110 230 V DC 24 V DC 3 A class 2 version 2 0 LV434205 TRV00121 TRV00128 TRV00210 LV434200 LV434201 LV434202 LV434204 TRV00217 VW3A8306DRC 50965 TRV00870 TRV00880 TRV00803 TRV00806 TRV00810 TRV00820 TRV00830 TRV00850 ABL8RPS24030 54440 54441 54442 54443 54444 54445 54446 559E6200 indd DB111449 DB111451 DB111450 DB111452 DB111448 DB111453 DB117158 Catalogue numbers
110. 40 1 x LV432532 1 x LV432533 version 2 0 ap Kit for Compact 1 x LV432539 1 x LV432533 1 x LV432533 4P Kit for Vigicompact 1 x LV432541 1 x LV432532 1 x LV432533 Installation and connection cont Compact and Vigicompact NSX400 630 cont 559E6200 indd Accessories Compact and Vigicompact NSX400 630 Catalogue numbers Connection accessories Cu or AIl Rear connections DB111471 DB115624 DB115625 DB112724 DB115650 DB115649 DB115651 DB115652 DB112237 DB112238 Q 2 short LV432475 WSs 2 long LV432476 Bare cable connectors aad Aluminium connectors 1 x 35 to 300 mm Set of 3 LV432479 DE Setof4 LV432480 Ss Aluminium connectors for 2 cables 2 x 35 to 300 mm Set of 3 LV432481 a ae Set of 4 LV432482 Re UN 6 35 mm voltage tap for steel or aluminium connectors Set of 10 LV429348 Terminal extensions A 45 terminal extensions Setof3 LV432586 Setof4 LV432587 5 Edgewise terminal extensions Setof3 LV432486 R Set of 4 LV432487 isa Right angle terminal extensions Set of 3 LV432484 ee Set of 4 LV432485 Spreaders 52 5 mm 3P LV432490 4P LV432491 l 70 mm 3P LV432492 4P LV432493 Crimp lugs for copper cable For cable 240 mm Set of 3 LV432500 Set of 4 Lv432501 2 For cable 300 mm Setof3 LV432502 ame Setof4 LV432503 Supplied with 2 or 3 interphase barriers Crimp lugs for aluminium cable For cable 240
111. 41 125 149 B10 9 25 P2 135 158 MCC and CNOMO type direct rotary handles for Compact NSX100 to 630 fixed version DB112713 DB112716 DB111413 DB111415 559E3200 indd version 1 0 DB112714 DB111414 DB111416 DB112709 DB111417 Dimensions and Dimensions and mounting connection Extended rotary handle for Compact NSX100 to 630 Fixed and plug in circuit breakers DB112710 Cutout for shaft mm Type R1 NSX100 160 250 min 171 max 600 NSX400 630 min 195 max 600 Withdrawable circuit breaker We Cutout for shaft mm D1 a R2 gt 47 Type R2 IZ NSX100 160 250 min 248 max 600 NSX400 630 min 272 max 600 Dimensions and front panel cutout DB111418 Type A18 B10 D1 NSX100 160 250 9 9 25 75 NSX400 630 246 5 100 Schneider version 1 0 559E3200 indd DB112718 DB112722 DB112723 Dimensions and mounting Indication and measurement modules for Compact NSX100 to 630 fixed version Circuit breaker with ammeter module Circuit breaker with current transformer module DB112719 DB112720 DB112721 EEE Interphase barriers Short terminal shields Long terminal shields Mounting NSX100 to 250 NSX400
112. 415 V 50 Hz 440 480 V 60 Hz 24 30 V 48 60 V 110 130 V 250 V MTc NSX400 630 BSCM Wire length L 0 35 m Wire length L 1 3m Wire length L 3m 220 240 V 50 60 Hz U gt 480 VAC wire length L 0 35 m version 2 0 MT400 630 LV432639 LV432640 LV432641 LV432642 LV432647 LV432643 LV432644 LV432645 LV432646 LV432648 Lv432652 LV434205 LV434200 LV434201 LV434202 LV434204 559E6200 indd Catalogue numbers Accessories cont Compact and Vigicompact NSX400 630 cont Indication and measurement modules Ammeter module Rating A 400 630 5 3P LV432655 LV432855 4P LV432656 LV432856 IS Rating A 400 630 5 3P LV434852 LV434853 Rating A 400 600 z 3P LV432657 LV432857 2 4P LV432658 LV432858 Current transformer module and voltage output e Rating A 400 600 3 3P LV432653 LV432861 4P LV432654 LV432862 3P 4P LV432566 DB111479 Rotary handles Direct rotary handle 8 With black handle LV432597 5 With red handle on yellow front LV432599 MCC conversion accessory LV432606 CNOMO conversion accessory LV432602 Extended rotary handle With black handle LV432598 With red handle on yellow front LV432600 With telescopic handle for withdrawable device LV432603 DB111481 Accessories for direct or extended rotary handle Indication auxiliary 1 early break contact LV432605 2 early make contacts LV429346 559E6200 indd Schneider versi
113. 52 LV429051 LV429050 LV430451 LV430450 LV431451 LV431450 Basic frame 559E6100 indd Catalogue numbers NSX100 160 250F N H S L fixed FC device based on separate components cont Compact and Vigicompact cont Trip unit cont Motor protection REN Magnetic MA I protection DB115666 lt a Rating 3P 3d 4P 3d MA2 5 LV429125 MA6 3 LV429124 MA12 5 LV429123 MA25 LV429122 MAS5O LV429121 MA100 LV429120 LV429130 MA150 LV430500 LV430510 MA220 LV431500 LV431510 N Micrologic 2 2 M LS protection 5 Rating 3P 3d Micrologic 2 2 M 25 A LV429174 Micrologic 2 2 M 50 A LV429172 Micrologic 2 2 M 100 A LV429170 Micrologic 2 2 M 150A LV430520 Micrologic 2 2 M 220 A LV431520 s Micrologic 6 2 E M LSIG protection energy meter Rating 3P 3d Micrologic 6 2 E M 25 A Lv429184 Micrologic 6 2 E M 50 A Lv429182 Micrologic 6 2 E M 80 A LV429180 Micrologic 6 2 E M 150 A LV430521 Micrologic 6 2 E M 220 A LV431521 Generator protection S A Thermal magnetic TM G Rating 3P 3d 4P 4d TM16G LV429155 LV429165 TM25G Lv429154 Lv429164 TM40G LV429153 LV429163 TM63G LV429152 LV429162 N Micrologic 2 2 G LS protection Rating 3P 34 4P 3d 4d 3d N 2 Micrologic 2 2 G 40 A Lv429076 LV429086 Micrologic 2 2 G 100A LV429075 LV429085 Micrologic 2 2 G 160 A LV430475 LV430485 Micrologic 2 2 G 250 A LV431475 LV431485 2 3P 4P ME type for NSX100 160 200 to 440 V LV4
114. 5481 gt 26 1 6 DB115482 gt 19 H 4 q iN N An 171 A 100 In cr L i L Ben a El Rear connection mounting through front panel N or on rails V NSX100 to 250 NSX400 630 DB115484 DB115488 114 5 100 5 DB115485 3 ee 75 5 5 lt lt 67 _ gt 08 5 gt 11 ae i 70 749 113 5 575 TDBDm al g Schneider version 1 0 559E3500 indd Electric Connection with accessories Bare cable connectors mounting on backplate M or rails V o DE H f i i 7 zersuga EJ eS u ___ N_ i l i A l o H e 3o ite Ss 5 io ise 5 o it z L 6pstiaa o6tSLL9A NSX400 630 S6rSLLaa v rSiiad e6rSt laa Bare cable connectors mounting through front panel N or on rails V E
115. 550 Operating safety The Vigi module is a user safety device It must be tested at regular intervals every 6 months Schneider version 1 0 DB115571 Functions and characteristics The parameters to be considered for motor feeder protection depend on m the application type of machine driven operating safety frequency of operation etc m the level of continuity of service required by the load or the application m the applicable standards for the protection of life and property The required electrical functions are g isolation m switching generally at high endurance levels m protection against overloads and short circuits adapted to the motor m additional special protection A motor feeder must comply with the requirements of standard IEC 60947 4 1 concerning contactors and their protection m coordination of feeder components m thermal relay trip classes m contactor utilisation categories m coordination of insulation Isolation and short circuit protection BON x Circuit breaker with magnetic protection Power switching Contactor Overload protection Thermal protection or thermal protection separate or built into the circuit breaker Specific or internal motor protection Additional protection functions Switchgear functions in a motor feeder Motor protection General information on motor feeders Motor feeder function A motor feeder comprises a s
116. 573 Micrologic 2 2 2 3 M Circuit breaker Compact NSX100 a a t Compact NSX160 Compact NSX250 u u o a Ir Compact NSX400 Class Compact NSX630 a S gt Isd Pick up A Ir value depending on trip unit rating In and setting on dial li tripping between In 25A Ir 12 14 16 18 20 22 23 24 25 Toana In 50A k 235 30 2 35 40 42 4 amp 5 47 50 l In 100A Ir 50 60 70 15 80 85 90 95 100 In 150A Ir 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 In 220A Ir 100 120 140 155 170 185 200 210 220 In 320 A Ir 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 In 500A Ir 250 280 320 350 380 400 440 470 500 Trip class as per IEC 60947 4 1 5 10 20 Time delay s tr 1 5xlr 120 240 480 for warm motor depending on selected trip class 6xIr 6 5 13 5 26 forcold motor Poe 10 20 for cold motor Thermal memory 20 minutes before and after tripping Cooling fan non adjustable motor self cooled E Short circuits Short time protection with fixed time delay Pick up A Isd Irx 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 accuracy 15 Time delay ms tsd non adjustable Non tripping time 20 Maximum break time 60 Pick up A linon adjustable 425 750 1500 2250 3300 4800 6500 accuracy 15 Time delay ms Non tripping time 0 Maximum break time 30 Pick up A lunbal in average current gt 30 accuracy 20 Time delay s non adjustable 0 7 s during starting 4 s during normal operation 1 Motor s
117. 630 On backplate 2 3P 3P DB111420 DB112078 DB112079 N AN AN y L fp ON 2 FI F1 F2 gt gt F1 1 The OT holes are required for rear connection only For two pole circuit breakers the middle holes are not required On rails 2 3P 3P 4P gt F14 lt 3 gt F14 lt g gt F3 5 lt F2 lt F2 he F2 pn era DT FA BERG BIS H pee ile nN 26 N 26 i T pi 26 c1 c2 C11 E1 E5 E6 E7 E8 Type A A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 NSX100 160 250 80 5 94 145 178 5 155 5 236 169 220 253 5 81 86 137 62 5 137 5 200 145 215 NSX400 630 127 5 142 5 200 237 227 5 355 242 5 300 337 95 5 110 162 100 200 300 213 5 327 Type F1 F2 F3 OT U NSX100 160 250 35 175 70 24 32 NSX400 630 45 22 5 90 32 lt 35 559E3200 indd Schneider version 1 0 DB111422 DB114985 DB114988 Dimensions and Dimensions and mounting connection One piece spreader for Compact NSX100 to 250 fixed version Rear alignment Front alignment 5 Eo i T 5 98 j lt 110 Sh 255 5 Mig nterphase barriers Short terminal shields Long terminal shields Rear alignment 2 3P 4P DB114986 DB114987 Front alignment 2 3P 4P DB114989 DB114990
118. 70 30 50 65 70 22 35 35 40 50 22 35 35 40 50 2 35 35 40 50 22 35 40 50 22 35 40 50 8 10 10 15 20 8 10 10 15 20 8 10 10 15 20 10 20 25 35 10 20 25 35 85 90 100 120 150 85 90 100 120 150 85 90 100 120 150 85 100 120 150 85 100 120 150 36 50 70 100 150 36 50 70 100 150 36 50 70 100 150 50 70 100 150 50 70 100 150 35 50 65 90 130 35 50 65 90 130 35 50 65 90 130 42 65 90 130 42 65 90 130 12 5 36 50 65 70 12 5 36 50 65 70 30 36 50 65 70 30 50 65 70 30 50 65 70 11 35 35 40 50 11 35 35 40 50 22 35 35 40 50 11 11 2 12 a It 2 12 4 10 10 15 20 4 10 10 15 20 8 10 10 15 20 10 10 12 12 10 10 12 12 50000 40000 20000 15000 15000 50000 10000 20000 12000 8000 30000 20000 10000 6000 4000 20000 15000 10000 6000 6000 10000 7500 5000 3000 2000 40 85 90 100 120 150 40 85 90 100 120 40 85 90 100 120 40 85 100 120 40 85 100 120 150 20 35 50 65 90 130 20 35 50 65 90 20 35 50 65 90 30 42 65 90 30 42 65 90 130 8 20 35 40 50 20 20 35 40 20 20 35 40 20 35 40 20 35 40 50 85 85 85 85 85 85 25 50 65 35 50 65 10 10 10 20 20 20 I u 7 E 7 7 E E 7 7 7 E 7 a 7 E 105 x 161 x 86 105 x 161 x 86 105 x 161 x 86 140 x 225 x 110 140 x 225 x 110 140 x 161 x 86 140 x 161 x 86 140 x 161 x 86 185 x 255 x 110 185 x 255 x 110 2 05 2 2 2 4 6 05 6 2 2 4 2 6 28 7 90 8 13 35 45 mm 35 45 mm 35 45 mm 45 52 5 mm 45 52 5 mm 45 70 mm 45 70 mm 300 300 300 4x240 4x240 559E1100 indd version 1 0 DB115565 Functions an
119. 8 IP40 IP43 rubber toggle cover 1 toggle cover LV432560 Lead sealing accessories Bag of accessories LV429375 ERE as i OD EN sa p 60 mm busbar adapter 3P 60 mm busbar adapter 32623 sS 1 For only 1 device 559E6200 indd Schneider version 2 0 DB117160 DB117159 DB117161 DB116368 DB115885 DB117165 DB117164 DB117181 DB117180 DB117182 DB117173 DB117172 DB117171 DB117184 DB117183 DB117163 DB111426 Catalogue numbers Accessories cont Compact and Vigicompact NSX400 630 cont Plug in withdrawable version accessories Connection adapter for plug in base 1 9 wire fixed connector for base 1 9 wire moving connector for circuit breaker 1 support for 3 moving connectors 9 wire manual auxiliary connector fixed moving Plug in base accessories Long insulated right angle terminal extensions 2 IP40 shutters for base Base Base Power connections Short terminal shields Short terminal shields Safety trip interlock Escutcheon collar Escutcheon collar Locking kit keylock not included Keylock keylock adapter not included Ronis 1351B 500 Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z 2 carriage switches connected disconnected position indication Seas 3P 4P Setof 2 3P 4P 3 4P 3P 4P 3 4P Toggle Vigi module version 2 0 aaszesn LV432585 LV429273 LV432523 LV432525 LV429272 LV432526 LV432521
120. A17 B B1 B2 B8 B9 c4 c5 C6 D1 NSX100 160 250 27 5 73 34 5 625 52 5 105 140 45 5 91 143 182 209 5 75 NSX400 630 40 123 52 100 70 140 185 61 5 123 215 256 258 100 559E3100 indd Schneider version 1 0 DB112701 DB112705 DB112707 Dimensions and Dimensions and mounting connection Direct rotary handle for Compact and Vigicompact NSX100 to 630 Dimensions 3P 4P Fixed circuit breaker gt L lt B10 DB112702 DB112703 DB112704 60 5 60 2 ie Bem B9 gt C8 without keylock C9 with keylock Plug in circuit breaker 8 M 5 T N A r lt r U S J ee 27 Legs D1 a C8 Withdrawable circuit breaker u 2 AS x fom D1 gt c8 gt 32 Type A14 A15 A18 B B1 B2 B8 B9 B10 C7 c8 c9 D1 NSX100 160 250 27 5 73 9 52 5 105 140 45 5 91 9 25 121 155 164 75 NSX400 630 40 123 246 70 140 185 61 5 123 5 145 179 188 100 Schneider version 1 0 559E3200 indd Electric DB112712 DB112 715 DB112712 DB112 715 MCC type direct rotary handle CNOMO type direct rotary handle Front panel cutout MCC type direct rotary handle CNOMO type direct rotary handle Type NSX100 160 250 NSX400 630 Type NSX100 160 250 NSX400 630 A18 9 24 6 B11 69 85 A19 60 83 B12 120 160 A20 120 160 B13 65 82 B14 130 164 A22 130 164 P
121. Bars L mm lt 40 lt 32 I mm d 15 30 SI lt 34 d mm lt 20 lt 15 e mm 3 lt es lt 10 3 lt es lt 10 mm 12 5 10 5 Lugs L mm lt 40 lt 32 mm 12 5 10 5 Torque Nm 1 50 50 Torque Nm 2 20 20 1 Tightening torque on the circuit breaker for spreaders or terminal extensions 2 Tightening torque on the plug in base for spreaders or terminal extensions Spreaders and right angle 45 and edgewise terminal extensions are supplied with flexible interphase barriers Mounting detail 2 cables with lugs Schneider version 1 0 559E3500 indd Electric ae DB1125659 559E3500 indd DB115660 Connection of bare cables to Compact and Vigicompact NSX100 to 630 Connection for NSX100 to 250 DB112317 DB112315 DB111327 DB115662 DB115661 1 cable 2 cable Distribution connector Polybloc distribution block connector connector 1 cable connector Steel Aluminium 160A 250A g L mm 25 25 5 S mm Cu AI 1 5t095 25to50 70 to 95 120 to 185 150 max flex L Torque Nm 12 20 26 26 2 cable connector L mm 25 or 50 S mm Cu Al 2x 50 to 2 x 120 Torque Nm 22 6 cable distribution connector copper or aluminium L mm 15 or 30 S mm Cu AI 1 5 to 61 8 to 35 Torque Nm 4 6 Polybloc distribution block 6 or 9 cables L mm 12 16 S mm Cu Al 6x4 to 10 3x6 to 16 1 For flexible cables from 1 5 to 4mm connection with crimped or self crimpin
122. D A 83 This type of release operates when the supply voltage drops below the set minimum Schneider version 1 0 559E7100 indd Electric ee Nationwide support on one number call the Customer Information Centre on 0870 608 8 608 Fax 0870 608 8 606 Schneider Electric s local support Schneider Electric is committed to supporting its customers at every stage of a project Our 180 sales engineers the largest dedicated sales force in the UK electrical industry operate from 4 customer support centres Our sales engineers are skilled at assessing individual requirements and combined with the expert support of our product specialists will develop the most effective and economical answer taking relevant regulations and standards fully into account To access the expertise of the Schneider Electric group please call 0870 608 8 608 Each customer support centre includes facilities for demonstrations and training and presentation rooms fully equipped with audio visual and video providing excellent meeting facilities Merlin Gerin Merlin Gerin is a world leader in the manufacture and supply of high medium and low voltage products for the distribution protection control and management of electrical systems and is focused on the needs of both the commercial and industrial sectors The newly launched VDI Network Solutions offer provides flexible configurable ethernet systems for all communication needs Square D Square D is a
123. D4 Micrologic 2 SDT Micrologic 5 SDT or output 1 PAL Ir or output 2 Micrologic 6 SDT or output 1 SDG or output 2 Terminals shown in red O must be connected by the customer Compact NSX100 to 630 SDx module with Micrologic 24 415V DB115711 gt 105 Ir DB115712 gt 90 Ir Circuit breaker Circuit breaker trip order reset I charge current PAL Ir thermal overload pre alarm SDG ground fault signal SDT _ thermal fault signal Q circuit breaker Schneider version 1 0 559E4100 indd ectric SDTAM module with Micrologic M 24 to 415 V The diagram is shown with circuits de energised all devices open connected and charged and relays in normal position DB115713 Manual Closing Ee SDT KA1 E reset order KM1 Symbos ee ana aoe SDTAM i i i SD1 SD3 SDTAM module power supply i i i 1 68 Opening SD2 thermal fault signal output 4 Wa 10 5 order E 80 mA max a er ven SD4 contactor control output 199 414 i 80 mA max OFF 15 aaa at l KA1 SD2 SD4 Micrologic 2 M SDT KA1 KM1 Micrologic 6 E M SDT KA1 Terminals shown in red O must be connected by the customer Class tr at 7 2 Ir gt 95 To 1 anne DB115714 lt 95 T 400 ms before circuit breaker tripping order Contactor closing order Manual or automatic reset I charge current SDT thermal
124. E3100 indd Electric DB112686 DB112690 Dimensions and Dimensions and mounting connection Visu function for Compact NSX400 630 fixed version Dimensions combination with Interpact INV400 to 630 x lt 162 re 160 4 DB112687 lt 130 gt 185 45 45 45 DB112688 DB112689 120 Ei Interphase barriers for base Short terminal shields Long terminal shields Mounting 3P 4P On rails or backplate 8 90 gt g 90 996 De 906 Herz T zH H T H ate Fi ae a Tee X ne ji Le 241 Te aa a 2 pa Hj Hal e 200 ij _ ym 200 E _ B ett et Y Se i 1 US35 Schneider version 1 0 559E3100 indd Electric DB112693 DB112697 DB112699 Motor mechanism module for Compact NSX100 to 630 Dimensions 3P 4P Fixed circuit breaker DB112694 DB112695 DB112696 B9 gt xBe gt B C5 without keylock C6 with keylock Plug in circuit breaker DB112698 mr 45 lt D1 gt lt C5 Withdrawable circuit breaker DB112700 Type A14 A15 A146
125. Fe ung J I Instantaneous 3 NSX400 630 E Energy L Long time g 8 So Short time fixed delay Epee S Short time 255 7 G Ground fault ee er O OO Examples Micrologic 1 3 Instantaneous only 400 or 630A Distribution Micrologic 2 3 LSol 400 or 630A Distribution Micrologic 5 2A LSI 100 160 or 250A Ammeter Distribution Micrologic 6 3 E M LSIG 400 or 630A Energy Motor 1 LSol protection is standard on Micrologic 2 To ensure discrimination it offers short time protection S with a non adjustable delay and instantaneous protection 559E1100 indd version 1 0 Functions and Introduction characteristics Overview of trip units for Compact NSX Compact NSX offers a range of trip units in Type of protection and applications interchangeable cases whether they are MA magnetic TM D thermal magnetic magnetic thermal magnetic or electronic Versions 5 and 6 of the electronic trip unit offer communication and metering Using Micrologic sensors and intelligence Compact NSX supplies all the information required to manage the electrical installation and optimise energy use DB112028 DB112029 m Distribution and motors m Distribution m Generators Circuit breakers and trip units Compact NSX100 160 250 DB112022 DB112023 DB112094 MA Distribution and TM D Distribution motors TM G Generators DB112092 Compact NSX400 630 eececececee eee eee e eoceceerer eee cece eeee 1 3
126. From 40 amperes on up to the short circuit currents they offer excellent measurement accuracy This is made possible by a new generation of current transformers combining iron core sensors for self powered electronics and air core sensors Rogowski toroids for measurements The protection functions are managed by an ASIC component that is independent of the measurement functions This independence ensures immunity to conducted and radiated disturbances and a high level of reliability Numerous security functions Torque limiting screws The screws secure the trip unit to the circuit breaker When the correct tightening torque is reached the screw heads break off Optimum tightening avoids any risk of temperature rise A torque wrench is no longer required Easy and sure changing of trip units All trip units are interchangeable without wiring A mechanical mismatch protection system makes it impossible to mount a trip unit on a circuit breaker with a lower rating Ready LED for a continuous self test The LED on the front of the electronic trip units indicates the result of the self test runs continuously on the measurement system and the tripping release As long as the green LED is flashing the links between the CTs the processing electronics and the Mitop release are operational The circuit breaker is ready to protect No need for a test kit A minimum current of 15 to 50 A depending on the device is required for this indication
127. LV434849 LV434850 LV434851 Current transformer module Rating A 125 150 250 3P LV429457 LV430557 LV431567 4P LV429458 LV430558 LV431568 Current transformer module and voltage output Rating A 125 150 250 3P LV429461 LV430561 LV431569 4P LV429462 LV430562 LV431570 Voltage presence indicator SA 3P 4P Lv429325 SE Rotary handles Direct rotary handle pia With black handle LV429337 With red handle on yellow front LV429339 MCC conversion accessory LV429341 CNOMO conversion accessory LV429342 Extended rotary handle With black handle LV429338 With red handle on yellow front LV429340 With telescopic handle for withdrawable device LV429343 Accessories for direct or extended rotary handle Indication auxiliary 1 early break contact LV429345 2 early make contacts LV429346 Schneider version 2 0 559E6100 indd ectric DB112261 DB 112262 DB112263 DB112264 Catalogue numbers Accessories cont Compact and Vigicompact NSX100 160 250 cont Toggle locking device for 1 to 3 padlocks gt By removable device _ 29370 By fixed device LV429371 Locking of rotary handle Keylock adapter keylock not included 755 __ LV429344 Keylock keylock adapter not included Ronis 1351B 500 141940 Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z 42888 Locking of motor mechanism module Keylock adapter Ronis keylock special LV429449 559E6100 indd Schneider version 2 0 DB111486 DB111487 DB112268
128. Low Voltage Compact NSX Circuit breakers and switch disconnectors Measurement and communication From 100 to 630A Catalogue 2008 Schneider Contents Introduction 3 Functions and characteristics A 1 Installation recommendations B 1 Dimensions and connection C 1 Wiring diagrams D 1 Additional characteristics E 1 Catalogue numbers F 1 Glossary G 1 Compact NSX eee Next generation circuit breakers Today next generation Compact NSX circuit breakers provide an intelligent outlook and set the standards of tomorrow A power monitoring unit enhances their invariably impeccable protective functions For the first time users can monitor both energy and power offering new performance in a remarkably compact device Compactness discrimination and modularity all of the features which defined the success of the Compact NS generation of circuit breakers combined with new functions for safe easy monitoring and management of installations The new range of Compact NSX circuit breakers stands out from the crowd thanks to its electronic intelligence Through direct access to in depth information and networking via open protocols Compact NSX lets operators optimise the management of their electrical installations Far more than a circuit breaker Compact NSX is a measurement and communication tool ready to meet energy efficiency needs through optimised energy consumption increased en
129. M Distribution and motors DB112120 Settings and indications DB112037 DB112038 2250 3250 it 2500 A ca 1250 2250 250 175 228 aoo 2000 m 1500 A 1750 A Adjustment and Adjustment and reading reading Pick up set in amps using Pick up set in amps using dials dials Non adjustable time Non adjustable time delay delay Schneider version 1 0 559E1100 indd Electric Micrologic 2 electronic Micrologic 5 6 Aor E electronic trip units 5AorE 6AorE 3 g LSol 8 E a Ir 5 Isd I l m Distribution m Distribution m Distribution m Motors m Service connection public and generators and generators distribution m Generators m Motors I only A current metering functions m Motors E current and energy metering functions 4 z Spr ESS anes 3 liegez 3 ER 5 8 Fae a _ Fin 8 2 2 Distribution 5 2 A Distribution 6 2 A Distribution 2 2 G Generators and generators and generators 2 2 M Motors 5 2 E Distribution 6 2 E Distribution and generators and generators 5 2 A Z 16 Hz 2 3 networks g Popes Mierologic 5 3 8 gita DB112025 DB112027 DB111402 1 oo ooo 2 3 Distribution 5 3 A Distribution 6 3 A Distribution 6 3 E M Motors 1 3 M Motors I only and generators and genera
130. MD NA MA Micrologic 2 5 Micrologic 1 3 M 2 2 M and 6 2 3M Micrologic 6 2 E M and 6 3E M 25 25 3 7 5 15 20 50 50 78 15 30 40 100 100 15 30 75 100 160 150 25 50 100 150 250 220 40 75 150 200 400 320 125 250 300 550 500 150 350 500 The deratings indicated on pages B 8 and B 9 apply to TMD Micrologic 2 5 and 6 trip units rated at 40 C version 1 0 559E1600 indd Schneider Electric DB115575 Compact NSX circuit breakers may be used on 16 Hz 2 3 systems with special thermal magnetic and electronic Micrologic 5 A Z trip units Phase and isolated neutral interrupted 250 500 V B and F 3P 2D version N and H 3P 3D version L N L N DB115576 Remark For an operating voltage gt 250 V the installation must be designed to eliminate all risk of double earth faults DB112046 16 Hz 2 3 network protection Micrologic 5 A Z trip unit 16 Hz 2 3 networks Single phase distribution networks with a frequency of 16 Hz 2 3 are used for railroad applications in certain European countries Breaking capacity for 16 Hz 2 3 at 250 500 V Compact NSX circuit breakers of the 3P 2D or the 3P 3D type protect 16 Hz 2 3 networks at 250 V or 500 V They can be equipped with either m a TM D thermal magnetic trip unit for Compact NSX100 to 250 m or an electronic Micrologic 5 2 A Z trip unit for Compact NSX100 to 250 or a 5 3 A Z for Compact NSX400 630 The possible breaking capacity performance levels are B F N
131. NSX100 160 250 circuit breakers and switch disconnectors have slots for the electrical auxiliaries listed below 5 indication contacts see page A 80 m 2 ON OFF OF 1 and OF 2 m 1 trip indication SD m 1 fault trip indication SDE m 1 earth fault indication SDV when the device is equipped with a Vigi module 1 remote tripping release see page A 83 m either 1 MN undervoltage release m or 1 MX shunt release Remote indications Circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic trip units may be equipped with a fault trip indication to identify the type of fault by installing 1 indication module with two outputs see page A 81 m either an SDx module with Micrologic 2 2 5 2AorE 6 2AorE m or an SDTAM module with Micrologic 2 2 M or 6 2 E M motor protection This module occupies the slots of one OF contact and an MN MX release All these auxiliaries may be installed with a motor mechanism or a rotary handle The following table indicates auxiliary possibilities depending on the type of trip unit NA TMD TMG MA Motor mechanism rotary handle DB111392 Pan Rael OF1 i OF2 SD E E SDE MN im MX O E SDV O Tob ape aor Micrologic 2 5 6 Motor mechanism rotary handle Motor mechanism irotary handle DB115585 US Ur TOS ori we OF2
132. Overload short circuit protection Thermal magnetic Electronic with neutral protection Off 0 5 1 OSN 1 with ground fault protection with zone selective interlocking ZSI 2 Display I U f P E THD measurements interrupted current measurement Options Power Meter display on door Operating assistance Counters Histories and alarms Metering Com Device status control Com By Vigi module By Vigirex relay Dimensions and weights Earth leakage protection Dimensions mm Fixed front connections 2 3P WxHxD 4P Weight kg Fixed front connections 2 3P 4P Connections Connection terminals Pitch With without spreaders Large Cu or Al cables Cross section mm version 1 0 559E1100 indd Common characteristics Control Manual With toggle With direct or extended rotary handle m Electrical With remote control Versions Fixed Withdrawable Plug in base Chassis NSX100 NSX160 NSX250 NSX400 NSX630 E N A S L ENT ATS E FN eo H S L 1 a a ee ee E 100 160 250 400 630 2 3 3 4 2 3 3 4 2 3 3 4 3 4 3 4 85 90 100 120 150 85 90 100 120 150 85 90 100 120 150 85 100 120 150 85 100 120 150 36 50 70 100 150 36 50 70 100 150 36 50 70 100 150 50 70 100 150 50 70 100 150 35 50 65 90 130 35 50 65 90 130 35 50 65 90 130 42 65 90 130 42 65 90 130 25 36 50 65 70 30 36 50 65 70 30 36 50 65 70 30 50 65
133. P54 IK08 m With extended rotary handle IP56 IK08 m With motor mechanism IP40 IK07 Schneider version 1 0 ectric PB103354 40 PB103279 44 Functions and characteristics Compact NSX100 160 250 Compact NSX400 630 1 OSN Over Sized Neutral protection for neutrals carrying high currents e g 3rd harmonics 2 ZSI Zone Selective Interlocking using pilot wires 3 2P circuit breaker in 3P case for B and F types only with thermal magnetic trip unit Introduction Characteristics and performance of Compact NSX circuit breakers from 100 to 630 A Common characteristics Rated voltages Insulation voltage V Ui 800 Impulse withstand voltage Uimp 8 kV Operational voltage V Ue AC 50 60 Hz 690 Suitability for isolation IEC EN 60947 2 yes Utilisation category A Pollution degree IEC 60664 1 S Circuit breakers Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947 2 Rated current A In 40 C Number of poles Breaking capacity kA rms Icu AC 50 60 Hz 220 240 V 380 415 V 440 V 500 V 525 V 660 690 V Service breaking capacity kA rms Ics AC 50 60 Hz 220 240 V 380 415 V 440V 500 V 525V 660 690 V Durability C O cycles Mechanical Electrical 440 V In 2 In 690 V In 2 In Characteristics as per Nema AB1 Breaking capacity kA rms AC 50 60 Hz 240V 480 V 600 V Characteristics as per UL 508 Breaking capacity kArms AC 50 60 Hz 240 V 480 V 600 V Short circuit protection Magnetic only
134. SD4 SDTAM i nooo 6 8 gt Opening E Q 4 24 10 Pa DER order af Jie a V K i 1 TR 14 i i I OFF 15 s i KAI KMI EE E NL EEE SDTAM wiring diagram with contactor control 559E1860 indd Schneider version 1 0 PB103372 30 DB111335 Functions and characteristics Compact NSX250 with motor mechanism 1 2 3 4 soo Position indicator positive contact indication Spring status indicator charged discharged Manual spring charging lever Keylock device optional Locking device OFF position using 1 to 3 padlocks shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm not supplied 1 ON pushbutton O OFF pushbutton Manual auto mode selection switch The position of this switch can be indicated remotely Operation counter Compact NSX400 630 DB115690 Accessories and auxiliaries Motor mechanism When equipped with a motor mechanism module Compact NSX circuit breakers feature very high mechanical endurance as well as easy and sure operation m all circuit breaker indications and information remain visible and accessible including trip unit settings and indications m suitability for isolation is maintained and padlocking remains possible m double insulation of the front face Aspecific motor mechanism is required for operation via the communication function This communicating motor mechanism must be connected to the BSCM module to receive the opening and closing orders Operati
135. Settings are made using the adjustment dials with fine adjustment possibilities Overloads Long time protection Ir Inverse time protection against overloads with an adjustable current pick up Ir set using a dial and a non adjustable time delay tr Short circuits Short time protection with fixed time delay Isd Protection with an adjustable pick up Isd Tripping takes place after a very short delay used to allow discrimination with the downstream device Short circuits Non adjustable instantaneous protection Instantaneous short circuit protection with a fixed pick up Neutral protection m On 3 pole circuit breakers neutral protection is not possible m On four pole circuit breakers neutral protection may be set using a three position switch 4P 3D neutral unprotected 4P 3D N 2 neutral protection at half the value of the phase pick up i e 0 5 x Ir 4P 4D neutral fully protected at Ir 3 Micrologic 2 2 1i 3000A D 4 4P 3D AP 4D NACI CATIONS cvpecencsstecetascasseasmisseuadaaatsasenatenisanadavadioavs z Front indications m Green Ready LED flashes slowly when the circuit breaker is ready to trip in the event of a fault m Orange overload pre alarm LED steady on when gt 90 Ir m Red overload LED steady on when gt 105 Ir gt 15A gt 90 gt 105 Q O vr lt gt no a Remote indications An overload trip signal can be remoted by insta
136. TM100D LV430842 LV430852 LV430862 TM125D LV430841 LV430851 LV430861 TM160D LV430840 LV430850 LV430860 Compact NSX250N 50 kA at 380 415 V Rating 3P 3d 4P 3d 4P 4d TM125D LV431833 LV431843 LV431853 TM160D LV431832 LV431842 LV431852 TM200D LV431831 LV431841 LV431851 TM250D LV431830 LV431840 LV431850 With electronic trip unit Micrologic 2 2 LS protection Compact NSX100N 50 kA at 380 415 V Rating 3P 3d 4P 3d 4d 3d N 2 40 LV429797 LV429807 100 LV429795 LV429805 Compact NSX160N 50 kA at 380 415 V Rating 3P 3d 4P 3d 4d 3d N 2 100 LV430776 LV430786 160 LV430775 LV430785 Compact NSX250N 50 kA at 380 415 V Rating 3P 3d 4P 3d 4d 3d N 2 100 LV431872 LV431877 160 LV431871 LV431876 250 LV431870 LV431875 With electronic trip unit Micrologic 5 2 A LSI protection ammeter Compact NSX100N 50 kA at 380 415 V Rating 3P 3d 4P 3d 4d 3d N 2 OSN 40 LV429892 LV429897 100 LV429890 LV429895 Compact NSX160N 50 kA at 380 415 V Rating 3P 3d AP 3d Ad 3d N 2 OSN 100 LV430891 LV430896 160 LV430890 LV430895 Compact NSX250N 50 kA at 380 415 V Rating 3P 3d AP 3d Ad 3d N 2 OSN 100 LV431882 LV431887 160 LV431881 LV431886 250 LV431880 LV431885 With electronic trip unit Micrologic 5 2 E LSI protection energy meter To be ordered with 2 catalogue numbers 1 basic frame 1 trip unit With electronic trip unit Micrologic 6 2 A LSIG protection ammeter To be ordered with 2 catalogue numbers 1 basic fra
137. Time stamping of each value Date and time of min max record 2 Current min max value Min max value a a 2 Maintenance indicators Counter Mechanical cycles 1 Assignable to an alarm 2 Electrical cycles 1 Assignable to an alarm 2 Trips One per type of trip 2 Alarms One for each type of alarm 2 Hours Total operating time hours a 2 Indicator Contact wear 2 Load profile Hours at different load levels of hours in four current ranges 0 49 In 50 79 m a 2 Additional technical characteristics Contact wear Each time Compact NSX opens the Micrologic 5 6 trip unit measures the interrupted current and increments the contact wear indicator as a function of the interrupted current according to test results stored in memory Breaking under normal load conditions results in a very slight increment The indicator value may be read on the FDM121 display It provides an estimation of contact wear calculated on the basis of the cumulative forces affecting the circuit breaker When the indicator reaches 80 it is advised to replace the circuit breaker to ensure the availability of the protected equipment Circuit breaker load profile Micrologic 5 6 calculates the load profile of the circuit breaker protecting a load circuit The profile indicates the percentage of the total operating time at four current levels of breaker In m 01049 In m 5010 79 In m 8010 89 In m gt 90 In This info
138. X400 630 Bars L mm lt 25 lt 25 lt 32 I mm d 10 d 10 d 15 d mm lt 10 lt 10 lt 15 e mm lt 6 lt 6 3ses10 mm 6 5 8 5 10 5 Lugs L mm lt 25 lt 25 lt 32 mm 6 5 8 5 10 5 Torque Nm 1 10 15 50 Torque Nm 2 5 5 5 5 20 11 Torque Nm 3 8 8 20 1 Tightening torque on the circuit breaker for lugs or bars 2 Tightening torque on fixed devices for rear connectors tightening torque on plug in or withdrawable devices for power connectors 3 Tightening torque on the plug in base for terminal extensions Connection with accessories to NSX100 to 250 IEC 228 Pole pitch Without spreaders 35 mm With spreaders 45 mm Dimensions With spreaders or terminal extensions NSX100 NSX160 250 Bars L mm lt 25 lt 25 I mm 20 lt 1 lt 25 20 lt 1 lt 25 d mm lt 10 lt 10 e mm lt 6 lt 6 mm 6 5 8 5 Lugs L mm lt 25 lt 25 mm 6 5 8 5 Torque Nm 10 15 Torque Nm 2 5 5 1 Tightening torque on the circuit breaker for spreaders or terminal extensions 2 Tightening torque on the plug in base for spreaders or terminal extensions Spreaders and straight right angle 45 double L and edgewise terminal extensions are supplied with flexible interphase barriers Connection with accessories to NSX400 and 630 IEC 228 Pole pitch Without spreaders 45 mm With spreaders 52 5 or 70 mm Dimensions With spreaders With terminal extensions el
139. a transfer and power distribution to the connected modules Recommendations for 24 V DC wiring m Do not connect the positive terminal to earth m Do not connect the negative terminal to earth m The maximum length for each conductor is ten metres m For connection distances greater than ten metres the plus and minus conductors of the 24 V DC supply must be twisted to improve EMC m The 24 V DC conductors must cross the power cables perpendicularly If this is difficult or impossible the plus and minus conductors must be twisted Modbus Each Compact NSX circuit breaker equipped with Micrologic 5 6 and an FDM 121 display is connected to the Modbus network via the Modbus interface module Connection of all the circuit breakers and other Modbus devices in the switchboard to a Modbus bus is made much easier by using a Modbus RJ45 junction block installed in the switchboard Recommendations for Modbus wiring m The shielding may be earthed m The conductors must be twisted to improve immunity EMC m The Modbus conductors must cross the power cables perpendicularly Schneider version 1 0 ectric DB115053 DB115706 Installation recommendations When thermal magnetic trip units are used at ambient temperatures other than 40 C the Ir pick up is modified A A 10 20 30 40 60 70 C Temperature derating curve for Compact NSX100
140. ailable cords All connections are made with prefabricated cords m NSX cord for connection of the internal terminal block to the Modbus interface or the FDM 121 display via an RJ45 connector The cord is available in three lengths 0 35 m 1 3 m and 3 m m ULP cords with RJ45 connectors at each end for the other connections between components The cord is available in six lengths 0 3 m 0 6 m 1m 2 m 3 m and 5 m For greater distances two cords can be interconnected using the RJ45 female female accessory Maximum length of 10 m between 2 modules and 30 m in all Aline terminator must be fitted to all components with an unused RJ45 connector Schneider version 1 0 559E2100 indd ectric DB115703 DB115704 DB115705 24vDC Mn 24VDC EV Ds asd N OF SSeS Power supply without the Communication function via the terminal block with a backup battery 24 V DC Modbus de Downstream ULP wiring for 24 V DC supply Supply with the Communication function via the Modbus interface Modbus Network 559E2100 indd Masterpact NW 7 24voe 24V DC 24vDCl eee Battery Masterpact NT Modbus junction block 24 V DC power supply module Use An external 24 V DC power supply is required for installations with communication whatever the type of trip unit O
141. ak contacts optional The extended rotary handle offers the same possibilities with early make and or early break contacts as the standard rotary handle Parts of the extended rotary handles m A unit that replaces the front cover of the circuit breaker secured by screws m Anassembly handle and front plate on the door that is always secured in the same position whether the circuit breaker is installed vertically or horizontally m An extension shaft that must be adjusted to the distance The min max distance between the back of circuit breaker and door is o 185 600 mm for Compact NSX100 to 250 O 209 600 mm for Compact NS400 630 For withdrawable devices the extended rotary handle is also available with a telescopic shaft to compensate for device disconnection In this case the min max distances are O 248 600 mm for Compact NSX100 to 250 o 272 600 mm for Compact NS400 630 Manual source changeover systems An additional accessory interlocks two devices with rotary handles to create a source changeover system Closing of one device is possible only if the second is open This function is compatible with direct or extended rotary handles Up to three padlocks can be used to lock in the OFF or ON position Schneider version 1 0 ectric PB103795 36 PB103600 32 PB103601 32 Functions and characteristics Voltage presence indicator Compact NSX with current transformer module Compact NSX with a
142. amp amp Isd lunbal tunbal ljam tjam lg tg gt 95 155 185 5 ATO mot tao 120 210 _ 1 100 2 220 at D a ce 2G T DB112116 larm Ready Al Vv i fe 8 VA ZB IC feet 3 7m o wi O OOD O Ig x In m overloads with selection of the same trip N classes 5 10 or 20 plus trip class 30 for Protection rer starting of machines with high inertia The protection functions are identical to those of Micrologic 2 M and can be fine 20 r op adjusted via the keypad In addition it offers specific motor 3 Access to setting modifications via the keypad is protected by a locking function 2 protection functions that can be set via the that is controlled by a microswitch The lock is activated automatically if the keypad keypad is not used for 5 minutes Access to the microswitch is protected by a transparent lead sealable cover It is possible to scroll through settings and measurements with the cover closed Overloads or thermal class and short circuits The long time short time and instantaneous functions are identical to those of Micrologic 2 M In addition there is trip class 30 for long time protection and a setting for self cooled or fan cooled motors amp Ground fault protection Ig Residual type ground fault protection with an adjustable pick up Ig with Off position and adjustable time delay tg Phase unbalance or phase loss lunbal This function
143. an be increased to 45 mm m NSX400 630 the 45 mm pitch can be increased to 52 or 70 mm Bars cable lugs or cable connectors can be attached to the ends One piece spreader for NSX100 to 250 Connection of large cables may require an increase in the distance between the device terminals The one piece spreader is the means to m increase the 35 mm pitch of the NSX100 to 250 circuit breaker terminals to the 45 mm pitch of a NSX400 630 device m use all the connection and insulation accessories available for the next largest frame size lugs connectors spreaders right angle and edgewise terminal extensions terminal shields and interphase barriers It may also be used for Interpact INS switch disconnectors Equipped with a single piece spreader Compact NSX devices can be mounted m atthe back of a switchboard m behind the front panel with a raiser The one piece spreader is also the means to m align devices with different frame sizes in the switchboard m use the same mounting plate whatever the device Pitch mm depending on the type of spreader Compact NSX circuit breaker NSX100 to 250 NSX400 to 630 Without spreaders 35 45 With spreaders 45 52 5 or 70 With one piece spreader 45 version 1 0 559E1840 indd DB112313 DB112315 DB112316 DB111327 DB111329 DB111332 DB112314 Bare cable DB112317 DB111326 1 cable 2 cable connector for connector for NSX100 to 250 NSX400 630 NSX100
144. and H as indicated below Breaking capacity Icu Operating voltage TMD and Micrologic 5 A Z trip units Performance B F N H 250 V 500 V Icu kA 25 36 50 70 Protection TM D thermal magnetic trip units Ir Im 2500 TN 2250 250 175 TM 250 D i 225 200 2000 1500 250A 40 C i 1750 A A Ir Im The 16 Hz 2 3 frequency does not modify the thermal settings with respect to those at 50 Hz see page A 15 The magnetic pick ups are modified as shown below Magnetic protection for Compact NSX 100 160 250 at 50 Hz and at 16 Hz 2 3 Rating A In at 40 C 16 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 Pick up A Im accur 20 Fixed Adjustable NSX100 50Hz 190 300 400 500 500 500 640 800 16Hz 2 3 170 270 360 450 450 450 580 720 NSX160 250 50Hz 190 300 400 500 500 500 640 800 1250 1250 5to10In 16Hz2 3 170 270 360 450 450 450 580 720 1100 1100 4 5to9In Micrologic 5 A Z trip units mias Y Ir tr isd tsd li xin 125 ee Pel 110 M a225 1 gt a N amp Zi c i A 1 100 250 vn vv v gt 105 sir DB112153 N VA 2B IC LO O CO Micrologic 5 2 A Z and 5 3 A Z are dedicated to 16 Hz 2 3 networks They use a suitable sampling frequency The protection settings are identical to those of Micrologic 5A see page A 19 They also offer a current measurement function for this specific frequency Trip unit selection Rating Compact NSX100 NSX160 NSX250 NSX
145. ation and provides access to all parameters and settings It connects to the Micrologic test connector and can operate in two modes m Stand alone mode to O supply the Micrologic and check operation via the Ready LED O check mechanical operation of the circuit breaker trip using pushbutton m PC mode connected to a PC via USB or Bluetooth link This mode provides access to protection settings alarm settings and readings of all indicators Using the associated RSU software utility it is possible to store in a dedicated file for each device all the data that can transferred to another device This mode also offers operating test functions o check on trip time delay trip curve O check on non tripping time discrimination o check on ZSI Zone Selective Interlocking function o alarm simulation o display of setting curves o display of currents o printing of test reports Schneider version 1 0 ectric PB103579 21 044322 051352 Functions and characteristics There are two ways to add earth leakage protection to any three or four pole Compact NSX100 to 630 circuit breaker equipped with a magnetic thermal magnetic or Micrologic 2 5 or 6 trip unit m by adding a Vigi module to the circuit breaker to form a Vigicompact NSX m by using a Vigirex relay and separate toroids B2 j Separate toroids Earth leakage protection Add on protection against insulation faults using a Vigi module or Vigirex r
146. auxiliaries comply with the following m international recommendations IEC 60947 1 general rules IEC 60947 2 circuit breakers IEC 60947 3 switch disconnectors IEC 60947 4 contactors and motor starters IEC 60947 5 1 and following control circuit devices and switching elements automatic control components m European EN 60947 1 and EN 60947 2 and corresponding national standards France NF Germany VDE United Kingdom BS Australia AS Italy CEI m the specifications of the marine classification companies Veritas Lloyd s Register of Shipping Det Norske Veritas etc standard NF C 79 130 and recommendations issued by the CNOMO organisation for the protection of machine tools For U S UL Canadian CSA Mexican NOM and Japanese JIS standards please consult us Pollution degree Compact NSX circuit breakers are certified for operation in pollution degree III environments as defined by IEC standards 60947 1 and 60664 1 industrial environments Climatic withstand Compact NSX circuit breakers have successfully passed the tests defined by the following standards for extreme atmospheric conditions m IEC 60068 2 1 dry cold 55 C m IEC 60068 2 2 dry heat 85 C m IEC 60068 2 30 damp heat 95 relative humidity at 55 C m IEC 60068 2 52 severity level 2 salt mist Environment Compact NSX respects the European environment directive EC 2002 95 c
147. between many devices Combinations of Normal and Replacement devices All rotary handle Compact NSX100 to 630 circuit breakers and switch disconnectors can be interlocked between each other or with any other device equipped with the same type of keylock Interlocking of two devices on a base plate Interlocking system A base plate designed for two Compact NSX devices can be installed horizontally or vertically on a mounting rail Interlocking is carried out on the base plate by a mechanism located behind the devices In this way access to the device controls and trip units is not blocked Combinations of Normal and Replacement devices All rotary handle and toggle controlled Compact NSX100 to 630 circuit breakers and switch disconnectors can be interlocked Devices must be either all fixed or all plug in versions with or without earth leakage protection or measurement modules An adaptation kit is required to interlock m two plug in devices m a Compact NSX100 250 with an NSX400 630 Connection to the downstream installation can be made easier using a coupling accessory see next page Schneider version 1 0 ectric PB103832 51 DB112197 DB112199 Functions and characteristics 1 Circuit breaker QN equipped with a motor mechanism and auxiliary contacts connected to the Normal source 2 Circuit breaker QR equipped with a motor mechanism and auxiliary contacts connected to the Replacement source
148. by a locking function 2 displayed on the screen and controlled by a microswitch io The lock is activated automatically if the keypad is not used for 5 minutes Access to the microswitch is protected by a transparent lead sealable cover With the cover closed it is still possible to display the various settings and measurements using the keypad Overloads Long time protection Ir Inverse time protection against overloads with an adjustable current pick up Ir set using a dial or the keypad for fine adjustments The time delay tr is set using the keypad Short circuits Short time protection Isd Short circuit protection with an adjustable pick up Isd and adjustable time delay tsd with the possibility of including a portion of an inverse time curve I2t On Short circuits Instantaneous protection li Instantaneous protection with adjustable pick up li Additional ground fault protection lg on Micrologic 6 Residual type ground fault protection with an adjustable pick up Ig with Off position and adjustable time delay tg Possibility of including a portion of an inverse time curve I2t On Neutral protection m On 4 pole circuit breakers this protection can be set via the keypad O Off neutral unprotected o 0 5 neutral protection at half the value of the phase pick up i e 0 5 x Ir o 1 0 neutral fully protected at Ir o OSN Oversized neutral protection at 1 6 times the value of the phase pick up Used when there is a high le
149. c 2 3 M LS protection Rating 3P 3d Micrologic 2 3 M 320A LV432072 Micrologic 2 3 M 500A LV432071 Micrologic 6 3 E M LSIG protection energy meter Rating 3P 3d Micrologic 6 3 E M 320A LV432075 Micrologic 6 3 E M 500A LV432074 Schneider version 2 0 Electric DB111464 DB111464 DB112277 DB112730 DB115665 DB112736 DB112729 Catalogue numbers Trip unit accessories Compact and Vigicompact NSX400 630 Vigi module or insulation monitoring module Vigi module 3P 4P Type MB 200 to 440V _ LV432455 LV432456 440 to 550 V LV432453 LV432454 Connection for a 4P Vigi on a 3P breaker LV432457 Insulation monitoring module 7 3P 4P 200 to 440 VAC LV432659 LV432660 Connection for a 4P insulation monitoring LV432457 module on a 3P breaker Trip unit accessories External neutral CT for 3 pole breaker with Micrologic 5 6 2 400 630 A LV432575 24 V DC wiring accessory for Micrologic 5 6 gt 24 V DC power supply connector LV434210 ZSI accessory for NS630b NW with NSX ZSI module LV434212 External power supply module 24V DC 1A class 4 N 24 30 VDC 54440 48 60 VDC 54441 100 125 VDC 54442 110 130 VAC 54443 200 240 VAC 54444 380 415 VAC 54445 Battery module a 24 V DC battery module 54446 Schneider version 2 0 559E6200 indd Catalogue numbers Installation and connection Compact and Vigicompact NSX400 630 Fixed RC device fixed FC device rear connection kit
150. cess to Vigi module settings Types of seals Protected operations DB112310 Vigi module fixing device m removal of the Vigi module DB112311 Protection cover for settings m modification of settings 559E1880 indd Schneider Electric version 1 0 A 89 PB103593 40 PB103592 40 Functions and characteristics IP55 heavy duty metal enclosure D IP55 heavy duty insulating enclosure DB115609 Accessories and auxiliaries Individual enclosures Individual enclosures are available for Compact Vigicompact NSX devices with two three or four poles All fixed front connections are possible except right angle 45 double L and edgewise terminal extensions All spreaders may be installed in the enclosures intended for Compact Vigicompact NSX250 to 630 devices except the 70 mm spreaders for NSX400 630 Two models of enclosures m IP55 heavy duty metal individual enclosure with o metal enclosure o door with keylock and cut out for rotary handle o extended rotary handle IP56 IK08 black or red yellow o device mounting plate o removable plate without holes for cable entry through bottom m IP55 heavy duty insulating individual enclosure with o polyester insulating enclosure o transparent cover screwed lead sealable with cut out for extended rotary handle o extended rotary handle IP56 IK08 black or red yellow o device mounting plate o 2 removable plates
151. cessed via a menu All user defined alarms are automatically displayed The display mode depends on the priority level selected during alarm set up m high priority a pop up window displays the time stamped description of the alarm and the orange LED flashes m medium priority the orange Alarm LED goes steady on m low priority no display on the screen All faults resulting in a trip automatically produce a high priority alarm without any special settings required In all cases the alarm history is updated If power to the FDM121 fails all information is stored in the Micrologic non volatile memory The data is automatically recovered when power is restored and can be consulted via the communication system Status indications and remote control When the circuit breaker is equipped with the BSCM module page A 27 the FDM121 display can also be used to view circuit breaker status conditions m O F ON OFF m SD trip indication m SDE Fault trip indication overload short circuit ground fault Main characteristics m 96 x 96 x 30 mm screen requiring 10 mm behind the door or 20 mm when the 24 volt power supply connector is used m White backlighting m Wide viewing angle vertical 60 horizontal 30 m High resolution excellent reading of graphic symbols m Alarm LED flashing orange for alarm pick up steady orange after operator reset if alarm condition persists m Operating temperature range 10 C to 55 C
152. ch disconnector unit Compact NSX100NA Rating 1 4P 100 LV429629 LV429639 Compact NSX160NA Rating 3P 4P 160 LV430629 LV430639 Compact NSX250NA Rating 3P 4P 250 Lv431629 Lv431639 559E6100 indd Schneider version 2 0 DB112245 DB112246 DB112247 DB112248 Catalogue numbers Compact NSX100 NSX100F 36 kA 380 415 V NSX100N 50 kA 380 415 V NSX100H 70 kA 380 415 V NSX100S 100 kA 380 415 V NSX100L 150 kA 380 415 V Compact NSX160 NSX160F 36 kA 380 415 V NSX160N 50 kA 380 415 V NSX160H 70 kA 380 415 V NSX160S 100 kA 380 415 V NSX160L 150 kA 380 415 V Compact NSX250 NSX250F 36 kA 380 415 V NSX250N 50 kA 380 415 V NSX250H 70 kA 380 415 V NSX250S 100 kA 380 415 V NSX250L 150 kA 380 415 V Thermal magnetic TM D Rating 3P 3d TM16D LV429037 TM25D LV429036 TM32D LV429035 TM40D LV429034 TM50D LV429033 TM63D LV429032 TM80D LV429031 TM100D LV429030 TM125D LV430431 TM160D LV430430 TM200D LV431431 TM250D LV431430 Micrologic 2 2 LS protection Rating 3P 3d Micrologic 2 2 40A LV429072 Micrologic 2 2 100 A LV429070 Micrologic 2 2 160 A LV430470 Micrologic 2 2 250 A LV431470 Micrologic 5 2 A LSI protection ammeter Rating 3P 3d Micrologic 5 2A40A LV429091 Micrologic 5 2 A 100 A LV429090 Micrologic 5 2 A 160 A LV430490 Micrologic 5 2 A250 A LV431490 Micrologic 5 2 E LSI protection energy meter Rating P 3d Micrologic 5 2 E40 A LV429096 Micrologic 5
153. ch history record is stored with m indications in clear text in a number of user selectable languages m time stamping date and time of event m status pick up drop out Two types of time stamped event tables m Protection settings m Minimeters maximeters Display of alarms and tables The time stamped histories and event tables may be displayed on aPC via the communication system Embedded memory Micrologic A and E have a non volatile memory that saves all data on alarms histories event tables counters and maintenance indicators even if power is lost Maintenance indicators 444444 Micrologic A and E have indicators for among others the number of operating cycles contact wear and operating times operating hours counter ofthe Compact NSX circuit breaker It is possible to assign an alarm to the operating cycle counter to plan maintenance The various indicators can be used together with the trip histories to analyse the level of stresses the device has been subjected to The information provided by the indicators cannot be displayed on the Micrologic LCD It is displayed on the PC via the communication system Management of installed devices Each circuit breaker equipped with a Micrologic 5 or 6 trip unit can be identified via the communication system m serial number m firmware version m hardware version m device name assigned by the user This information together with the previously descr
154. chneider version 1 0 PB103377 Functions and characteristics Micrologic 2 trip units can be used on Compact NSX100 to 630 circuit breakers with performance levels B F H N S L They provide m standard protection of distribution cables m indication of o overloads via LEDs o overload tripping via the SDx relay module Circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic 1 3 M trip units without thermal protection are used in certain applications to replace switch disconnectors at the head of switchboards Micrologic 1 3 M trip units are dedicated to Compact NSX400 630A circuit breakers SDx remote indication relay module with its terminal block Note all the trip units have a transparent lead sealable cover that protects access to the adjustment dials DB112050 DB112051 DB112019 DB112106 Protection of distribution systems Micrologic 2 and 1 3 M trip units Micrologic 2 gt 30A Q gt 90 gt 105 Or Micrologic 2 2 lt Ready lo Ir Isd 1i 3000A 140 189 475 9 9 96 4 3 os 125 200 93 97 3 7 mo 225 92 98 2 8 100 S250 97 15 40 A xlo xir Ir isd Circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic 2 trip units can be used to protect distribution systems supplied by transformers For generators and long cables Micrologic 2 G trip units offer better suited low pick up solutions see page A 50 Protection 000ccccccecccceeeec eee eeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees N
155. condition of the devices following a standardised short circuit test Type 1 coordination m No danger to life or property m The contactor and or the thermal relay may be damaged m Repair and replacement of parts may be required prior to further service Type 2 coordination m No danger to life or property m No damage or adjustments are allowed The risk of contact welding is accepted as long as they can be easily separated m Isolation must be maintained after the incident the motor feeder must be suitable for further use without repair or replacement of parts m Arapid inspection is sufficient before return to service Total coordination m No damage and no risk of contact welding is allowed for the devices making up the motor feeder The motor feeder must be suitable for further use without repair or replacement of parts This level is provided by integrated 1 device solutions such as Tesys U Contactor utilisation categories For a given motor feeder solution the utilisation category determines the contactor withstand capacity in terms of frequency of operation and endurance Selection which depends on the operating conditions imposed by the application may result in oversizing the contactor and circuit breaker protection Standard IEC 60947 defines the following contactor utilisation categories Contactor utilisation categories AC current AC1 Non inductive cos 2 0 8 Energising Heating distributio
156. connection Power connections Compact and Vigicompact NSX100 to 630 fixed version Connection locations 01 DB115442 z DB115443 r Fa gt gt ER 1 11 Z ng ll I ET pa 7 j IF Tara Fa Tt it Type A1 A2 B1 c1 c2 Type A A3 Bi c1 c2 NSX100 160 70 140 35 195 19 5 NSX100 160 Vigi 70 215 35 195 21 5 NSX250 70 140 35 215 19 5 NSX250 Vigi 70 215 35 21 5 21 5 NSX400 630 113 5 227 45 26 26 NSX400 630 Vigi 113 5 327 45 26 26 Front connection without accessories NSX100 to 250 NSX400 630 DB115444 DB115445 DB115446 Bars cables with lugs Connection with accessories Long and short rear connectors NSX100 to 250 Z 43 for short RC Z 88 for long RC 41044 28 6 E t 13 W N DB115447 DB116107 70 6 7 20 NSX400 630 i 50 for short RC Z DB116108 115 for long RC 15 4 213 223 2 F i 30 Y Y a Schneider version 1 0 559E3500 indd Electric DB115450 DB115453 DB115456 DB115458 DB115461 Connection with accessories cont Bare cable connectors NSX100 to 250 DB115451
157. cont Compact and Vigicompact NSX400 630 cont Test tool software demo Test tool Software Pocket battery for Micrologic NSX100 630 Maintenance case Comprising USB maintenance interface Power supply Micrologic cord USB cord RJ45 RJ45 male cord Spare USB maintenance interface Spare power supply 110 240 VAC Spare Micrologic cord for USB maintenance interface Bluetooth Modbus option for USB maintenance interface Configuration and setting software RSU Test software LTU Monitoring software RCU 1 See Telemecanique catalogue 2 Downloadable from http schneider electric com 559E6200 indd version 2 0 Monitoring and control test tools LV434206 TRV00910 TRV00911 TRV00915 TRVv00917 vw3A8114 LV4ST100 LV4ST121 LV4SM100 1 2 2 2 Schneider version 2 0 559E6200 indd ectric Aiessol5 Compact NSX Glossary Contents A 1 B 1 D 1 F 1 Accessories G 2 Circuit breaker characteristics IEC 60947 2 G 2 Communication G 4 Components G 5 Controls G 5 Discrimination Cascading G 6 Environment G 7 Harmonics G 8 Measurements G 8 Protection G 9 Relays and auxiliary contacts G 10 Switchgear G 10 Three phase asynchronous motors and their protection G 11 Trip units G 12 559E7000 indd Schneider version 1 0 Compact NSX Glossary For each major section Accessories
158. contacts can be used respectively to supply an MN undervoltage release before the circuit breaker closes or to open the contactor control circuit before the circuit breaker opens Special functions m Indication of thermal overloads with the SDx module m Early opening of the contactor for overload faults with the SDTAM module m Links with PLCs via the communication system m Measurement of all electrical parameters with Micrologic A and E m Programmable alarms with Micrologic 5 and 6 Installation in enclosures Compact circuit breakers can be installed in a metal enclosure together with other devices contactors motor protection circuit breakers LEDs etc see page A 90 Compliance with North American industrial control equipment standards Compact NSX devices have received UL508 CSA 22 2 no 14 approval for industrial control equipment of the Manual Motor Controller Across the Line Starter General Use and Disconnecting Means types Type NA devices are switch disconnectors that must always be protected upstream UL508 approval Circuit breakers Trip units Approvals Compact NSX100 to 630 TMD Micrologic 2 5 and 6 General Use F N H Motor Disconnecting Means NA MA Micrologic 1 3 M 2 2 M 2 3 M Micrologic 6 2 E M and 6 3 E M Manual Motor Controller Across the Line Starter Motor Disconnecting Means Table of 3 phase motor ratings in hp 1 hp 0 7457 kW VAC ratings 115 230 460 575 T
159. cs are caused by non linear loads A load is said to be non linear when the current drawn does not have the same waveform as the supply voltage Typically loads using power electronics are non linear Examples of non linear loads include computers rectifiers variable speed drives arc furnaces and fluorescent lighting THDI characterises the distortion of the current wave by harmonics It indicates the quantity of harmonics in the resulting waveform It is expressed in percent The higher the THDI the more the current is distorted by harmonics THDI should remain below 10 Above that level there is said to be harmonic pollution that is considered severe when it rises above 50 THDU characterises the distortion of the voltage wave by harmonics It indicates the quantity of harmonics in the resulting waveform It is expressed in percent The higher the THDU the more the system voltage is distorted by harmonics It is advised not to exceed 5 for low voltage systems For each current harmonic IHk there is a voltage harmonic UHk of the same order k where the resulting voltage is the sum of the two waves The voltage wave is therefore distorted with respect to the standard sinusoidal wave Wi cusuvemeniis COU Contact wear gt A 23 Current transformer with gt 10 iron core toroid Each time Compact NSX opens the Micrologic 5 6 trip unit measures the interrupted current and increments the contact wear indicator as a functi
160. ct NSX100 to 630 plug in and withdrawable versions C 24 Vigicompact NSX100 to 630 plug in and withdrawable versions C 25 Visu function for Compact NSX100 to 630 fixed version C 26 Motor mechanism module for Compact and Vigicompact NSX100 to 630 C 27 Direct rotary handle for Compact and Vigicompact NSX100 to 630 C 28 MCC and CNOMO type direct rotary handles for Compact NSX100 to 630 fixed version C 13 Extended rotary handle for Compact NSX100 to 630 C 14 Indication and measurement modules for Compact NSX100 to 630 C 30 FDM121 switchboard display C 17 Power connections Compact and Vigicompact NSX100 to 630 fixed version C 32 Compact and Vigicompact NSX100 to 630 plug in and withdrawable versions C 36 Connection of insulated bars or cables with lugs to Compact and Vigicompact NSX100 to 630 C 40 Connection of bare cables to Compact and Vigicompact NSX100 to 630 C 41 Wiring diagrams D 1 Additional characteristics E 1 Catalogue numbers F 1 Glossary G 1 559E3000 indd Schneider version 1 0 DB112061 DB112065 DB112068 DB112071 Dimensions and connection Dimensions EEE nterphase barriers Short terminal shields Mounting On backplate DB111411 DB112062 Dimensions and mounting Compact NSX100 to 630 fixed version 2 3P 4P DB112063 DB112064 st ss NSX100 to 250 2 3P Long terminal shields also available for
161. cted positions Mounting DB112221 DB112312 Mounting on a backplate Mounting through a front Mounting on rails panel Schneider version 1 0 ectric DB112168 DB112172 DB112175 DB112181 Functions and characteristics Fixed circuit breakers are designed for standard front connection using bars or cables with lugs Cable connectors are available for bare cables Rear connection is also possible A Straight terminal extensions Edgewise terminal extensions DB112173 DB112176 DB112169 DB112170 5 Insulated bar Small lug for copper cables DB112171 j Small lug for Al cables er Right angle terminal extensions Double L terminal extensions DB112179 back ofa switchboard DB112174 DB112177 Mounting at the Ae Ir Bb a 45 terminal extensions Spreaders DB112180 Mounting behind the front panel with a raiser Schneider Electric Accessories and auxiliaries Connection of fixed devices Front connection Bars or cables with lugs Standard terminals Compact NSX100 to 630 come with terminals comprising snap in nuts with screws m Compact NSX100 M6 nuts and screws Compact NSX160 250 M8 nuts and screws m Compact NSX400 630 M10 nuts and screws These terminals may be used for m direct connection of insulated bars or cables with lugs m terminal extensions offering a wide range of connection pos
162. ction functions reduces the difference in ratings required for total discrimination Please refer to supplementary technical catalogue Unmatched discrimination Discrimination Compact NSX provides maximum continuity of service and savings through an unmatched level of discrimination m given the high accuracy of measurements overload discrimination is ensured even between very close ratings m for major faults the fast processing of the Micrologic trip units means the upstream device can anticipate the reaction of the downstream device The upstream breaker adjusts its tripping delay to provide discrimination m for very high faults the energy of the arc dissipated by the short circuit in the downstream breaker causes reflex tripping The current seen by the upstream device is significantly limited The energy is not sufficient to cause tripping so discrimination is maintained whatever the short circuit current For total discrimination over the entire range of possible faults from the long time pick up Ir to the ultimate short circuit current Icu a ratio of 2 5 must be maintained between the ratings of the upstream and downstream devices This ratio is required to ensure selective reflex tripping for high short circuits Understanding the names of Micrologic electronic trip units 1 1 2 NSX100 160 250 A Ammeter Distribution otherwise 2 LSol 3 8 G Generator 5 LSI M Motors a A vu wa won E 6 LSIG
163. cy It helps get more return from 4 ste ps investments and future design solutions gt Diagnostics gt Proposals gt Implementation Energy performance gt Follow up contracts An energy performance contract offers innovative service to modernise technical installations The objective is dramatically to reduce energy costs whilst improving comfort and safety all in an environmentally responsible way Environmentally responsible Schneider Electric meets the expectations of its markets with products adapted to the practices of the 190 countries where it is present and strongly commits to respect the norms and directives of each of those countries e Compact NSX like all the products in its LV ranges is a product designed to comply with all European directives for the environment It has also received international certifications and approval from independent agencies e In compliance with ISO 14001 standards all of its factories are nonpolluting e Designed for easy disassembly and recycling at end of life Compact NSX complies with environmental directives RoHS and WEEE RoHS Restriction of Hazardous Substances WEEE Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment UOlIJEOIUNWILWOD pue J USWSANSEAW UONI9JOJA Compact NSX Functions and characteristics Introduction Overview of applications A 2 General characteristics of the Compact NSX range A 4 Charac
164. d characteristics With Micrologic electronic trip units Compact NSX stands out from the crowd Thanks to the new generation of sensors and its processing capability protection is enhanced even further It also provides measurements and operating information Introduction Compact NSX trip units Thermal magnetic or electronic trip unit Thermal magnetic trip units protect against overcurrents and short circuits using tried and true techniques But today installation optimisation and energy efficiency have become decisive factors and electronic trip units offering more advanced protection functions combined with measurements are better suited to these needs Micrologic electronic trip units combine reflex tripping and intelligent operation Thanks to digital electronics trip units have become faster as well as more accurate and reliable Wide setting ranges make installation upgrades easier Designed with processing capabilities Micrologic trip units can provide measurement information and device operating assistance With this information users can avoid or deal more effectively with disturbances and can play a more active role in system operation They can manage the installation anticipate on events and plan any necessary servicing Accurate measurements for complete protection Compact NSX devices take advantage of the vast experience acquired since the launch of Masterpact NW circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic trip units
165. d for USB maintenance interface Bluetooth Modbus option for USB maintenance interface Configuration and setting software RSU Test software LTU Monitoring software RCU 1 See Telemecanique catalogue 2 Downloadable from http schneider electric com bnelder version 2 0 Lv434206 TRV00910 TRV00911 TRV00915 TRV00917 vw3A8114 LV4ST100 LV4ST121 LV4SM100 1 2 2 2 559E6100 indd Compact NSX Compact NSX400 to 630 Contents NSX400 630N complete fixed FC device F 30 Compact NSX400 630N 50 kA 380 415 V F 30 NSX400 630H complete fixed FC device F 31 Compact NSX400 630H 70 kA 380 415 V F 31 NSX400 630NA complete fixed FC device F 32 Compact NSX400 630NA F 32 NSX400 630N H S L fixed FC device based on separate components F 33 Compact and Vigicompact F 33 Trip unit accessories F 34 Compact and Vigicompact NSX400 630 F 34 Installation and connection F 35 Compact and Vigicompact NSX400 630 F 35 Accessories F 37 Compact and Vigicompact NSX400 630 F 37 Monitoring and control test tools F 46 Compact and Vigicompact NSX400 630 F 46 559E6200TDM indd Schneider version 2 0 Catalogue numbers NSX400 630N complete fixed FC device Compact NSX400 630N 50 kA 380 415 V Compact NSX400 630N Electronic trip unit Micrologic 2 3 LS protection 3 3P 3d 4P 3d 4d 3d N 2 5 Compact NSX400N 50 kA at 380 415 V 250A LV432707 LV432708 a 400A LV432693 LV432694 Compac
166. dancy check SDTAM gt A 81 Relay module with two static outputs specifically for the motor protection Micrologic trip units 1 M 2 M and 6 E M An output linked to the contactor controller opens the contactor when an overload or other motor fault occurs thus avoiding opening of the circuit breaker The other output stores the opening event in memory SDx gt A 81 Relay module with two outputs that remotes the trip or alarm conditions of Compact NSX circuit breakers equipped with a Micrologic electronic trip unit Static output gt A 81 Output of a relay made up of a thyristor or triac electronic component The low switching capability means that a power relay is required This is the case for the SDx and SDTAM outputs ULP Universal Logic Plug gt A 31 Connection system used by Compact NSX to communicate information to the Modbus interface via a simple RJ45 cable Compatible modules are indicated by the 2 symbol opposite Cantani ee ee ee eee eee ASIC Application Specific gt A 8 Integrated circuit designed built and intended for a specific application It carries out Integrated Circuit repetitive sequences of instructions engraved in the silicon chip For that reason it is extremely reliable because it cannot be modified and is not affected by environment conditions Micrologic trip units use an ASIC for the protection functions The ASIC cyclically polls the network status at a high frequency using the values supplied by
167. dd Schneider version 1 0 PB103365 DB111404 DB111403 Functions and Motor protection characteristics Micrologic 6 E M electronic trip units cont Micrologic 6 E M provides Power Meter Power Meter functions functions with energy metering With the The built in Power Meter functions of the Micrologic 6 E M are the same as those for FDM121 display unit all metering data and the Micrologic 6 E presented in the section on distribution see page A 20 When REN J f used exclusively in the three phase version neutral measurements are excluded operating indicators are available on the switchboard front panel This version also Operating assistance functions displays the thermal image of the motor The operating assistance functions of the Micrologic 6 E M are the same as those for the Micrologic 6 E presented in the section on distribution see page A 22 Special functions for motor feeders Additional operating functions specifically for motor feeders are available Phase sequence The order in which the phases L1 L2 L3 are connected determines the direction of motor rotation If two phases are inverted the direction is reversed Information on the direction of rotation is provided It can be linked to an alarm to detect an inversion in the direction following servicing on the supply under de energised conditions and disable restarting Thermal image of the rotor and stator Micrologic 6 E M offers a thermal image function Ta
168. dding a kit to the standard handle In addition to the standard functions the kit offers the characteristics listed below Enhanced waterproofness and mechanical protection m Degree of protection IP54 IK08 m Compliance with CNOMO E03 81 501N Extended rotary handle Degree of protection IP56 IK08 The extended rotary handle makes it possible to operate circuit breakers installed at the back of switchboards from the switchboard front It maintains m visibility of and access to trip unit settings Compact NSX with a CNOMO machine tool rotary handle m suitability for isolation m indication of the three positions O OFF ON and tripped Mechanical door locking when device closed Astandard feature of the extended rotary handle is a locking function built into the shaft that disables door opening when the circuit breaker is in the ON or tripped positions Door locking can be temporarily disabled with a tool to open the door without opening the circuit breaker This operation is not possible if the handle is locked by a padlock Voluntary disabling of mechanical door locking A modification to the handle that can be carried out on site completely disables door locking including when a padlock is installed on the handle The modification is reversible When a number of extended rotary handles are installed on a door this disabling function is the means to ensure door locking by a single device Compact NSX with an e
169. dules Compliance with standards m IEC 60947 2 annex B m Decree dated 14 November 1988 for France m IEC 60755 class A immunity to DC components up to 6 mA m operation down to 25 C as per VDE 664 Remote indications Vigi modules may be equipped with an auxiliary contact SDV to remotely signal tripping due to an earth fault Use of 4 pole Vigi module with a 3 pole Compact NSX In a 3 phase installation with an uninterrupted neutral an accessory makes it possible to use a 4 pole Vigi module with connection of the neutral cable Power supply Vigi modules are self supplied internally by the distribution system voltage and therefore do not require any external source They continue to function even when supplied by only two phases Vigi module selection Number of poles NSX100 NXS160 NSX250 NSX400 NSX630 Sensitivity adjustable adjustable lAn A 0 3 0 03 0 3 1 3 10 0 3 1 3 10 30 Time delay fixed adjustable adjustable Intentional delay lt 40 0 60 2 150 2 310 2 0 60 150 310 ms Max break time lt 40 lt 40 lt 140 lt 300 lt 800 lt 40 lt 140 lt 300 lt 800 ms Rated voltage VAC 50 60 Hz 1 Vigi 3P modules may also be used on 3P circuit breakers used for two phase protection 2 If the sensitivity is set to 30 mA there is no time delay whatever the time delay setting 200 440 200 440 440 550 200 440 440
170. e Value of prospective making current that a switching device is capable of making at a stated voltage under prescribed conditions of use and behaviour Reference is generally made to the short circuit making capacity Icm Maximum time after which breaking is effective i e the contacts separated and the current completely interrupted With respect to its resistance to mechanical wear equipment is characterised by the number of no load operating cycles which can be effected before it becomes necessary to service or replace any mechanical parts This is the minimum time during which the protective device does not operate in spite of pick up overrun if the duration of the overrun does not exceed the corresponding voluntary time delay Conventional number based on the amount of conductive or hygroscopic dust ionized gas or salt and on the relative humidity and its frequency of occurrence resulting in hygroscopic absorption or condensation of moisture leading to reduction in dielectric strength and or surface resistivity Standard IEC 60947 1 distinguishes four pollution degrees m Degree 1 No pollution or only dry non conductive pollution occurs m Degree 2 Normally only non conductive pollution occurs Occasionally however a temporary conductivity caused by condensation may be expected m Degree 3 Conductive pollution occurs or dry non conductive pollution occurs which becomes conductive due to condensation m Degree 4 The p
171. e M 2 3P 4P Front connection an insulating screen is supplied with the base and must be fitted between the base and the backplate gt F1 DB112654 DB112655 DB112656 406 Connection by exterior mounted rear connectors DB112657 DB112658 E14 E16 By I E13 206 ome 1 The T1 holes are required for rear connection only for two pole circuit breakers the middle holes are not required DB112659 486 Connection by interior mounted rear connectors DB112660 DB112661 1 The T1 holes are required for rear connection only for two pole circuit breakers the middle holes are not required On rails 2 3P DB112663 DB112664 aa Type A A A2 M0 AM B BB B2 co DM 9 NSX100 160 250 80 5 161 94 15 210 525 105 140 126 75 95 NSX400 630 127 5 255 1425 244 281 70 140 185 168 100 150 Type E16 E17 E18 E19 E20 F F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 NSX100 160 250 158 61 122 375 75 35 17 5 70 54 5 109 144 NSX400 630 252 101 202 75 150 45 225 90 71 5 143 188 E10 190 300 F7 70 100 DB112665 DB112662 486 1 4P _ F8 re En H ur fe re DOREEN DE TAB RL 486 Ly E11 E12 E13 E14 87 174 775 155 137 274 125 250 F8 F9 aT1 U 105 35 24 32 145 50 33 35 E15 79 126 559E3100 indd Schneider version 1 0 DB112644 DB112651 Dimensions and Dimensio
172. e automatic auxiliary connectors are required DB115610 Connector 1 Connector 2 Connector 3 Compact NSX400 630 Schneider version 1 0 559E1860 indd Electric Withdrawable Compact NSX Manual auxiliary connectors As an option to the automatic auxiliary connectors withdrawable circuit breakers may be equipped with one to three plugs with nine wires each In disconnected position the auxiliaries remain connected A They can then be tested by operating the device ui Nine wire manual auxiliary connector DB111379 a Connector 1 DB115602 Connector 2 Compact NSX100 160 250 Connector 1 DB115611 Connector 2 Connector 3 Each auxiliary is equipped with a terminal block with numbered terminals for connection of wires up to m 1 5 mm for auxiliary contacts and voltage releases m 2 5 mm for the motor mechanism module Vv Circuit breaker Connector 1 Connector 2 Connector 3 OF1 oF SDx OF2 SDV ZSI OF3 MN MX SDTAM SDE OF4 onen NSX cord ZSI in MT ZSI out MTc 24 V DC NSX100 160 250 a NSX400 630 1 Only for NSX100 to 250 MT motor mechanism MTe communicating motor mechanism Compact NSX400 630 559E1860 indd Schneider version 1 0 044314 200000 Functions and characteristics One contact model provides circuit breaker status indications OF SD SDE SDV An early make or early break
173. e cables Set of three 3P device or four 4P flat conducting parts made of aluminium They are screwed to the circuit breaker terminals to increase the pitch between poles C rout brenker characteristics IEC 60947 2 cccccccoscsscscsscscsscscsscsccscscsscecs Breaking capacity gt A 6 Degree of protection IP gt A 5 IEC 60529 Degree of protection against A 6 external mechanical impacts IK Durability gt A 6 Electrical durability gt A 6 IEC 60947 1 Value of prospective current that a switching device is capable of breaking at a stated voltage under prescribed conditions of use and behaviour Reference is generally made to the ultimate breaking capacity Icu and the service breaking capacity Ics Defines device protection against the penetration of solid objects and liquids using two digits specified in standard IEC 60259 Each digit corresponds to a level of protection where 0 indicates no protection m First digit 0 to 6 protection against penetration of solid foreign objects 1 corresponds to protection against objects with a diameter gt 50 mm 6 corresponds to total protection against dust m Second digit 0 to 8 protection against penetration of liquids water 1 corresponds to protection against falling drops of water condensation 8 corresponds to continuous immersion The enclosure of Compact NSX circuit breakers provides a minimum of IP40 protection against objects gt 1 mm and can
174. e locking using a keylock A 88 Fixed device attached to the case DB111358 DB111360 DB111362 Accessories and auxiliaries Locks Locking in the OFF position guarantees isolation as per IEC 60947 2 Padlocking systems can receive up to three padlocks with shackle diameters ranging from 5 to 8 mm padlocks not supplied Certain locking systems require an additional accessory Toggle Lock in OFF position Padlock Removable device Lock in OFF or ON Padlock Fixed device position Direct rotary Standard Lock in Padlock handle m OFF position Keylock Locking device keylock m OFF or ON position 1 MCC Lock in Padlock m OFF position m OFF or ON position 1 CNOMO Lock in Padlock m OFF position m OFF or ON position Extended rotary handle Lock in Padlock m OFF position m OFF or ON position 1 with door opening prevented 2 Lock in OFF position Padlock UL508 control accessory m OFF or ON position Keylock Locking device keylock inside the switchboard Motor Lock in OFF position Padlock mechanism remote operation Keylock Locking device keylock disabled Withdrawable circuit Lock in Padlock breaker m disconnected position Keylock Locking device keylock m connected position Keylock Locking device keylock 1 Following a simple modification of the mechanism 2 Unless door locking has been voluntarily d
175. e successfully passed the electromagnetic compatibility tests EMC defined by the following international standards See page A 5 These tests ensure that m no nuisance tripping occurs E tripping times are respected Schneider version 1 0 559E2100 indd ectric DB111383 Installation in switchboards Power supply and weights Power supply from the top or bottom Compact NSX circuit breakers can be supplied from either the top or the bottom even when equipped with a Vigi earth leakage protection module without any reduction in performance This capability facilitates connection when installed ina switchboard All connection and insulation accessories can be used on circuit breakers supplied either from the top or bottom Weight The table below presents the weights in kg of the circuit breakers and the main accessories which must be summed to obtain the total weight of complete configurations The values are valid for all performance categories NSX100 3P 2D 1 79 0 8 2 2 0 87 2 1 2 3P 3D 2 05 0 8 2 2 0 87 2 1 2 4P 4D 2 4 1 05 2 2 1 13 2 2 1 2 NSX160 3P 2D 1 85 0 8 2 2 0 87 2 1 2 3P 3D 2 2 0 8 2 2 0 87 2 1 2 4P 4D 2 58 1 05 22 1 13 2 2 1 2 NSX250 3P 2D 1 94 0 8 2 2 0 87 2 1 2 3P 3D 2 4 0 8 2 2 0 87 2 1 2 4P 4D 2 78 1 05 2 2 1 13 2 2 1 2 NSX400 630 3P 3D 6 19 2 4 2 2 2 8 4 6 2 8 4P 4D 8 13 2 8 2 2 3 4 9 2 8 559E2100 indd Schneider version 1 0 ectric Installation recommendat
176. ection against short circuits overloads phase unbalance and loss gt also enables set up of additional protection systems for starting and braking with the motor running reverse braking jogging or reversing in complete safety gt add a Schneider Electric contactor Compact NSX complies with the requirements of so called type 2 coordination The trip units are now true circuit breaker control systems L 150kA S 100kA H 70kA N 50kA F 36kA Breaking performance at 415 V NSX 100 NSX 160 NSX250 NSX400 NSX 630 Reduced installation costs Optimising installations allows for achieving up to 30 savings gt considerable savings at the time of installation thanks to total discrimination with miniature circuit breakers gt smaller devices more economic switchboards mean best overall installation cost without overcalibration NSX250 With the integration of electronics trip units have gained in speed and accuracy NSX100 Greater reliability and better discrimination allows more refined settings especially for time delays Compact NSX 100 630A Monitoring and management Compact NSX is a single device which contains a monitoring unit to control energy consumption and power Integrated monitoring 10 gt The new Compact NSX range incorporates Pr Monitoring consumption Micrologic electronic trip units in the circuit can reduce energy costs breaker offer
177. ed to be assigned to other types of tripping or alarm see page A 81 Schneider version 1 0 ectric DB115580 Functions and Switch disconnectors characteristics Overview of applications A switch disconnector is a control device Position of switch disconnectors that can be used to open and close a circuit Compact NSX switch disconnectors are used primarily for the following applications under normal operating conditions busbar coupling and isolation itis suitable fer ieclaiion oe indicatedion the isolation of industrial distribution boards and industrial control panels isolation of subdistribution boards for modular devices front by the symbol a isolation of local enclosures isolation of final distribution enclosures for commercial applications industrial control panel switch disconnectors Source coupling switch disconnector Replacement source Main power distribution board for commercial applications Main power distribution board for industrial applications lt 1600 A 20 80 kA Subdistribution board for modular products Industrial distribution board 160A 15 25kA lt 400 A 20 80 kA Z lt 400A Final distribution Local enclosure for Local isolation commercial isolation Industrial control enclosure applications enclosure panel lt 63A lt 630 A lt 10 KA N B Adjacent to or built into the machine Building utilities Building final distribution Continuo
178. elay Circuit breaker with add on Vigi module Vigicompact NSX m For general characteristics of circuit breakers see pages A 6 and A 7 m Add on Vigi modules Earth leakage protection is achieved by installing a Vigi module characteristics and selection criteria on next page directly on the circuit breaker terminals It directly actuates the trip unit magnetic thermal magnetic or Micrologic Circuit breaker combined with a Vigirex relay Compact NSX circuit breaker Vigirex relay Vigirex relays may be used to add external earth leakage protection to Compact NSX circuit breakers The circuit breakers must be equipped with an MN or MX voltage release The Vigirex relays add special tripping thresholds and time delays for earth leakage protection Vigirex relays are very useful when faced with major installation constraints circuit breaker already installed and connected limited space available etc Vigirex relay characteristics m Sensitivity adjustable from 30 mA to 250 mA and 9 time delay settings 0 to 4 5 seconds m Closed toroids up to 630 A 30 to 300 mm in diameter split toroids up to 250 A 46 to 110 mm in diameter or rectangular sensors up to 630 A m 50 60 Hz 400 Hz distribution systems Options m Trip indication by a fail safe contact m Pre alarm contact and LED etc Compliance with standards m IEC 60947 2 annex M m IEC EN 60755 general requirements for residual current operated protective devices
179. ergy availability and improved installation management Compact NSX 100 630A Safety and performance Compactness discrimination and modularity new Compact NSX circuit breakers incorporate advanced monitoring and communication functions from 40 amps up combined with impeccable protection Expert technology 23 A roto active contact breaking principle provides Wi each circuit breaker with very high breaking capacity in a very small device remarkable fault current limitation performance and endurance gt Compact NSX benefits from a patented double roto active contact breaking concept together with a reflex tripping system T for ultimate breaking ec 4 new patents a pending confirm the innovative character of Compact NSX gt Exceptional fault current limitation guarantees robust reliable protection and above all reduces the causes of component aging thus extending service life for installations New breaking capacities New performance levels for Compact NSX improve application targeting gt 36 50 kA standard applications industrial plants buildings and hospitals gt 70 100 kA high performance at controlled cost gt 150 kA demanding applications maritime Enhanced protection for motors Compact NSX meets the requirements of IEC 60947 4 1 standards for protection of motors gt well adapted to motor starting solutions up to 315 kW at 400 V providing prot
180. ermal stress less than 6x10 A s curve page E 14 Cable protection is therefore ensured up to the limit of the breaking capacity of the circuit breaker 559E5100 indd Schneider version 1 0 DB116369 DB116371 Additional characteristics Current and energy limiting curves Current limiting curves Voltage 400 440 V AC Voltage 660 690 V AC Limited short circuit current kA peak Limited short circuit current kA peak 300 300 DB116370 200 200 146 146 100 100 80 80 70 70 2 L NSX630 a NSX400 L kA 40 B kA 40 NSX630 30 NSX250 30 NSX400 NSX100 NSX160 20 20 NSX250 NSX100 i NSX160 10 10 8 8 7 t 7 6 6 5 l 5 4 4 2 3 4 6 10 20 30 4050 70 100 200 300 2 3 4 6 10 20 30 40 o 100 200 300 acA rms a kA rS Energy limiting curves Voltage 400 440 V AC Voltage 660 690 V AC Limited energy Limited energy 10 m 3 10 5 j 5 3 un E 2 2 1 41 1 41 10 10 5 5 3 3 2 2 i ji 107 107 2 5 L 2 5 De As NSX630 As 3 FEE NSX400 3 z 1 NSX400 2 EEE 2H PEE 6 i H a 10 SEE nsx2so 19 i 7 NSX100 NSX100 5 F NSX160 5 NSX160 3 iie 3 5 5 2 3 4 6 10 20 30 4050 70 100 150200 300 2 3 4 6 10 20 30 4050 70 100 150200 300 2 i kA rms gt I kA rms _ Schneider version 1 0 559E5100 indd ectric 559E5100 indd Schneider version 1 0 Catalogue numbers Compact NSX Catalogue numbers Contents Functions and characteristics
181. ers to ensure that the installed equipment base operates correctly to optimize settings and to maximise energy efficiency gt Local and remote displays offer easy access to operators and provide the main electrical values U V f energy power total harmonic distortion etc The user friendly switchboard display unit with intuitive navigation is more comfortable to read and offers quick access to information Performance yet unimposing Compact NSX perfectly blends into its environment Attractively designed The front of Compact NSX circuit breakers has an attractive curved profile Measurements are easy to read on a backlit LCD display Screen navigation is intuitive and settings are simplified by immediate readouts in amps 10 Compact NSX 100 630A Service continuity Compact NSX makes discrimination its main advantage in minimising the impact of short circuits ensuring service continuity for installations Total discrimination 1 Thanks to its 30 years of experience Schneider Electric with Compact NSX re offers perfect mastery of discrimination 100 for ever more reliable service continuity Compact NSX circuit breakers strongly limit fault currents occurring as the result of short circuits which reduces installation downtime and avoids over dimensioning cables k When several circuit breakers are used in series the downstream circuit breaker trips as close as
182. es connected to the internal bus and FDM121 internal settings language contrast etc hs ee version 1 0 DB112060 Functions and Compact NSX communication characteristics Communications modules All Compact NSX devices can be equipped Four functional levels with the communication function via a The Compact NSX can be integrated in a Modbus communication environment Four prewired connection system and a Modbus functional levels can be used separately or combined network interface Communication of status indications This level is compatible with all Compact NSX circuit breakers whatever the trip unit The interface can be connected directly or and with all switch disconnectors Using the BSCM module the following information via the FDM121 switchboard display unit is accessible Four functional levels can be combined to m ON OFF position O F Bak m trip indication SD adapt to all supervision requirements m fault trip indication SDE Communication of commands Also available on all circuit breakers and switch disconnectors this level communicating remote control can be used to m open m close m reset Communication of measurements with Micrologic 5 6 A or E This level provides access to all available information m instantaneous and demand values m maximeters minimeters m energy metering m demand current and power m power quality Communication of operating assistance with Micrologic 5 6 A or E m
183. et of devices for motor protection and control as well as for protection of the feeder itself Isolation The purpose is to isolate the live conductors from the upstream distribution system to enable work by maintenance personnel on the motor feeder at no risk This function is provided by a motor circuit breaker offering positive contact indication and lockout tagout possibilities Switching The purpose is to control the motor ON OFF either manually automatically or remotely taking into account overloads upon start up and the long service life required This function is provided by a contactor When the coil of the contactor s electromagnet is energised the contactor closes and establishes through the poles the circuit between the upstream supply and the motor via the circuit breaker Basic protection m Short circuit protection Detection and breaking as quickly as possible of high short circuit currents to avoid damage to the installation This function is provided by a magnetic or thermal magnetic circuit breaker m Overload protection Detection of overload currents and motor shutdown before temperature rise in the motor and conductors damages insulation This function is provided by a thermal magnetic circuit breaker or a separate thermal relay Overloads I lt 10x In They are caused by m an electrical problem related to an anomaly in the distribution system e g phase failure voltage outside tolerances etc
184. f two devices with rotary handles Interlocking system Interlocking involves padlocking the rotary handles on two devices which may be either circuit breakers or switch disconnectors Authorised positions m one device closed ON the other open OFF m both devices open OFF The system is locked using up to three padlocks shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm There are two interlocking system models m one for Compact NSX100 to 250 m one for Compact NS400 630 Combinations of Normal and Replacement devices All rotary handle fixed or plug in Compact NSX100 to 630 circuit breakers and switch disconnectors of the same frame size can be interlocked The devices must be either all fixed or all plug in versions Interlocking of anumber of devices using keylocks captive keys Interlocking using keylocks is very simple and makes it possible to interlock two or more devices that are physically distant or that have very different characteristics for example medium voltage and low voltage devices or a Compact NSX100 to 630 circuit breaker and switch disconnector Interlocking system Each device is equipped with an identical keylock and the key is captive on the closed ON device A single key is available for all devices It is necessary to first open OFF position the device with the key before the key can be withdrawn and used to close another device Asystem of wall mounted captive key boxes makes a large number of combinations possible
185. fault signal KA1 auxiliary relay e g Merlin Gerin RDN or RTBT relay KM1 motor contactor Q circuit breaker 559E4100 indd Schneider version 1 0 Compact NSX Additional characteristics Contents Functions and characteristics A 1 Installation recommendations B 1 Dimensions and connection C 1 Wiring diagrams D 1 Tripping curves Compact NSX100 to 250 protection of distribution systems E 2 Compact NSX100 to 250 motor protection E 6 Compact NSX400 to 630 protection of distribution systems E 8 Compact NSX400 to 630 motor protection E 10 Compact NSX100 to 630 reflex tripping E 12 Current and energy limiting curves Catalogue numbers F Glossary G 559E5000 indd Schneider version 1 0 DB114759 DB114761 Additional characteristics Tripping curves Compact NSX100 to 250 Protection of distribution systems TM magnetic trip units TM16D TM16G TM25D TM25G 10 000 2 410000 5 000 5000 2 000 2 000 1 000 1 000 500 500 200 200 100 100 50 50 20 20 10 10 5 5 t s t s 2 2 i TM16D Im 12x In i TM25D Im 12x In 5 5 2 2 3 TM16G Im 4x In i 05 05 02 02 01 gt t lt 10 ms 01 gt 005 005 002 002 001 001 571 2 345 7 10 20 30 5070100 200300 571 2 345 7 10 20 30 5070100 200300 ir eir Reflex tripping TM32D TM40D TM40G TM50D TM63D TM63G 10 000 8 410 000 5 000 5000 2 000 2 000 1 000 1 000 500 500 200 200 100 100 50 50 20 20 10 10 5 5
186. fications device opening and closing commands etc There is a built in test function to check the connections of the Modbus interface module with the Micrologic and FDM121 display unit Mounting The module is mounted on a DIN rail A number of modules may be clipped one next to the other For this a stacking accessory is available for fast clip connection of both the Modbus link and the 24 V DC supply The Modbus interface module supplies 24 V DC to the corresponding Micrologic FDM121 display and BSCM module Module consumption is 60 mA 24 V DC 1 Five point Modbus and 24 V DC connector 2 Two Modbus address dials 1 to 99 3 Modbus traffic LED 4 Lock out to disable writing to the NSX 5 Test LED 6 Test button 7 Two connectors for RJ45 cable Mounting with stacking accessory 559E1300 indd DB112083 Modbus interface module DB112085 Schneider Electric BSCM module Functions The optional BSCM Breaker Status amp Control Module is used to acquire device status indications and control the communicating remote control function It includes a memory used to manage the maintenance indicators Status indications Indication of device status O F SD and SDE Maintenance indicators The BSCM module manages the following indicators m mechanical operation counter m electrical operation counter m history of status indications It is possible to assign an alarm to the operation counters
187. function A patented dual adjustment system for protection functions Available on Micrologic 5 6 the system consists of m a first adjustment under de energised conditions and using a dial sets the maximum value m a second adjustment made via the keypad or remotely fine tunes the setting The second setting may not exceed the first It can be read directly on the Micrologic screen to within one ampere and a fraction of a second Coordinated tripping systems Compact NSX detects faults even faster and its tripping time is reduced It protects the installation better and limits contact wear E g NSX100F Ir Isd li Reflex threshold Icu Currents 100A L 1000 A 1500A 2400 A 36000 A Time delay 1 200s Protection Overload function Slow trip inversely S or So _ proportional to 20 500m the current level Short time Impedant short circuit instantaneous trip with 10 50ms l adjustable S or fixed Instantaneous So time delay 1 This tripping system is completely independent of the trip unit Ultra fast detection with micro delay O gt for discrimination Reflex Energy based ultra fast detection with major current limiting Because it directly actuates the mechanism it precedes the trip unit by a few milliseconds Schneider version 1 0 559E1100 indd Electric DB111354 NSX250 NSX100 Multi 9 Compact NSX100 with Micrologic for total discrimination Better coordination between prote
188. g ferrules Connection to NSX400 and 630 Ne 1 cable connector DB112316 DB111326 2 cable connector 1 cable connector 2 cable connector B L mm 30 30 or 60 5 S mm Cu Al 35 to 300 rigid 2x35 to 2 x 240 rigid 240 max flex 240 max flex L Torque Nm 31 31 A Os Conductor materials and electrodynamic stresses Compact NSX circuit breakers can be connected indifferently with bare copper tinned copper and tinned aluminium conductors flexible or rigid bars cables In the event of a short circuit thermal and electrodynamic stresses will be exerted on the conductors They must therefore be correctly sized and held in place by supports Electrical connection points on switchgear devices switch disconnectors contactors circuit breakers etc should not be used for mechanical support Any partition between upstream and downstream connections of the device must be made of non magnetic material bnelder version 1 0 Compact NSX Wiring diagrams Contents Functions and characteristics A 1 Installation recommendations B 1 Dimensions and connection C 1 Compact NSX100 to 630 Fixed circuit breakers D 2 Plug in withdrawable circuit breakers D 4 Motor mechanism D 6 SDx module with Micrologic D 8 SDTAM module with Micrologic M D 9 Additional characteristics E 1 Catalogue numbers F 1 Glossary G 1 559E4000 indd Schneider version 1 0 Wiring diagrams Compact NSX100 to 630 Fixed circu
189. gn an alarm to all Micrologic A or E measurements or events m up to 12 alarms can be used together two alarms are predefined and activated automatically Micrologic 5 overload Ir Micrologic 6 overload Ir and ground fault Ig thresholds priorities and time delays can be set for ten other alarms m the same measurement can be used for different alarms to precisely monitor certain values e g the frequency or the voltage m alarms can also be assigned to various states phase lead lag four quadrants phase sequence m selection of display priorities with pop up possibility m alarm time stamping Alarm settings Alarms cannot be set via the keypad or the FDM121 display unit They are set via communication with the PC Set up includes the threshold priority activation delay before display and deactivation delay It is also possible to reprogram the standard assignment for the two SDx relay outputs to user selected alarms Alarm reading Remote alarm indications m reading on FDM121 display unit or on PC via the communication system m remote indications via SDx relay with two output contacts for alarms Histories and event tables cccccccccceceeeeeees Micrologic A and E have histories and event tables that are always active Three types of time stamped histories m Tripping due to overruns of Ir Isd li Ig last 17 trips m Alarms last 10 alarms m Operating events last 10 events Ea
190. gs The plug in base is equipped with terminals which depending on their orientation serve for front and rear connection For rear connection ofa base mounted on a backplate the terminals must be replaced by insulated long right angle terminal extensions For Compact NSX630 devices connection most often requires the 52 5 or 70 mm pitch spreaders DB111338 DB111339 Front connection Front connection with Rear connection ofa base spreaders mounted on a backplate Connection accessories All accessories for fixed devices bars lugs terminal extensions and spreaders may be used with the plug in base see pages A 70 A 71 Bare cables All terminals may be equipped with bare cable connectors See the Connection of fixed devices section DB111341 E A Px With a 100 to 250A base With a 400 630 A base Adapter for plug in base The adapter is a plastic component for the 100 to 250 base and the 400 630 base that enables use of all the connection accessories of the fixed device It is required for interphase barriers and the long and short terminal shields DB111343 Adapter for 100 to 250A 3P Adapter for 400 630 A 4P base base Connection with spreaders and interphase Connection with bars or barriers cables with lugs Schneider version 1 0 559E1840 indd Electric DB111347 DB111349 DB111355 DB 111356 DB111357 Terminal shields are identical fo
191. gt le See Compact NSX100 to 630 plug in version page C 4 or withdrawable version page C 6 On backplate M See Compact NSX100 to 630 plug in version page C 5 or withdrawable version page C 7 On rails See Compact NSX100 to 630 plug in version page C 5 or withdrawable version page C 7 Type A A2 A5 AG NSX100 160 250 80 5 94 155 5 236 NSX400 630 127 5 142 5 227 5 355 A7 A10 169 175 242 5 244 A11 B B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 210 52 5 105 140 925 185 216 281 70 140 185 110 220 250 DB 112673 4P B6 220 265 Adapter for base required to mount long terminal shields or interphase barriers B7 c3 D1 251 126 75 295 168 100 Schneider version 1 0 559E3100 indd Electric Visu function for Compact NSX100 to 250 fixed version Te N e i gt S Qa i y lt z c e Q E fo oO 1 wn i 2 n i o Qa 44927449Q 94974480 e 138 gt 131 gt 96 gt 94974419Q t9219 Short terminal shields Long terminal shields i nterphase barriers Mounting On rails or backplate 0g9z Lad Riese Hed I Ir 6292 90 87974419Q version 1 0 559
192. h electronic trip unit Micrologic 6 3 E LSIG protection energy meter Only available as separate components Compact NSX400H 70 kA at 380 415 V Compact NSX630H 70 kA at 380 415 V Compact NSX400H 70 kA at 380 415 V Compact NSX630H 70 kA at 380 415 V Compact NSX400H 1 3 M 70 kA at 380 415V Compact NSX630H 1 3 M 70 kA at 380 415V Compact NSX400H 2 3 M 70 kA at 380 415V Compact NSX630H 2 3 M 70 kA at 380 415V 250A 400A 630A 400A 630A 320A 500A 320A 500A 3P 3d LV432709 LV432695 LV432895 3P 3d LV432701 LV432901 3P 3d LV432750 LV432950 3P 3d LV432777 LV432977 With electronic trip unit Micrologic 6 3 E M LSIG motor protection energy meter Only available as separate components 559E6200 indd version 2 0 4P 3d 4d 3d N 2 LV432710 LV432696 LV432896 4P 3d 4d 3d N 2 3d OSN LV432702 LV432902 DB111459 Catalogue numbers NSX400 630NA complete fixed FC device Compact NSX400 630NA Compact NSX400 630 0 3 NA switch disconnector With 0 3 NA switch disconnector unit gt 3P 4P Compact NSX400 0 3 NA LV432756 LV432757 Compact NSX630 0 3 NA 45 mm pitch LV432956 LV432957 Schneider version 2 0 559E6200 indd ectric DB111460 DB111461 DB111462 DB111462 DB111463 DB111461 DB111462 Catalogue numbers NSX400 630N H S L fixed FC Distribution protection 559E6200 indd device based on separate components Compact and Vigic
193. harmonic Of voltage with respect to rms value THDU THDV of the Ph Ph and Ph N voltage a distortion Of current with respect to rms value THDI of the phase current z 1 Absolute mode E absolute E out E in Signed mode E signed E out E in 2 Available via the communication system only Additional technical characteristics Measurement accuracy Accuracies are those of the entire measurement system including the sensors m Current Class 1 as per IEC 61557 12 m Voltage 0 5 m Power and energy Class 2 as per IEC 61557 12 m Frequency 0 1 559E1200 indd version 1 0 PB103365 DB112212 DB112127 DB112129 Functions and characteristics Micrologic built in LCD display Main Menu D Quick View K Metering A fam Services FDM121 display navigation A EEG 2 3 A Total reactive Power DB112128 Over maximum Current unbalance Date 07 May 2007 Time 10 28 03 01 PM Date 10 Nov 2007 Time 06 35 08 04 AM Phase unbalance alarm A EML 77 Under voltage Drop out DB112130 Under voltage Pick up Date 05 Nov 2007 Time 02 31 03 61 AM Date 05 Nov 2007 Time 02 32 26 12 AM Alarm pick up and drop out Examples of operating assistance screens on the FDM121 display unit Operating assistance functions Micrologic 5 6 Aor E trip units Personalised alarms with time stamping A Alarm types The user can assi
194. hermal current A Ith 60 C Number of poles Operational current A depending on le AC 50 60 Hz the utilisation category 220 240 V 380 415 V 440 480 V 2 500 525 V 660 690 V DC 250 V 1 pole 500 poles 2 poles in series 750 V 3 poles in series Short circuit making capacity Icm min switch disconnector alone KA peak max protection by upstream circuit breaker Rated short time withstand current lcw for 1s Arms 35 20s Durability C O cycles mechanical electrical AC 440 V In 2 In 690 V In 2 In DC 250 V 1 pole and In 2 500 V 2 poles in series In Positive contact indication Pollution degree Add on earth leakage protection By Vigi module By Vigirex relay Indication contacts Voltages releases MX shunt release MN undervoltage release Voltage presence indicator Current transformer module Ammeter module Insulation monitoring module Device status indication Device remote operation Operation counter Dimensions mm fixed front connections 2 3P WxHxD 4P Weight kg fixed front connections 3P 4P Manual source changeover systems Remote operated or automatic source changeover systems Schneider version 1 0 559E1700 indd Common characteristics Control Manual With toggle With direct or extended rotary handle Electrical With remote control Versions Fixed Withdrawable Pl
195. i 24VDC _ sD IE SDE or SDx aes Supply terminalibiock MN E i SDTAM H E MX ST E s AANA fet Lat of Loaf Late The SDx or SDTAM uses the OF1 and MN MxX slots External connection is made via a terminal block in the OF1 slot The 24 V DC supply provides for the Micrologic 5 6 display when the device is OFF or under low load conditions Schneider version 1 0 559E1860 indd Electric DB115586 DB115588 Communication Communication requires specific auxiliaries see page A 26 Communication of status indications m 1BSCM module m 1 NSX cord internal terminal block for both communication and 24 V DC supply to the BSCM Communication of status conditions is compatible with a standard motor mechanism and a rotary handle Communication of status indications and controls This requires in addition to the previous auxiliaries m 1 communicating motor mechanism connected to the BSCM Communication of measurements Available on Micrologic 5 6 the system consists of m 1 NSX cord internal terminal block for both communication and 24 V DC supply to the Micrologic Communication of measurements is compatible with a standard or communicating motor mechanism and a rotary handle Communication of status indications controls and measurements Available on Micrologic 5 6 the system consists of m 1BSCM module m 1 NSX cord internal terminal block for both communication and 24 V DC
196. ibed indications provides a clear view of the state of the installed devices Schneider version 1 0 559E1200 indd Electric PB103354 PB103360 FDM121 display Personalised alarms In 80 89 In and 2 90 In 1 The BSCM module page A 27 is required for these functions 2 Available via the communication system only Settings Up to 10 alarms assigned to all Aand E measurements a Phase lead lag four quadrants phase sequence display priority selection 2 Display Alarms and tripping 2 Remote indications Activation oftwo dedicated contacts on SDx module u Time stamped histories Trips Cause of tripping Ir Isd li Micrologic 5 6 C 2 last 17 timestamping with ms Ig Micrologic 6 u 2 Alarms m C 2 last 10 Operating events Event types Modification of protection setting by dial 2 last 10 Opening of keypad lock C 2 Test via keypad 2 Test via external tool 2 Time setting date and time 2 Reset for maximeter minimeter and energy meter a Time stamping Presentation Date and time text status 1 z 2 Time stamped event tables Protection settings Setting modified value displayed Ir tr Isd tsd li Ig tg 2 Time stamping Date and time of modification a 2 Previous value Value before modification m C 2 Min Max Values monitored 1 2 13 IN 2 11 12 13 IN U12 U23 U31 f a 2
197. ies Cu or Al Rear connections Q 2 short SS on Qe ral 2long Bare cable connectors Steel connectors 1x 1 5 to 95 mm lt 160 A Aluminium connectors 1x 25 to 95 mm lt 250A 1x 120 to 185 mm lt 250A Clips for connectors Aluminium connectors for 2 cables 2 x 50 to 120 mm lt 250A Aluminium connectors for 6 cables 6 x 1 5 to 35 mm lt 250A 6 35 mm voltage tap for steel or aluminium connectors Polybloc distribution block for bare cable 160 A 40 C 6 cables S lt 10 mm 250 A 40 C 9 cables S lt 10 mm Terminal extensions 45 terminal extension A Edgewise terminal extensions ade o DA fo 2 Du Right angle terminal extensions Da OF g f Straight terminal extensions A o o a f ol D Double L terminal extensions Spreaders from 35 to 45 mm pitch One piece spreader from 35 to 45 mm pitch Front alignment base for one piece spreader 1 Supplied with 2 or 3 interphase barriers Set of 3 Set of 4 Set of 3 Set of 4 Set of 3 Set of 4 Set of 10 Set of 3 Set of 4 Set of 3 Set of 4 Set of 10 1P 4P Setof 3 Set of 4 Set of 3 Set of 4 Set of 3 Set of 4 Set of 3 Set of 4 Set of 3 Set of 4 3P 4P 3P 3P 4P Schneider version 2 0 ectric LV429235 LV429236 LV429242 LV429243 LV429227 LV429228 LV429259 LV429260 LV429241 LV429218 LV429219 LV429248 LV429249
198. ies p gt A 82 Direct rotary handle Extended rotary handle DIEIZEIIIIEEIIIIEIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII III Motor mechanism version 1 0 Functions and Accessories and auxiliaries characteristics Overview of Compact NSX100 to 630 plug in and withdrawable versions Insulation accessories p gt A 73 DB115888 Interphase barriers Sealable long terminal shields for plug in base Electrical accessories p A 78 eoo000000000 0000000000000 0000 Automatic withdrawable auxiliary connector Manual auxiliary connector Mechanical accessories p gt A 69 a 5 Circuit breaker side plate Chassis side plate Schneider version 1 0 559E1820 indd Electric v Adapter Plug in base Power connection accessories 7 Power connections Power connections for Vigicompact 559E1820 indd Connection p A 70 and A 72 oo00000000 000000000 wis ig le ar Cable connectors S S Terminal extensions Circuit breaker oo 0000000000 0000 version 1 0 PB103354 32 PB103598 32 Functions and Accessories and auxiliaries characteristics Device installation Compact NSX circuit breakers may be Fixed circuit breakers installed horizontally vertically or flat on Fixed circuit breakers are designed for standard connection using bars or cables their back without derating performance with lugs Bare cable connectors are available for co
199. ility to monitor power supply quality to optimise consumption of different applications or zones reducing load peaks and continuously supplying priority loads and to draw up maintenance schedules Monitoring software PowerLogic ION E gt A software utility RSU allows protection and alarm configuration in addition to testing communications with all installed devices Measurement functions are controlled by an additional microprocessor ASIC Protection functions are electronically managed independently of measurement functions An ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit is common to all trip units which boosts immunity to conducted or radiated interference and increases reliability Simplicity Compact NSX takes the principles of easy installation and use which made its predecessor so successful to a higher level Simple in design Simple to install Compact NSX is mounted and wired reusing gt A transparent lead sealable cover protects the same measurements as Compact NS access to tripping device switches and prevents settings from being changed Cut outs are the same whatever the type of handle Engineering drawings are the same gt The new electrical control adjustment also has so installation and connection layouts can be a transparent lead sealable cover to prevent it used on new projects simplifying extensions from being operated accidentally or retrofits and reducing maintenance cos
200. inal shields may be mounted upstream and downstream of m fixed devices m the base of plug in and withdrawable versions thus completing the insulation provided by the mandatory short terminal shields on the device m the one piece spreader for NSX100 to 250 m the 52 5 mm spreaders for NSX400 630 Terminal shields and pitch Combination possibilities are shown below Circuit breaker NSX100 160 250 NSX400 630 Short terminal shields Pitch mm 35 45 Long terminal shields Pitch mm 35 45 52 5 Interphase barriers Safety accessories for maximum insulation at the power connection points m they clip easily onto the circuit breaker m single version for fixed devices and adapters on plug in bases m not compatible with terminal shields m the adapter for the plug in base is required for mounting on plug in and withdrawable versions Rear insulating screens Safety accessories providing insulation at the rear of the device Their use is mandatory for devices with spreaders installed on backplates when terminal shields are not used The available screen dimensions are shown below Circuit breaker NSX100 160 250 NSX400 630 3P W x H x thickness mm 140 x 105 x 1 203 x 175x 1 5 4P W x H x thickness mm 175x105 x1 275x175x1 5 559E1840 indd Schneider version 1 0 DB115583 DB115584 Functions and Accessories and auxiliaries characteristics Selection of auxiliaries for Compact NSX100 160 250 Standard All Compact
201. indicators m Total harmonic distortion THD for current and voltage Power measurements m Active reactive and apparent power total and per phase m Power factor and cos Maximeters minimeters m For alll U f P E measurements Demand current and power measurements m Demand values total and per phase m Maximum demand Energy metering m Active reactive and apparent energy total and per phase Operating and maintenance assistance Indications alarms and histories m Indication of fault types m Alarms for high low thresholds linked to I U f P E measurements m Trip alarm and operating histories m Time stamped tables for settings and I U f P E maximeters Maintenance indicators m Operation trip and alarm counters m Operating hours counter m Contact wear m Load profile and thermal image Communication m Modbus with add on module version 1 0 Functions and characteristics TM thermal magnetic and MA magnetic trip units can be used on Compact NSX100 160 250 circuit breakers with performance levels B F H N S L TM trip units are available in 2 versions m 7M D for the protection of distribution cables m TM G with a low threshold for the protection of generators or long cable lengths Vigi modules or Vigirex relays can be added to all the circuit breakers to provide external earth leakage protection Note all the trip units have a transparent lead sealable cover that protects access to the
202. ing both e an accurate power monitoring unit e a highly reliable protective device by as much as 10 gt A Micrologic electronic tripping device combines next generation sensors e an iron sensor for the power supply to the electronics e an air sensor Rogowski coils for measurement guaranteeing high accuracy gt These electronic systems are designed to withstand high temperatures 105 C ensuring reliability under severe operating conditions gt The originality lies in how Compact NSX measures processes and displays data either directly on screen on the switchboard front panel or via a monitoring system Accessibility of information To keep costs under control and ensure service continuity relevant information must be available in real time gt a kilowatt hour meter helps optimise costs and their allocation gt harmonic distortion rate shows the quality of electrical supply gt alarm notification secures operational control and maintenance planning gt event logs and tables activated continuously ensure the installed equipment base operates correctly so energy efficiency is maximized for power monitoring gt Together with power monitoring software e g PowerLogic the Compact NSX Modbus communication interface provides operators with a parameter set and tools that make system monitoring very easy gt Operators have real time data to control energy availab
203. ion 0cccccccccccecceceeccuceuceeceeceuceeees Magnetic protection Im Short circuit protection with an adjustable pick up Im that initiates instantaneous tripping if exceeded m Im ln x is set on an adjustment dial in multiples of the rating 6 to 14 x In 2 5 to 100 A ratings 9 to 14 x In 150 to 200 A ratings Protection version m 3 pole 3P 3D 3 pole frame 3P equipped with detection on all 3 poles 3D Micrologic 1 3 M trip units Micrologic 1 3 M Ready 1i 6500A sd 4000 7 5000 son esse 3000 6000 2500 6500 A Circuit breakers with a Micrologic 1 3 M trip unit are combined with a thermal relay and a contactor PROTECTION sisi stinna enG N Settings are made using a dial Short circuits Short time protection Isd Protection with an adjustable pick up Isd There is a very short delay to let through motor starting currents m lsd is set in amperes from 5 to 13 x In as follows from 1600 to 4160A for the 320 A rating from 2500 to 6500 A for the 500 A rating Short circuits Non adjustable instantaneous protection li Instantaneous protection with non adjustable pick up li Protection version m 3 pole 3P 3D 3 pole frame 3P equipped with detection on all 3 poles 3D Indications Front indications m Green Ready LED flashes slowly when the circuit breaker is ready to trip in the event of a fault Schneider version
204. ion to identify the type of fault by installing 1 indication module with two outputs see page A 81 m either an SDx module with Micrologic 2 2 5 2AorE 6 2AorE m or an SDTAM module with Micrologic 2 2 M or 6 2 E M motor protection This module occupies the slots of an MN MX release All these auxiliaries may be installed with a motor mechanism or a rotary handle The following table indicates auxiliary possibilities depending on the type of trip unit NA Micrologic 1 3 M Motor mechanism rotary handle UU laf laf DB115591 OF1 OF2 OF3 Reserved i o MN MX Micrologic 2 5 6 Motor mechanism rotary handle UU O reccccccccccces Motor mechanism rotary handle DB115593 24V DC supply terminal SDx block SDTAM Laf Laf The SDx or SDTAM uses the reserved slot and the MN MX slots External connection is made via a terminal block in the reserved slot The 24 V DC supply provides for the Micrologic 5 6 display when the device is OFF or under low load conditions version 1 0 559E1860 indd DB115594 DB115596 Communication Communication requires specific auxiliaries see page A 26 Communication of status indications m
205. ions Installation in switchboards Safety clearances and minimum distances General rules When installing a circuit breaker minimum distances safety clearances must be maintained between the device and panels bars and other protection devices installed nearby These distances which depend on the ultimate breaking capacity are defined by tests carried out in accordance with standard IEC 60947 2 If installation conformity is not checked by type tests it is also necessary to m use insulated bars for circuit breaker connections m segregate the busbars using insulating screens For Compact NSX100 to 630 devices terminal shields and interphase barriers are recommended and may be mandatory depending on the operating voltage of the device and type of installation fixed withdrawable etc Power connections The table below indicates the rules to be respected for Compact NSX100 to 630 devices to ensure insulation of live parts for the various types of connection m fixed devices with front connection FC or rear connection RC m plug in or withdrawable devices Connection accessories such as crimp lugs bare cable connectors terminal extensions straight right angle double L and 45 and spreaders are supplied with interphase barriers Long terminal shields provide a degree of protection of IP40 ingress and IKO7 mechanical impact Compact NSX100 to 630 rules to be respected to ensure insulation of live parts DB115055
206. isabled DB111359 Rotary handle locking using a padlock or a keylock DB111361 Chassis locking in the connected position Schneider version 1 0 559E1880 indd Electric DB115224 DB115033 Sealing accessories Toggle control Rotary handle Motor mechanism Types of seals Protected operations DB112300 DB112302 DB112304 Front cover fixing screw m front removal m access to auxiliaries m trip unit removal DB112301 DB112306 DB112305 Sealing accessories Outgoing circuit identification Compact NSX100 to 630 can be equipped with label holders supplied in sets often cat no LV429226 They are compatible with escutcheons Sealing accessories Sealing accessories are available Each bag of accessories contains all the parts required for the types of sealing indicated below Abag contains m 6 sealing accessories m 6 lead seals m 0 5m of wire m 2 screws Types of seals and corresponding functions Trip unit transparent cover m modification of settings m access to test connector DB112309 Motor mechanism transparent cover m access to manual auto mode selection switch depending on its position manual 1 or automatic operation is not possible 1 In this case local operation is not possible DB112303 DB112308 DB112307 Terminal shield fixing screw m access to power connections protection against direct contact Ac
207. isation category Depending on the rated operational current and the mechanical durability A for frequent operation or B for infrequent operation standard IEC 60947 3 defines the utilisation categories as shown in the table below Compact NSX NA switch disconnectors comply with utilisation categories AC22A or AC23A Infrequent Frequent operation operation AC 21A AC 21B Resistive loads including moderate overloads cos 9 0 95 AC 22A AC 22B Mixed resistive and inductive loads including moderate overloads cos 0 65 AC 23A AC 23B Motor loads or other highly inductive loads cos 9 0 45 or 0 35 Schneider version 1 0 PB103199 39 PB103271 Functions and characteristics Installation standards require upstream protection However Compact NSX100 to 630 NA switch disconnectors are self protected by their high set magnetic release Compact NSX100 to 250 NA Compact NSX400 to 630 NA 1 2P in 3P case 2 Suitable for 480 V NEMA Switch disconnectors Characteristics and performance of Compact NSX switch disconnectors from 100 to 630 NA Common characteristics Rated voltages Insulation voltage V Ui 800 Impulse withstand voltage kV Uimp 8 Operational voltage V Ue AC 50 60 Hz 690 Suitability for isolation IEC EN 60947 3 yes Utilisation category AC 22 A AC 23 A DC 22 A DC 23A Pollution degree IEC 60664 1 3 Switch disconnectors Conventional t
208. it breakers Upstream CB gt 3P or 4P NSX cord lt VOR 8 p77 9 s NULL O O QD p a ae 5 v Me pil i x i 8 BPO H Ho mo fi 0 ja i TOI i F o000 oooo 000 ooo 9 er E EBEN EN gt SOITZDIES 1 a us 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Sr cS Motor mechanism MT er NSX cord et L2 L3 ae eee NAAN NR 220 240 V Downstream CB Eat i CS BSCM u py RL N T1 gt T2 D RINI K a Pis Communicating motor mechanism MTc Communication MN undervoltage release H WH L BL data or BK RD 24 VDC power supply MX Sh ntrele s AIE ZSI Zone Selective Interlocking Z1 ZSI OUT SOURCE Motor mechanism MT Z2 ZSI OUT A4 opening order Z3 ZSI IN SOURCE f A2 closing order Z4 ZSI IN ST short time ng Z5 ZSI IN GF ground fault B4 A1 power supply to motor mechanism Note Z3 Z4 Z5 for NSX400 630 only L1 manual position manu AIE ENCT external neutral current transformer B2 SDE interlocking mandatory for correct operation shielded cable with 1 twisted pair T1 T2 shielding earthed at one end only CT end BPO opening pushbutton Connection L 30 cm max BPF c
209. justment dial covering the range 6 to 14 x In for 2 5 to 100 A ratings or 9 to 14 In for 150 to 220 A ratings Protection versions m 3 pole 3P 3D 3 pole frame 3P with detection on all 3 poles 3D m 4 pole 4P 3D 4 pole frame 4P with detection on 3 poles 3D Schneider version 1 0 559E1200 indd Electric TM16D to 250D Thermal magnetic trip units Circuit breaker Compact NSX100 TM16G to 63G Compact NSX160 E Compact NSX250 E E t Pick up A Ir Inx adjustable in amps from 0 7 to 1 x In tripping between Im 1 05 and 1 20 Ir Time delay s tr non adjustable non adjustable trat1 5xIn 120 to 400 120 to 400 trat6 x Ir 15 Pick up A Im fixed adjustable fixed accuracy 20 Compact NSX100 190 300 400 500 500 500 640 800 63 80 80 125 Compact NSX160 250 190 300 400 500 500 500 640 800 1250 1250 5to10xIn 63 80 80 125 Time delay tm fixed Unprotected neutral 4P 3D Fully protected neutral 4P 4D Magnetic trip units MA 2 5 to 220 Circuit breaker Compact NSX100 Compact NSX160 Compact NSX250 no detection no 4P3D version 1xIr 1xIr Pick up A Im Inx adjustable in amps accuracy 20 from 6 to 14 x In 9 settings Time delay ms tm none A Im adjustable in amps from 9 to 14 xIn 1 Fortemperatures greater than 40 C the thermal protection characteristics are modified See the temperature derating table 559E1200 indd S
210. king into account the Ir setting and the class an algorithm simulates rotor and stator temperature rise It includes the slow temperature rise of the stator and its Micrologic 6 E M metal mass Also included is the faster temperature rise of the copper rotor The thermal protection function trips the circuit breaker when the calculated thermal image reaches 100 of the permissible temperature rise The communication indicates the thermal image value as a percentage of the permissible temperature rise One or more alarms may be assigned to selected thresholds A red LED on the front signals when the value exceeds 95 An SDx module with two outputs programmed for thermal image values can be used to implement other alarm functions DB111405 PC screen with motor thermal image and value monitoring The additional technical characteristics are identical to those of Micrologic 6 E see pages A 21 and A 23 Schneider version 1 0 559E1500 indd Electric Micrologic 6 E M integrated Power Meter and operating assistance functions Instantaneous rms measurements Currents A Phase currents and average value 11 12 13 and lavg 11 12 13 3 a Highest current ofthe 3 phases Imax of 11 12 13 a Ground fault protection lg pick up setting a Current unbalance between phases lavg Voltages V Phase to phase voltages and average value U12 U23 U31 and Uavg
211. less the contacts are effectively open The other conditions for isolation must all be fulfilled m locking in the open position is possible only if the contacts are effectively open m leakage currents are below the standardised limits m overvoltage impulse withstand between upstream and downstream connections Expressed in kA it indicates the maximum breaking capacity of the circuit breaker It is confirmed by a test with one opening and one closing opening at Icu followed by a check that the circuit is properly isolated This test ensures user safety ih ROEA AN EEEE EA EEE EEEE BSCM gt A 27 Breaker status and control module Ethernet TCP IP gt A 28 Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol Network The optional BSCM for Compact NSX is used to acquire device status indications and control the communicating remote control function It includes a memory used to manage the maintenance indicators It serves as a converter between the analog outputs of the device indication contacts O F SD SDE and the digital communicating functions Ethernet is a very common network protocol and complies with IEEE standard 802 3 Ethernet TCP IP is the protocol that brings web functions to Ethernet networks Most PCs have an Ethernet 10 100 card 10 or 100 Mbit s for connection to the internet Data communicated from Compact NSX via Modbus are accessible on a PC via a TCP IP Modbus gateway such as MPS100 or EGX100 Set of co
212. lling an SDx relay module inside the circuit breaker This module receives the signal from the Micrologic electronic trip unit via an optical link and makes it available on the terminal block The signal is cleared when the circuit breaker is reclosed For description see page A 81 Micrologic 1 3 M for magnetic protection only Micrologic 1 3 M 1i 6500A IL Tsd sd 40004500 5000 3500 95500 300 sooo 2500 esoo A Micrologic 1 3 M trip units provide magnetic protection only using electronic technology They are dedicated to 400 630 A 3 pole 3P 3D circuit breakers or 4 pole circuit breakers with detection on 3 poles 4P 3D and are used in certain applications to replace switch disconnectors at the head of switchboards They are especially used in 3 pole versions for motor protection see page A 40 Schneider version 1 0 559E1200 indd Electric Micrologic 2 Circuit breaker Compact NSX100 a t Compact NSX160 a Compact NSX250 a r Compact NSX400 Compact NSX630 a L Isd Pick up A lo value depending on trip unit rating In and setting on dial li tripping between In 40A lo 18 18 20 23 25 28 32 36 40 l ToS etne AD Ur In 100A lo 40 45 50 55 63 70 80 90 100 In 160A lo 63 70 80 90 100 110 125 150 160 In 250A NSX250 lo 100 110 125 140 160 175 200 225 250 In 250A NSX400 lo 70 100 125 140 160 175 200 225 250 In 400A lo 160
213. losing pushbutton maximum length of 10 metres cable size 0 4 to 1 5 mm Communicating motor mechanism MTc recommended cable Belden 8441 or equivalent B4 A1 motor mechanism power supply E ENVT external neutral voltage tap for connection to the BSCM breaker status and control module neutral via a 3P circuit breaker Schneider version 1 0 559E4100 indd ectric DB115708 84 92 9 124 102 104 72 Q Closed Q Open amp Fault 41 31 21 11 81 The diagram is shown with circuits de energised all devices open connected and charged and relays in normal position Terminals shown in red O must be connected by the customer 559E4100 indd 91 131 121 101 OF2 OF1 device ON OFF indication contacts OF4 OF3 device ON OFF indication contacts NSX400 630 SDE fault trip indication contact short circuit overload ground fault earth leakage SD trip indication contact CAF2 CAF1 early make contact rotary handle only CAO1 early break contact rotary handle only SDV earth leakage fault trip indication contact add on Vigi module RD red VT violet WH white GY grey YE yellow OR orange BK black BL blue GN green Schneider version 1 0 _ Remote operation Compact NSX100 to 630 Plug in withdrawable circuit breakers Micrologic Wiring diagrams Power
214. lt 2 ND R Y 3 c p g ite So yy 7 yy D byt 3 sR 5088 a _ N T m ie 1 l NUNA Q u ON 7 gt s lo T S Ss N o S c2 ofSwh5 S SS a q auwran seat ga gt 2s a SS a Vee z Sg 9 sen L SL Yozga g E lo ozr L aa Lo kzr aa 5 oO Ss zesurs 28 9 as s NAIS S eo lt 3 NT ur ss o oe o o ke 43 85 R WS 2 che Zo So solla se Ks oo oo Q o n z SE se scWss 5 eJ o ovo 8 oo So m cs o y T WH FT W oF Rf c 2 2 6 Qx xex x o o R R A e SU zZ z Z ezozh aa zozua ogoziiaa DB112640 DB112648 Dimensions and Dimensions and mounting connection Compact NSX100 to 630 plug in version Dimensions 2 3P 4P a N 8 8 i A11 A10 A j A2 A1 l vy eT CO il EN a A A2 j A10 I A11 L y Y 1427 gt 45 D1 u c3 gt EEE Interphase barriers for base _ Long terminal shields also available for NSX400 630 spreaders with 52 5 mm pitch Short terminal shields on circuit breaker B1 157 5 mm B2 210mm E Adapter for base required to mount long terminal shields or interphase barriers Through front panel N 2 3P 3P 4P NSX100 to 250 NSX400 630 NSX100 to 630 gt gt F1 F3 gt gt sre p lt F2 DB112649 DB115637 DB112650 4 06 4 6 F5 schneider ion E3100 ind Electric version 1 0 559E3100 indd On backplat
215. m a t L Pick up A lo value depending on trip unit rating In and setting on dial tripping between In 40A lo w 6 a a 8 a 2 A A ise 1 05 and 1 20 Ir li In 100A lo 40 45 50 55 63 70 80 90 100 In 160A lo 63 70 80 90 100 110 125 150 160 In 250 A NSX250 lo 100 110 125 140 150 176 200 225 250 Ir lox 9 fine adjustment settings from 0 9 to 1 for each lo value Time delay s tr non adjustable accuracy 0 to 20 1 5xlr 15 6xIr 0 5 7 2xIr 0 35 Thermal memory 20 minutes before and after tripping EE Short time protection with fixed time delay 724 Pick up A Isd Irx 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 T 8 9 accuracy 10 Time delay ms tsd non adjustable Non tripping time 140 Maximum break time 200 Pick up A linon adjustable l 600 1500 2400 l 3000 accuracy 15 Non tripping time 15 ms Maximum break time 50 ms 1 Ifthe trip units are used in high temperature environments the Micrologic setting must take into account the thermal limitations of the circuit breaker See the temperature derating table 559E1600 indd Schneider version 1 0 DB115233 DB115234 Functions and characteristics Compact NSX circuit breakers are also used in industrial control panels They serve as an incoming devices or can be combined with contactors to protect motor feeders m compliance with worldwide standards including IEC 60947 2 and UL 508 CSA 22 2 no 14 moverload and short circuit protection m isolation with positive contact indication
216. m IEC EN 61000 4 2 to 4 6 immunity tests m CISPR11 radio frequency radiated and conducted emission tests m UL1053 and CSA22 2 No 144 for RH10 RH21 and RH99 relays at supply voltages up to and including 220 240 V Schneider version 1 0 559E1400 indd Electric PB103579 21 PB103580 36 DB112147 1 Sensitivity setting 2 Time delay setting for selective earth leakage protection 3 Lead seal fixture for controlled access to settings 4 Test button simulating an earth fault for regular checks on the tripping function 5 Reset button reset required after earth fault tripping 6 Rating plate 7 Housing for SDV auxiliary contact Plug in devices The Vigi module can be installed on a plug in base Special accessories are required see catalogue number chapter 559E1400 indd Vigicompact NSX100 to 630 circuit breakers with earth leakage protection Addition of the Vigi module does not alter circuit breaker characteristics m compliance with standards m degree of protection class II front face insulation m positive contact indication m electrical characteristics m trip unit characteristics m installation and connection modes m indication measurement and control auxiliaries m installation and connection accessories Dimensions 3 poles 105 x 236 x 86 135 x 355 x 110 WxHxD mm 4 poles 140 x 236 x 86 180 x 355 x 110 Weight kg 3 poles 2 5 8 8 4 poles 3 2 10 8 Vigi earth leakage protection mo
217. me 1 trip unit With electronic trip unit Micrologic 6 2 E LSIG protection energy meter To be ordered with 2 catalogue numbers 1 basic frame 1 trip unit With electronic trip unit Micrologic 6 2 E M LSIG motor protection energy meter To be ordered with 2 catalogue numbers 1 basic frame 1 trip unit 559E6100 indd Schneider version 2 0 Catalogue numbers NSX100 160 250H complete fixed FC device Compact NSX100 160 250H 70 kA 380 415 V Compact NSX100 160 250H hermal magnetic trip unit TM D gt Compact NSX100H 70 kA at 380 415 V DB112222 Rating 3P 3d 4P 3d 4P 4d TM16D LV429677 LV429687 LV429697 TM25D LV429676 LV429686 LV429696 TM32D LV429675 LV429685 LV429695 TM40D LV429674 LV429684 LV429694 TM50D LV429673 LV429683 LV429693 TM63D LV429672 LV429682 LV429692 TM80D LV429671 LV429681 LV429691 TM100D LV429670 LV429680 LV429690 Compact NSX160H 70 kA at 380 415 V Rating 3P 3d 4P 3d 4P 4d TM80D LV430673 LV430683 LV430693 TM100D LV430672 LV430682 LV430692 TM125D LV430671 LV430681 LV430691 TM160D LV430670 LV430680 LV430690 Compact NSX250H 70 kA at 380 415 V Rating 3P 3d 4P 3d 4P 4d TM125D LV431673 LV431683 LV431693 TM160D LV431672 LV431682 LV431692 TM200D LV431671 LV431681 LV431691 TM250D LV431670 LV431680 LV431690 With electronic trip unit Micrologic 2 2 LS protection I Compact NSX100H 70 kA at 380 415 V Rating 3P 3d 4P 3d Ad 3d N 2 R 40 LV429792 LV429802 100 LV429790 LV429800 Compact NSX
218. ment metering and communication functions They can be combined with the FDM121 switchboard display unit to provide all the functions of a Power Meter as well as operating assistance DB112086 Power Meter page A 20 Compact NSX equipped with Micrologic 5 6 trip units offer type A ammeter or E energy metering functions as well as communication Using Micrologic sensors and intelligence Compact NSX provides access to measurements of all the main electrical parameters on the built in screen on a dedicated FDM121 display unit or via the communication system Operating assistance page A 22 Integration of measurement functions provides operators with operating assistance functions including alarms tripped by user selected measurement values time stamped event tables and histories and maintenance indicators Switchboard display unit page A 24 The main measurements can be read on the built in screen of Micrologic 5 6 trip units They can also be displayed on the FDM121 switchboard display unit along with pop up windows signalling the main alarms Communication page A 26 Compact NSX equipped with Micrologic 5 6 trip units provide communication capabilities Simple RJ45 cords connect to a Modbus interface module Schneider version 1 0 Applications DB112087 DB112089 DB112090 DB112091 V 559E1100 indd Protection of distribution systems AC 220 690 V
219. mmeter module A 86 Accessories and auxiliaries Additional measurement and indication modules Voltage presence indicator The indicator detects and indicates that circuit breaker terminals are supplied with power Installation m Mounted in the long or short terminal shields via the knockouts m May be positioned upstream or downstream of the circuit breaker m Degree of protection IP40 IK04 m Not compatible with the motor mechanism module Electrical characteristics Operates on all networks with voltages ranging from 220 to 550 VAC Current transformer module This module enables direct connection of ameasurement device such as an ammeter or a power meter Installation m The module is installed directly on the downstream circuit breaker terminals m Degree of protection IP40 IK04 m Class Il insulation between front and the power circuits m Connection to 6 integrated connectors for cables up to 2 5 mm Electrical characteristics m Current transformer with 5 A secondary winding m Class 3 for the following output power consumptions Accuracy 100 Arating 1 6 VA 150 Arating 3 VA 250 Arating 5 VA 400 600 A rating 8 VA Current transformer module with voltage measurement outputs This module enables direct connection of a digital measurement device such as a Power Meter PM700 PM800 etc not supplied Installation m The module is installed directly on the downstream circui
220. mmunicating devices that are interconnected by communication lines in order to share data and resources Schneider version 1 0 559E7100 indd Electric 8 Open protocol 3 A protocol for system communication interconnection or data exchange for which technical specifications are public i e there are no restrictions on access or implementation An open protocol is the opposite of a proprietary protocol Protocol gt A 28 Standardised specification for dialog between digital components that exchange data It is an operating mode based on the length and structure of binary words and it must be used by all the components exchanging data between themselves Communication is not possible without using a protocol RJ45 connector gt A 26 Universal 8 wire connector that is widely used in digital communication networks The RJ45 connector is used to interconnect computer equipment Ethernet Modbus etc telephones and audiovisual equipment RS485 Modbus gt A 28 Modbus is the most widely used communication protocol in industrial networks It operates in master slave mode An RS485 multipoint link connects the master and slaves via a pair of wires offering throughputs of up to 38400 bits second over distances up to 1200 m The master cyclically polls the slaves which send back the requested information The Modbus protocol uses frames containing the address of the targeted slave the function read write the datum and the CRC cyclical redun
221. n AC2 Slip ring motor cos 9 2 0 65 Starting Wiring drawing machine Switching off motor during running Counter current braking Inching AC3 Squirrel cage motor Starting Compressors elevators pumps mixers cos 0 45 for lt 100 A Switching off motor during running escalators fans conveyer systems air cos 0 35 for gt 100 A conditioning AC4 Starting Printing machines wire drawing machines Switching off motor during running Regenerative braking Plugging Inching 559E1500 indd Schneider version 1 0 Utilisation category AC3 common coordination tables for circuit breakers and contactors This category covers asynchronous squirrel cage motors that are switched off during running which is the most common situation 85 of cases The contactor makes the starting current and switches off the rated current at a voltage approximately one sixth of the nominal value The current is interrupted without difficulty The circuit breaker contactor coordination tables for Compact NSX are for use with contactors in the AC3 utilisation category in which case they ensure type 2 coordination Utilisation category AC4 possible oversizing This category covers asynchronous squirrel cage motors capable of operating under regenerative braking or inching jogging conditions The contactor makes the starting current and can interrupt this current at a voltage that may be equal to that of the distribution system These difficul
222. n installations without communication it is available as an option for Micrologic 5 6 to modify settings when the circuit breaker is open OFF position m display measurements when the current flowing through the circuit breaker is low maintain the display of the cause of tripping Characteristics The external 24 V DC supply may be used for the entire switchboard The required characteristics are indicated in the table below Output voltage 24 V DC 20 to 10 Ripple 1 Overvoltage category OVC OVC IV as per IEC 60947 1 Sizing Sizing must take into account all supplied modules Micrologic 5 6 40 BSCM module 10 FDM 121 40 Modbus communication interface 60 NSX cord U gt 480 VAC 30 SDx SDTAM module 20 Wiring Micrologic 5 or 6 not using the Communication function The external 24 V DC supply is connected via the circuit breaker terminal block Use of a 24 V DC battery provides backup power for xx minutes in the event of an interruption in the external supply Micrologic 5 or 6 using the Communication function The external 24 V DC supply is connected via the Modbus interface using a five pin connector including two for the power supply Stacking accessories see page A 27 can be used to supply a number of interfaces by fast clip on connection The 24 V DC power is distributed downstream by the ULP Universal Logic Plug communication cords with RJ45 connectors This system ensures both dat
223. n the order of tens of mA caused by insulation faults Protection function specific to electronic circuit breakers symbolised by S Short delay or short time This protection supplements thermal protection The reaction time is very short but has a slight time delay to enable discrimination with the upstream device The short delay pick up Isd is adjustable from approximately 1 5 to 10 Ir Short delay protection but with a fixed time delay This function is available on Micrologic 2 It is symbolised by So It ensures discrimination with downstream devices Overload protection provided by thermal trip units see this term using an inverse time curve It Relays and a xiliary y CONTAC osc cs A Re Auxiliary contact IEC 60947 1 Break contact gt A 84 IEC 60947 1 Make contact gt A 84 IEC 60947 1 Relay electrical gt A 18 IEC 60947 1 Relay module with static gt A 81 output Contact included in an auxiliary circuit and mechanically operated by the switching device Control or auxiliary contact which is open when the main contacts ofthe mechanical switching device are closed and closed when they are open Control or auxiliary contact which is closed when the main contacts ofthe mechanical switching device are closed and open when they are open Device designed to produce sudden predetermined changes in one or more electrical output circuits when certain conditions are fulfilled in the electrical input circ
224. n voltage Ui Rated operational current le gt A 70 gt A 5 A 17 gt A 6 gt A 17 gt A 6 gt E 13 gt A 6 gt A 6 gt A 6 A term designating a group of circuit breakers the external physical dimensions of which are common to a range of current ratings Frame size is expressed in amperes corresponding to the highest current rating of the group Within a frame size the width may vary according to the number of poles This definition does not imply dimensional standardization Compact NSX has two frame sizes covering 100 to 250 A and 400 to 630 A Defines the type of device insulation in terms of earthing and the corresponding safety for user in one of three classes m Class The device is earthed Any electrical faults internal or external or caused by the load are cleared via the earthing circuit thus ensuring user safety m Class II The device is not connected to a protective conductor User safety is ensured by reinforced insulation around the live parts an insulating case and no contact with live parts i e plastic buttons moulded connections etc or double insulation m Class Ill The device may be connected only to SELV safety extra low voltage circuits The Compact NSX are class Il devices front and may be installed through the door in class II switchboards standards IEC 61140 and IEC 60664 1 without reducing insulation even with a rotary handle or motor mechanism modul
225. ndicate the OFF position unless the contacts are effectively open m Padlocks may not be installed unless the contacts are open Installation of a rotary handle or a motor mechanism does not alter the reliability of the position indication system The isolation function is certified by tests guaranteeing m the mechanical reliability of the position indication system m the absence of leakage currents m overvoltage withstand capacity between upstream and downstream connections The tripped position does not insure isolation with positive contact indication Only the OFF position guarantees isolation Installation in class Il switchboards All Compact NSX circuit breakers are class II front face devices They may be installed through the door of class Il switchboards as per IEC standards 61140 and 60664 1 without downgrading switchboard insulation Installation requires no special operations even when the circuit breaker is equipped with a rotary handle or a motor mechanism Degree of protection The following indications are in accordance with standards IEC 60529 IP degree of protection and IEC 62262 IK protection against external mechanical impacts Bare circuit breaker with terminal shields m With toggle IP40 IKO7 m With standard direct rotary handle VDE IP40 IKO7 Circuit breaker installed in a switchboard m With toggle IP40 IKO7 m With direct rotary handle o standard VDE IP40 IKO7 o MCC IP43 IKO7 o CNOMO I
226. ne of the following modules m Vigi module m insulation monitoring module m ammeter module m current transformer module They also apply for plug in or withdrawable circuit breakers equipped with m ammeter module m current transformer module However for plug in or withdrawable circuit breakers equipped with a Vigi module or an insulation monitoring module the coefficient 0 84 must be applied The table below sums up the situation for add on modules Fixed NSX100 to 250 16 to 100 NSX160 to 250 125 NSX160 to 250 160 NSX250 200 to 250 Plug in or NSX100 to 250 16 to 100 withdrawable NSX16010250 125 NSX160 to 250 160 NSX250 250 0 84 Schneider er 559E2100 indd ectric Electronic trip units are not affected by variations in temperature If the trip units are used in high temperature environments the Micrologic setting must nevertheless take into account the temperature limits of the circuit breaker 559E2100 indd Compact NSX equipped with electronic trip units Changes in temperature do not affect measurements by electronic trip units m The built in CT sensors with Rogowski toroids measure the current m The control electronics compare the value of the current to the settings defined for 40 C Because temperature has no effect on the toroid measurements the tripping thresholds do not need to be modified However the temperature rise caused by the flow of current and the ambient temperatu
227. nel escutcheon NSX100 to 250 NSX400 630 Fixed plug in or withdrawable circuit breaker without access to Vigi module DB115067 DB115114 z DB115066 DB115113 DB115115 DB115116 DB115117 DB115118 Type Di P6 P7 P80 P92 NSX100 160 250 75 145 177 146 178 1 Plug in version NSX400 630 100 217 249 218 250 2 Withdrawable version 559E3400 indd Schneider version 1 0 DB115119 DB115147 DB115127 Dimensions and Front panel cutouts connection Direct rotary handle for Compact and Vigicompact NSX100 to 630 Fixed or plug in circuit breakers NSX100 to 250 NSX400 630 Bare sheet metal DB115144 DB115145 DB115146 1635 4 lt 127 DB115124 DB115125 DB115126 With IP30 front panel escutcheon DB115128 DB115145 DB115146 A i l an 27 j 45 Schneider version 1 0 559E3400 indd Electric aoi Fixed or plug in circuit breakers cont NSX100 to 250 NSX400 630 With IP30 front panel escutcheon with access to the trip unit DB115129 DB115130 DB115125 DB115126
228. nnection to bare copper or aluminium cables levels For connection of large cables a number of solutions with spreaders may be used There are three installation versions for both cables with lugs or bare cables E fixed E plug in on a base m withdrawable on a chassis For the last two components must be added base chassis to the fixed version Many connection components are shared by the three versions DB112200 DB112201 DB112202 Mounting on DIN rail with adapter DB112208 DB112203 DB112204 paom g c Mounting on a Prisma Mounting on busbars with an mounting plate adapter Installation positions Plug in circuit breakers The plug in version makes it possible to m extract and or rapidly replace the circuit breaker without having to touch the connections on the base m allow for the addition of future circuits by installing bases that will be equipped with a circuit breaker at a later date m isolate the power circuits when the device is mounted on or through a panel It acts as a barrier for the connections of the plug in base Insulation is made complete by the mandatory short terminal shields on the device The degrees of protection are circuit breaker plugged in IP4 circuit breaker removed IP2 circuit breaker removed base equipped with shutters IP4 E i gt fe 5 Parts of a plug in configuration a A plug in configuration is
229. ns and mounting connection Compact NSX100 to 630 withdrawable version Dimensions 2 3P 4P DB112645 DB112646 DB112647 DB112681 1 Interphase barriers for base Long terminal shields Short terminal shields on circuit breaker EZ Adapter for base required to mount long terminal shields or interphase barriers Through front panel N 2 3P 3P 4P NSX100 to 250 NSX400 630 NSX100 to 630 Fla F2 F3 DB112652 DB115638 DB112653 4 6 F11 Schneider ion E3100 ind Electric version 1 0 559E3100 indd On backplate M 2 3P 4P Front connection an insulating screen is supplied with the base and must be fitted between the base and the backplate gt F1 DB112682 DB112655 DB112656 406 Connection by exterior mounted rear connectors DB112683 DB112658 DB112659 kq 406 1 The T1 holes are required for rear connection only for two pole circuit breakers the middle holes are not required Connection by interior mounted rear connectors gt FI F14 gt F1 KEN F2 oo DB112684 DB112661 DB112662 4 6 1 The T1 holes are required for rear connection only for two
230. of 0 7 g European directive on managing the waste of electrical and electronic equipment Circuit breakers are not included in the list of concerned products However Compact NSX products respect the WEEE directive T a PN T COREEA NEN AAEN EEA S A A A AE Current harmonics gt A 20 Non linear load Total harmonic distortion of gt A 21 current THDI Total harmonic distortion of gt A 21 voltage THDU Voltage harmonics gt A 20 Non linear loads cause harmonic currents that flow in the 50 Hz or 60 Hz distribution system Total harmonic current is the sum of sinusoidal AC currents for which the rms values can be measured and broken down into m the fundamental current at the 50 60 Hz frequency of the distribution system with an rms value of IH m harmonic currents with whole odd multiples 3 5 7 etc of the 50 60 Hz frequency called the third order fifth order etc harmonics For example IH the third order harmonic at 150 180 Hz IH the fifth order harmonic at 250 300 Hz etc The presence of harmonics in the system must be monitored and limited because it results in temperature rise currents in the neutral caused by the third order harmonics and multiples malfunctions of sensitive electronic devices etc Micrologic E trip units take into account harmonics up to order 15 in the THDI and THDU calculations Systems producing harmonics are present in all industrial commercial and residential sectors Harmoni
231. of Modbus networks can be connected to an Ethernet network TCP IP Modbus protocol via their gateways gt Automatic notification 6 Nomad Internet lt mode eeesecesescecscccoeo Consultation RSU RCU Modbus FDM121 PowerLogic Power Meter NSX Schneider version 1 0 559E1300 indd Electric eereecececeseeseeeeeeeeecoceceeeeseeeceeeeeocesecoeeeseseecececcoseceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeee X DB112126 Micrologic utilities m Two utilities RSU and RCU presented on the next page are available to assist in starting up a communicating installation Intended for Compact NSX and Masterpact the software can be downloaded from the Schneider Electric internet site m The Live update function enables immediate updating to obtain the most recent upgrades These easy to use utilities include starting assistance and on line help They are compatible with Microsoft Windows 2000 XP and Vista a a 1 si mer Mo a Dee DB112125 U tee Bh ee ann DE E teen FI eee aT yen Kai di te ek h ia Ot ie s m DB112214 Gateway The gateway has two functions m access to the company intranet Ethernet by converting Modbus frames to the TCP IP Modbus protocol m optional web page server for the information from the devices RCU mini supervision screen for current measurements Examples include MPS100 EGX400 and EGX100 MPS100 m Plug and play device It comes loaded with a web
232. ogic trip unit using a prefabricated cord to display all measurements on a screen The result is a veritable 96 x 96 mm Power Meter In addition to the information displayed on the Micrologic LCD the FDM121 screen shows demand power quality and maximeter minimeter values along with alarms histories and maintenance indicators The FMD121 display unit requires a 24 V DC power supply The Micrologic trip unit is supplied by the same power supply via the cord connecting it to the FDM121 PC screen When the Micrologic with or without an FDM121 switchboard display unit is connected to a communication network all information can be accessed via a PC ww Measurements 02cc0ecccceeeceecceeeeeeueeeeeeseeeeeeens Es Instantaneous rms measurements The Micrologic A and E continuously display the RMS value of the highest current of the three phases and neutral Imax The navigation buttons can be used to scroll through the main measurements In the event of a fault trip the current interrupted is memorised The Micrologic A measures phase neutral ground fault currents The Micrologic E offers voltage frequency and power measurements in addition to the measurements provided by Micrologic A Maximeters minimeters Every instantaneous measurement provided by Micrologic A or E can be associated with a maximeter minimeter The maximeters for the highest current of the 3 phases and neutral the demand current and power can be reset
233. old before the end of a 10 s time delay If either of these conditions is not met the thermal protection trips the device after a maximum time equal to that of the selected class Pick up Ir must have been set to the current indicated on the motor rating plate Long starts Micrologic 6 E M When this function is not activated the starting conditions are those indicated above When it is activated this protection supplements thermal protection class Along start causes tripping and is characterised by m current gt 10 x Ir motor off limit with m either overrun of the long time pick up 1 to 8 x Ir without return below the pick up before the end of the long time time delay 1 to 200 s Ir i m or no overrun of the long time pick up 1 to 8 x Ir before the end of the long time time delay 1 10 Ir 1 5 Ir Micrologic 2 M to 200 s or llong Micrologic 6 E M Pick up Ir must have been set to the current indicated on the motor rating plate This protection should be coordinated with the selected class 13 U3 1 to 200s A Long start time limit Starting Motor starting and long starts 559E1500 indd Schneider version 1 0 PB103376 Functions and Motor protection characteristics Micrologic 6 E M electronic trip units Micrologic 6 E M is used in 2 device motor feeder solutions It provides the same protection as Micrologic 2 M m short circuits 170 gt 30A Ir Cl
234. ollution generates persistent conductivity caused for instance by conductive dust or by rain or snow Compact NSX meets degree 3 which corresponds to industrial applications Current that would flow through the poles if they remained fully closed during the short circuit This is the current that the device can carry continuously with the contacts closed and without abnormal temperature rise The peak value of an impulse voltage of prescribed form and polarity which the equipment is capable of withstanding without failure under specified conditions of test and to which the values of the clearances are referred The rated impulse withstand voltage of an equipment shall be equal to or higher than the values stated for the transient overvoltages occurring in the circuit in which the equipment is fitted The rated insulation voltage of an equipment is the value of voltage to which dielectric tests and creepage distances are referred In no case shall the maximum value of the rated operational voltage exceed that of the rated insulation voltage Arated operational current of an equipment is stated by the manufacturer and takes into account the rated operational voltage the rated frequency the rated duty the utilization category and the type of protective enclosure if appropriate 559E7100 indd version 1 0 Schneider Electric Compact NSX Rated operational voltage Ue gt A 6 Rated short time withstand current Icw
235. ologic 5 or ground fault trip Micrologic 6 This module receives the signal from the Micrologic electronic trip unit via an optical link and makes it available on the terminal block The signal is cleared when the circuit breaker is closed These outputs can be reprogrammed to be assigned to other types of tripping or alarm The module is described in detail in the section dealing with accessories Schneider version 1 0 559E1200 indd Electric Protection Micrologic 5 6 Aor E trip units F7 ab Circuit breaker Compact NSX100 t Compact NSX160 a Compact NSX250 a Compact NSX400 Compact NSX630 Pick up A Ir dial setting value depending on trip unit rating In and setting on dial tipping between In 40A lo 18 18 20 23 25 2 32 35 40 1 05 and 1 20 Ir In 100A lo 40 45 50 55 63 70 80 90 100 In 160A lo 63 70 80 90 100 110 125 150 160 In 250A lo 100 110 125 140 150 175 200 225 250 In 400A lo 160 180 200 230 250 280 320 360 400 In 630A lo 250 280 320 350 400 450 500 570 630 keypad setting Fine adjustment in 1 A steps below maximum value set on dial Time delay s tr keypad setting 0 5 1 2 4 8 16 accuracy 0 to 20 15xlr 15 25 50 100 200 400 6xIr 0 5 1 2 4 8 16 7 2xir 0 35 0 7 1 4 2 8 5 5 11 Thermal memory 20 minutes before and after tripping Pick up A Isd Irx dial setting 1 5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 accuracy 10 Fine adjustment in 0
236. ologic built in LCD display showing an energy measurement Main Menu Quick View Y DEE FDM121 display navigation DB112132 DB112134 64 kW 14397 kWh 38 kVar 8325 kVarh 13035 KVAh Power Consumption Examples of measurement screens on the FDM121 display unit Power Meter functions Electronic Micrologic5 6AorE Micrologic Aand E measurement functions are made possible by Micrologic intelligence and the accuracy ofthe sensors They are handled by a microprocessor that operates independent of protection functions Displays K Micrologic LCD The user can display all the protection settings and the main measurements on the LCD screen of the trip unit m Micrologic A instantaneous rms current measurements m Micrologic E voltage frequency and power measurements and energy metering in addition to the measurements offered by Micrologic A To make the display available under all conditions and increase operating comfort an external power supply is recommended for Micrologic A It is indispensable to m display faults and interrupted current measurements m use all the functions of Micrologic E e g metering of low power and energy values m ensure operation of the communication system The external power supply can be shared by several devices For description see page A 32 FDM121 display unit An FDM121 switchboard display unit can be connected to a Microl
237. ompact Basic frame Compact NSX400 3P 4P NSX400N 50 kA 380 415 V LV432403 LV432408 NSX400H 70 kA 380 415 V LV432404 LV432409 NSX400S 100 kA 380 415 V LV432414 LV432416 NSX400L 150 kA 380 415 V LV432405 LV432410 Compact NSX630 3P 4P NSX630N 50 kA 380 415 V LV432803 LV432808 NSX630H 70 kA 380 415 V LV432804 LV432809 NSX630S 100 kA 380 415 V LV432814 LV432816 NSX630L 150 kA 380 415 V LV432805 LV432810 Micrologic 2 3 LS protection Rating 3P 3d 4P 3d Ad 3d N 2 Micrologic 2 3 250 A LV432082 LV432086 Micrologic 2 3 400 A LV432081 LV432085 Micrologic 2 3 630 A LV432080 LV432084 Micrologic 5 3 A LSI protection ammeter Rating 3P 3d 4P 3d 4d 3d N 2 3d OSN Micrologic 5 3 A 400 A LV432091 LV432094 Micrologic 5 3 A 630 A LV432090 LV432093 Micrologic 5 3 E LSI protection energy meter Rating 3P 3d 4P 3d 4d 3d N 2 3d OSN Micrologic 5 3 E 400 A LV432097 LV432100 Micrologic 5 3 E 630A LV432096 LV432099 Micrologic 6 3 A LSIG protection ammeter Rating 3P 3d 4P 3d 4d 3d N 2 3d OSN Micrologic 6 3 A 400 A LV432103 LV432106 Micrologic 6 3 A 630 A LV432102 LV432105 Micrologic 6 3 E LSIG protection energy meter Rating 3P 3d 4P 3d 4d 3d N 2 3d OSN Micrologic 6 3 E 400 A LV432109 LV432112 Micrologic 6 3 E 630 A LV432108 LV432111 Micrologic 1 3 M I protection Rating 3P 3d 4P 3d Micrologic 1 3 M 320 A LV432069 LV432078 Micrologic 1 3 M 500 A LV432068 LV432077 Micrologi
238. on 2 0 DB111483 DB111482 DB111484 DB111485 Catalogue numbers Accessories cont Compact and Vigicompact NSX400 630 cont Locks Toggle locking device for 1 to 3 padlocks GR By removable device By fixed device Locking of rotary handle gt Keylock adapter keylock not included Keylock keylock adapter not included Ronis 1351B 500 _Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z Locking of motor mechanism module Keylock adapter keylock not included Keylock keylock adapter not included Ronis 1351B 500 Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z Schneider version 2 0 29370 Lv432631 LV432604 41940 42888 LV432649 41940 42888 559E6200 indd DB111486 DB111487 DB112268 DB111489 DB111490 DB115615 DB111491 Catalogue numbers Accessories cont Compact and Vigicompact NSX400 630 cont Interlocking Mechanical interlocking for circuit breakers With toggles LV432614 With rotary handles Lv432621 Interlocking with key 2 keylocks 1 key for rotary handles N R IN BR x Keylock kit keylock not included LV432604 1 set of 2 keylocks Ronis 1351B 500 41950 1 key only keylock kit not included Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z 42878 Installation accessories Front panel escutcheons IP40 escutcheon for all control types LV432558 IP40 escutcheon for Vigi module LV429316 IP40 escutcheon for Vigi or ammeter module LV42931
239. on is identical to that of a standard motor mechanism Applications m Local motor driven operation centralised operation automatic distribution control m Normal standby source changeover or switching to a replacement source to ensure availability or optimise energy costs m Load shedding and reconnection m Synchrocoupling Operation The type of operation is selected using the manual auto mode selection switch 7 Atransparent lead seal cover controls access to the switch Automatic When the switch is in the auto position the ON OFF I O buttons and the charging lever on the mechanism are locked m Circuit breaker ON and OFF controlled by two impulse type or maintained signals m Automatic spring charging following voluntary tripping by MN or MX with standard wiring m Mandatory manual reset following tripping due to an electrical fault Manual When the switch is in the manual position the ON OFF I O buttons may be used Amicroswitch linked to the manual position can remote the information m Circuit breaker ON and OFF controlled by 2 pushbuttons I O m Recharging of stored energy system by pumping the lever 8 times m Padlocking in OFF position Installation and connections All installation fixed plug in withdrawable and connection possibilities are maintained Motor mechanism module connections are made behind its front cover to integrated terminals for cables up to 2 5 mm Optional accessories m Ke
240. on ofthe interrupted current according to test results stored in memory It is made up of a coil wound around an iron frame through which a power busbar runs The current flowing in the bar on passing through the sensor induces a magnetic field that reverses for each half period This variation in the field in turn creates an induced current in the coil This current is proportional to the current flowing in the bar It is sufficient to supply the measurement electronics The disadvantage of iron core measurement current transformers CT is that they rapidly saturate for currents gt 10 In Schneider version 1 0 559E7100 indd Electric 8 Current transformer with Rogowski toroid or air core CT Demand current demand power and peak values Instantaneous current Instantaneous voltage Maximeters minimeters Overvoltage category OVC Overvoltage category IEC 60947 1 Annex H Percent load Phase sequence Power and energy metering consumption Time stamped histories Ground fault protection G Ig Instantaneous protection li Long time protection L Ir Magnetic protection Im 559E7100 indd It is made up of a coil without an iron frame through which a power busbar runs The output voltage at the coil terminals is proportional to the current flowing through the bar The result is a current transformer CT with a voltage output The advantage is that it never saturates whatever the primary current and
241. oncerning the restriction of hazardous substances RoHS Product environment profiles PEP have been prepared describing the environmental impact of every product throughout its life cycle from production to the end of its service life All Compact NSX production sites have set up an environmental management system certified ISO 14001 Each factory monitors the impact of its production processes Every effort is made to prevent pollution and to reduce consumption of natural resources Ambient temperature m Compact NSX circuit breakers may be used between 25 C and 70 C For temperatures higher than 40 C 65 C for circuit breakers used to protect motor feeders devices must be derated pages B 8 and B 9 m Circuit breakers should be put into service under normal ambient operating temperature conditions Exceptionally the circuit breaker may be put into service when the ambient temperature is between 35 C and 25 C m The permissible storage temperature range for Compact NSX circuit breakers in the original packing is 50 C 1 and 85 C 1 40 C for Micrologic control units with an LCD screen Schneider version 1 0 559E1100 indd Electric PB103578 53 DB112093 Schneider 559E1100 indd Electromagnetic compatibility Compact NSX devices are protected against m overvoltages caused by circuit switching e g lighting circuits m overvoltages caused by atmospheric disturbances m devices emitting
242. ooocoooooo Micrologic 5 6 Motor mechanism irotary handle Communicating motor mechanism DB115597 UU E A Buien EH NSX cord imi ar nAi ir F NSX cord I BSCM o rT N k N P N N g CEG nelnansununananunnenananuen nen 559E1860 indd Schneider version 1 0 DB112162 DB112167 DB111376 Functions and characteristics Plug in withdrawable Compact NSX Automatic auxiliary connector Fixed part DB115601 Moving part lt Accessories and auxiliaries Connection of electrical auxiliaries Fixed Compact NSX Auxiliary circuits exit the device through a knock out in the front cover Withdrawable or plug in Compact NSX Automatic auxiliary connectors Auxiliary circuits exit the circuit breaker via one to three automatic auxiliary connectors nine wires each These are made up of m a moving part connected to the circuit breaker via a support one support per circuit breaker m afixed part mounted on the plug in base equipped with connectors for bare cables up to 2 5 mm Micrologic trip unit options are also wired via the automatic auxiliary connectors Selection of automatic auxiliary connectors Depending on the functions installed one to thre
243. opens the circuit breaker if a phase unbalance occurs m that is greater than the lunbal pick up that can be fine adjusted from 10 to 40 30 by default m following the tunbal time delay that is 0 7 s during starting adjustable from 1 to 10 seconds 4 seconds by default during normal operation Phase loss is an extreme case of phase unbalance and leads to tripping under the same conditions Locked rotor ljam This function detects locking of the motor shaft caused by the load During motor starting see page A 43 the function is disabled During normal operation it causes tripping m above the ljam pick up that can be fine adjusted from 1 to 8 x Ir m in conjunction with the tjam time delay that can be adjusted from 1 to 30 seconds Under load lund This function detects motor no load operation due to insufficient load e g a drained pump It detects phase undercurrent During motor starting see page A 43 the function is always enabled During normal operation it causes tripping m below the lund pick up that can be fine adjusted from 0 3 to 0 9 x Ir m in conjunction with the tund time delay that can be adjusted from 1 to 200 seconds Long starts llong This protection supplements thermal protection class It is used to better adjust protection to the starting parameters It detects abnormal motor starting i e when the starting current remains too high or too low with respect to a pick u
244. p value and a time delay It causes tripping m in relation with a Ilong pick up that can be fine adjusted from 1 to 8 x Ir m in conjunction with the tlong time delay that can be adjusted from 1 to 200 seconds see long starts page A 43 es Display of type of fault z444u44s440n nn On a fault trip the type of fault Ir Isd li Ig lunbal Ijam the phase concerned and the interrupted current are displayed Indicatlions ass Front indications m Green Ready LED flashes slowly when the circuit breaker is ready to trip in the SDTAM remote indication relay module event of a fault with its terminal block m Red alarm LED for motor operation goes ON when the thermal image of the rotor or stator is greater than 95 of the permissible temperature rise Note all the trip units have a transparent lead sealable cover Remote indications via SDTAM or SDx module that protects access to the adjustment dials See description on page A 42 for SDTAM and page A 81 for SDx Schneider version 1 0 559E1500 indd Electric Micrologic 6 2 6 3 E M Circuit breaker Compact NSX100 Compact NSX160 Compact NSX250 7 a u 7 a Compact NSX400 Compact NSX630 L Pick up A Ir Dial setting Value depending on trip unit rating In and setting on dial Tripping between In 25A Ir 12 14 16 18 20 22 23 24 25 1 05 and 1 20 Ir In 50A I
245. page A 14 peo ecereece cece eee eee eee eee ee Protection of motors AC 220 690 V page A 36 Protection of special applications page A 48 Control and isolation using switch disconnectors page A 56 Source changeover systems page A 60 559E1100 indd Compact NSX devices are equipped with MA or TM thermal magnetic trip units or Micrologic 2 5 6 electronic trip units to provide protection against short circuits and overloads for m distribution systems supplied by transformers m distribution systems supplied by engine generator sets m long cables in IT and TN systems The Compact NSX range includes a number of versions to protect motor applications m basic short circuit protection with MA magnetic trip units or the electronic Micrologic 1 M version combined with an external relay to provide thermal protection m protection against overloads short circuits and phase unbalance or loss with Micrologic 2 M trip units Special applications The Compact NSX range offers a number of versions for special protection applications m service connection to public distribution systems gt page A 48 m generators gt page A 50 m industrial control panels gt page A 52 with o compliance with international standards IEC 60947 2 and UL 508 CSA 22 2 N14 o compliance with US standard UL 489 o installation in universal and functional enclosures m 16 Hz 2 3 systems gt page A 53 m 400 Hz systems g
246. page application for graphic display of currents and voltages and viewing of circuit breaker status and power and energy values To use the application simply declare the Modbus addresses of the connected slaves Automatically recognised devices include all Masterpact and Compact NSX Micrologic trip units and the PM500 700 800 and PM9c power monitoring units m Can be used for automatic alarm notification via a messaging server available on the site intranet or via mobile phones e mail converted into SMS m Can be used for logging of data that can be automatically sent as e mail attachments e g a weekly consumption report Web page 559E1300 indd Schneider version 1 0 DB112216 DB112217 DB112215 Functions and characteristics Two utilities RSU and RCU are available to assist in starting up a communicating installation They can be downloaded from the Schneider Electric internet site and include a Live update function that enables immediate updating een on Peon Bei alae 5 poner a Fi Penne wine o Gh em nenn J an EE Ban D ns A oea rere E wns ep tow wes RSU Micrologic Remote Setting Utility mom Hinten guten Ste Lamm Ae few nee WI PK we UM ma Cee THD iied Cot bea RCU Remote Control Utility for communication tests Compact NSX communication RSU and RCU utilities RSU Remote Setting Utility This utility is used to
247. ping combined with an emergency off button provides fail safe tripping The MN release is continuously supplied i e if supply is interrupted m either voluntarily by the emergency off button m or accidentally through loss of power or faulty wiring the release provokes opening of the circuit breaker Opening conditions Circuit breaker tripping by an MN release meets the requirements of standard IEC 60947 2 m Automatic opening of the circuit breaker is ensured when the continuous voltage supply to the release U lt 0 35 x Un m f the supply voltage is between 0 35 and 0 7 Un opening is possible but not guaranteed Above 0 7 Un opening does not take place Closing conditions If there is no supply to the MN release it is impossible to close the circuit breaker either manually or electrically Closing is ensured when the voltage supply to the release U 2 0 85 x Un Below this threshold closing is not guaranteed Characteristics 0 85 1 1 Un Closing conditions of the MN release Delayed trip order E 7 10 12 Time delay 2 my O O 3 6 Instantaneous trip order 4 4 O D2 a 2 i D1 MN release with a time delay unit Wiring diagram for emergency off function with MN time delay unit Possible opening Failsafe opening 0 0 7 1 1 Un Opening conditions of the MX release Note circuit breaker opening using an MN or MX release must be reserved for safety functions This type of tri
248. pping increases wear on the opening mechanism Repeated use reduces the mechanical endurance of the circuit breaker by 50 559E1880 indd Power supply VAC 50 60 Hz 24 48 100 130 200 240 50 Hz 380 415 60 Hz 208 277 VDC 12 24 30 48 60 125 250 Operating threshold Opening 0 35 to 0 7 Un Closing 0 85 Un Operating range 0 85 to 1 1 Un Consumption VA or W Pick up 30 Hold 5 Response time ms 50 Time delay unit for an MN release A time delay unit for the MN release eliminates the risk of nuisance tripping due to a transient voltage dip lasting lt 200 ms For shorter micro outages a system of capacitors provides temporary supply to the MN at U gt 0 7 to ensure non tripping The correspondence between MN releases and time delay units is shown below Unit with fixed delay 200 ms 48 VAC 48 VDC 220 240 VAC 250 V DC Unit with adjustable delay lt 200 ms 48 60 V AC DC 48V DC 100 130 VAC DC 125 V DC 220 250 V AC DC 250 V DC MX shunt release The MX release opens the circuit breaker via an impulse type 2 20 ms or maintained order Opening conditions When the MX release is supplied it automatically opens the circuit breaker Opening is ensured for a voltage U 2 0 7 x Un Characteristics Power supply VAC 50 60 Hz 24 48 100 130 200 240 50 Hz 380 415 60 Hz 208 277 VDC 12 24 30 48 60 125 250 Operating range 0 7 to 1 1 Un Consumption
249. protection and alarm settings m time stamped histories and event tables m maintenance indicators Communication components and connections Modbus DB115568 Connections 1 Modbus network m Compact NSX is connected to the Modbus interface or 2 Modbus interface FDM121 display unit via the internal terminal block forthe NSX 3 NSX cord cord equipped with an RJ45 connector 4 Internal terminal block for communication via NSX cord o cord available in three lengths 0 35 m 1 3m and 3 m 5 BSCM module o insulated 0 35 m version for installations gt 480 VAC 6 Prefabricated wiring o lengths up to 10 m possible using extensions 7 Micrologic trip unit m The FDM121 display unit is connected to the Modbus 8 FDM121 display interface by a communication cable with RJ45 connectors on 9 RJ45 cable both ends 10 Line terminator on unused connector if applicable Schneider version 1 0 559E1300 indd Electric DB112035 teeeeeereeeeeeceeceecocccococececeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeccecceceeeeseceseeseeeeeeeeeeeee DB112084 Modbus interface module Functions This module required for connection to the network contains the Modbus address 1 to 99 declared by the user via the two dials in front It automatically adapts baud rate parity to the Modbus network in which it is installed Itis equipped with a lock out switch to enable or disable operations involving writing to Micrologic i e reset counter reset setting modi
250. r 25 30 32 36 40 42 45 47 50 In 80A Ir 35 42 47 52 57 60 65 72 80 In 150A Ir 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 In 220A Ir 100 120 140 155 170 185 200 210 220 In 320A Ir 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 In 500A Ir 250 280 320 350 380 400 440 470 500 Keypad setting Fine adjustments in 1 Asteps below maximum value defined by dial setting Trip class as per IEC 60947 4 1 5 10 20 30 Time delay s tr 15xlr 120 240 480 720 for warm motor depending on selected trip class 6xIr 6 5 135 26 38 for cold motor t2xl 5 10 20 30 for cold motor Thermal memory 20 minutes before and after tripping Cooling fan Settings for self cooled or fan cooled motors E Short circuits Short time protection with fixed time delay Pick up A Isd Irx 5 6 7 8 9 10 ad 12 13 accuracy 15 Time delay ms tsd non adjustable Non tripping time 20 Maximum break time 60 E Short circuits Non adjustable instantaneous protection Pick up A li non adjustable 425 750 1200 2250 3300 4800 6500 accuracy 15 Non tripping time Oms Maximum break time 30 ms Fel Groundfautts Pick up A Ig Inx Dial setting accuracy 10 In 25A Ig 0 6 0 6 0 6 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 Off In 50A Ig 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 Off In gt 50A Ig 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 off fine adjustments in 0 05 x In steps Time delay ms tg 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 Non tripping time 20 80 140 230 350 Maximum break time 80 140 200 320 500 Phase unbalance or phase loss Pick up A lunbal in average curren
251. r each device locking of the Modbus interface module which must be unlocked before the corresponding device can be set remotely maximum settings limited by the positions of the two dials on the trip unit These dials set by the user determine the maximum settings that can be made via the communication system m Settings are modified by either direct on line setting ofthe protection settings on the screen or by loading the settings prepared in off line mode This is possible only if the positions of the dials allow the new settings All manual settings made subsequently on the device have priority Program alarms m Up to 12 alarms can be linked to measurements or events m two alarms are predefined and activated automatically Micrologic 5 overload Ir Micrologic 6 overload Ir and ground fault Ig m thresholds priorities and time delays can be set for 10 other alarms They may be selected from a list of 91 alarms Set the outputs of the SDx relays This is required when the user wants to change the standard configuration and assign different signals to the 2 outputs of the SDx relay RCU Remote Control Utility The RCU utility can be used to test communication for all the devices connected to the Modbus network It is designed for use with Compact NSX Masterpact Advantys OTB and Power Meter devices It offers a number of functions Mini supervisor m Display of
252. r fixed and plug in withdrawable versions and cover all applications up to 1000 V They exist forthe 100 to 250 A and 400 630 A ratings in long and short versions DB111348 Long terminal shields Short terminal shields 1 1 Partially cut removable squares 2 Grids with break marks Assembled with captive screws Interphase barriers Rear insulating screens Insulation of live parts Terminal shields Insulating accessories used for protection against direct contact with power circuits They provide IP40 degree of protection and IKO7 mechanical impact protection Terminal shield types Compact NSX100 to 250 and NSX400 630 3P or 4P can be equipped with m short terminal shields m long terminal shields All terminal shields have holes or knock outs in front for voltage presence indicators Short terminal shields They are used with m plug in and withdrawable versions in all connection configurations m fixed versions with rear connection Long terminal shields They are used for front connection with cables or insulated bars They comprise two parts assembled with captive screws forming an IP40 cover m The top part is equipped with sliding grids with break marks for precise adaptation to cables or insulated bars m The rear part completely blocks off the connection zone Partially cut squares can be removed to adapt to all types of connection for cables with lugs or copper bars Long term
253. r of Schneider voltimum Electric CO UK www schneider electric co uk SE 6375 OCT 2008
254. r solutions using m three devices including an MA or 1 3 M magnetic only trip unit m two devices including a TM D or 2 M thermal magnetic trip unit They are designed for use with contactors in the AC3 utilisation category 80 of all cases and they ensure type 2 coordination with the contactor For the AC4 utilisation category the difficult conditions generally make it necessary to oversize the protection circuit breaker with respect to the AC3 category Compact NSX circuit breaker NSX100 160 250 Compact NSX motor feeder solutions Compact NSX motor protection range Compact NSX trip units can be used to create motor feeder solutions comprising two or three devices The protection devices are designed for continuous duty at 65 C Three device solutions m 1 NSX circuit breaker with an MA or Micrologic 1 3 M trip unit m 1 contactor m 1 thermal relay Two device solutions m 1 Compact NSX circuit breaker o with a Micrologic 2 2 M or 2 3 M electronic trip unit o with a Micrologic 6 E M electronic trip unit This version offers additional protection and Power Meter functions m 1 contactor NSX400 630 NSX100 to 630 Type 2 coordination with Contactor thermal relay Contactor Trip unit Type MA Micrologic 1 3 M Micrologic 2 M Micrologic 6 E M Technology Magnetic Electronic Electronic Electronic Thermal relay Separate Built in class 5 10 20 3
255. r toggle DB115022 DB115023 DB115024 35 DB115026 DB115027 DB115028 I 35 Circuit breaker with toggle or rotary handle DB115029 lt 63 Circuit breaker with motor mechanism module DB115031 DB115032 DB115120 B3 lt C Type A A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 B B1 B2 B3 c NSX100 160 250 113 138 114 101 73 85 113 15 9 103 40 NSX400 630 163 215 164 151 122 5 138 163 189 122 5 138 60 559E3200 indd Schneider version 1 0 Dimensions and Front panel cutouts connection Compact NSX100 to 630 fixed version Bare sheet metal NSX100 to 250 NSX400 630 For toggle Br one j i ur Pa gt 63 5 127 z For toggle with access to trip unit DB115040 DB115041 DB115042 DB115043 DB115044 DB115045 DB115038 DB115039 pem z For toggle with access to trip unit DB115062 DB115063 DB115042 DB115043 Schgeider re 559E3300 indd DB115064 DB115068 With IP40 front panel escutcheon NSX100 to 250 NSX400 630 For toggle DB115065 DB115066 DB115067 ee lt lt 180 gt With IP43 toggle cover NSX100 to 250 NSX400 6
256. rances and the protection system suffers no damage Value indicating the capacity of the device to make and carry a high current without repulsion of the contacts It is expressed in kA peak This capability means that the circuit breaker meets the conditions below m Inthe open position it must withstand without flashover between the upstream and downstream contacts the impulse voltage specified by the standard as a function of the Uimp indicated on the device m It must indicate contact position by one or more of the following systems position of the operating handle separate mechanical indicator visible break of the moving contacts m Leakage current between each pole with the contacts open at a test voltage of 1 1 x the rated operating voltage must not exceed 0 5 mA per pole for new devices 2 mA per pole for devices already subjected to normal switching operations 6 mA the maximum value that must never be exceeded m It must not be possible to install padlocks unless the contacts are open Locking in the closed position is permissible for special applications Compact NSX complies with this requirement by positive contact indication Suitability for isolation is defined here by the mechanical reliability of the position indicator of the operating mechanism where m the isolation position corresponds to the O OFF position m the operating handle cannot indicate the OFF position un
257. re increase the temperature of the device To avoid reaching the thermal withstand level of the equipment it is necessary to limit the current flowing through the device i e the maximum Ir setting as a function of the temperature Compact NSX100 160 250 The table below indicates the maximum long time LT protection setting Ir A depending on the ambient temperature NSX100 160 Fixed plug inor 40 no derating withdr 100 no derating NSX250 Fixed plug inor 100 no derating withdrawable 160 no derating Fixed 250 250 250 250 245 237 230 225 Plug in or withdr 250 250 245 237 230 225 220 215 Compact NSX400 and 630 The table below indicates the maximum long time LT protection setting Ir A depending on the ambient temperature NSX400 Fixed 400 400 400 400 390 380 370 360 Plug in withdr 400 400 390 380 370 360 350 340 NSX630 Fixed 630 630 615 600 585 570 550 535 Plug in withdr 630 570 550 535 520 505 490 475 Example A fixed Compact NSX400 equipped with a Micrologic can have a maximum Ir setting of m 400A up to 50 C m 380A up to 60 C Additional derating coefficient for an add on module For fixed or plug in withdrawable circuit breakers the addition of a m Vigi module m insulation monitoring module m ammeter module m current transformer module can modify the derating values Apply the coefficients shown below Derating of aCompact NSX equipped with a Micrologic trip unit
258. reach IP56 protection against dust and powerful water jets depending on the installation conditions Defines the aptitude of an object to resist mechanical impacts on all sides indicated by a number from 0 to 10 standard IEC 62262 Each number corresponds to the impact energy in Joules that the object can handle according to a standardised procedure 0 corresponds to no protection 1 to an impact energy of 0 14 Joules 10 to an impact energy of 20 Joules Compact NSX provide IK07 2 Joules and can provide IK08 5 Joules depending on the installation conditions The term durability is used in the standards instead of endurance to express the expectancy of the number of operating cycles which can be performed by the equipment before repair or replacement of parts The term endurance is used for specifically defined operational performance With respect to its resistance to electrical wear equipment is characterised by the number of on load operating cycles corresponding to the service conditions given in the relevant product standard which can be made without re replacement Schneider version 1 0 559E7100 indd Electric 8 Frame size Insulation class Making capacity Maximum break time Mechanical durability Non tripping time Pollution degree of environment conditions IEC 60947 1 IEC 60664 1 Prospective short circuit current Rated current In Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp Rated insulatio
259. rizontally m Degree of protection IP40 IK04 m Class Il insulation between front and the power circuits Electrical characteristics m Ammeter module accuracy class 4 5 m Imax ammeter module accuracy 6 m Maximum currents are displayed only if they last 2 15 minutes Schneider version 1 0 559E1880 indd Electric PB103602 32 Insulation monitoring module 559E1880 indd Insulation monitoring module This module detects and indicates an insulation drop on a load circuit TN S or TT systems Operation is identical to that of a Vigi module but without circuit breaker tripping Indication by a red LED in front An auxiliary contact may be installed for remote insulation drop indications When insulation drops below a minimum user set threshold the LED goes on and the auxiliary contact switches The fault indication cannot be cancelled except by pressing the manual reset button Installation m The module is installed directly on the downstream circuit breaker terminals m Degree of protection IP40 IK04 m Double insulation of the front face Electrical characteristics m Settings 100 200 500 1000 mA m Accuracy 50 0 m Time delay following insulation drop 5 to 10 seconds m AC system voltage 200 to 440 VAC Schneider version 1 0 DB111364 DB111363 Functions and characteristics DB111365 Toggle locking using padlocks and an accessory Removable device Rotary handl
260. rmation can be used to optimise use of the protected equipment or to plan ahead for extensions Schneider Electric 559E1200 indd version 1 0 PB103582 PB103581 31 Functions and characteristics Micrologic measurement capabilities come into full play with the FDM121 switchboard display It connects to Compact NSX via a simple cord and displays Micrologic information The result is a true integrated unit combining a circuit breaker and a Power Meter Additional operating assistance functions can also be displayed PB103807 32 FDM121 display Surface mount accessory Connection with FDM121 display unit Switchboard display functions Micrologic 5 6 AorE trip units FDM121 switchboard display The FDM121 is a switchboard display unit that can be integrated in the Compact NSX100 to 630 A system It uses the sensors and processing capacity ofthe Micrologic trip unit It is easy to use and requires no special software or settings It is immediately operational when connected to the Compact NSX by a simple cord The FDM121 is a large display but requires very little depth The anti glare graphic screen is backlit for very easy reading even under poor ambient lighting and at sharp angles Display of Micrologic measurements and alarms The FDM121 is intended to display Micrologic 5 6 measurements alarms and operating information It cannot be used to modify the protection settings Measurements may be easily ac
261. rotection supplements Isd It provokes instantaneous opening of the device The pick up may be adjustable or fixed built in This value is always lower than the contact repulsion level gt A 19 Protection function where the adjustable Ir pick up determines a protection curve similar to the thermal protection curve inverse time curve I t The curve is generally determined on the basis of the Ir setting which corresponds to a theoretically infinite tripping time asymptote and of the point at 6 Ir at which the tripping time depends on the rating gt A 19 Short circuit protection provided by magnetic trip units see this term The pick up setting may be fixed or adjustable gt A 4 version 1 0 Schneider Electric Compact NSX Neutral protection IN gt A 16 Residual current earth leakage gt A 34 protection lAn Short delay protection S Isd gt A 19 Short delay protection with gt A 17 fixed time delay So Isd Thermal protection Ir BD A 15 Glossary The neutral is protected because all circuit breaker poles are interrupted The setting may be that used for the phases or specific to the neutral i e reduced neutral 0 5 times the phase current or OSN oversized neutral at 1 6 times the phase current For OSN protection the maximum device setting is limited to 0 63 In Protection provided by Vigi modules in which the residual current toroids directly detect low threshold earth leakage currents i
262. rrent Icu but only up to a lesser value This value is called the discrimination limit If a fault exceeds the discrimination limit both circuit breakers trip Discrimination based on the difference between the time delay settings of the circuit breakers The upstream trip unit is delayed to provide the downstream breaker the time required to clear the fault Total discrimination is ensured between upstream and downstream circuit breakers if for all fault values from overloads up to solid short circuits only the downstream circuit breaker trips and the upstream circuit breaker remains closed Anumber of circuit breakers with Micrologic electronic trip units are interconnected one after another by a pilot wire In the event of a short time or ground fault m in the absence of information from downstream the circuit breaker directly concerned by the fault i e located just upstream of the fault shifts to the shortest time delay and sends a signal upstream m the upstream device on receiving the signal from the downstream device maintains its normal time delay In this manner the fault is cleared rapidly by the circuit breaker closest to the fault Schneider version 1 0 559E7100 indd Electric 8 EMC Electromagnetic BA 5 compatibility Power loss gt B 10 Pole resistance Product environmental profile gt A 4 PEP LCA Life cycle assessment ISO 14040 Product environmental profile gt A 4 PEP Environmental indica
263. s Auxiliary contacts changeover F SDTAM contactor trip gt OF or SD or SDE or SDV OF or SD or SDE or SDV low level SDE adapter mandatory for trip unit TM MA or Micrologic 2 SDx output module for Micrologic SDx module 24 415 VAC DC ping module early break thermal fault signal for Micrologic 2 2 M 6 2 E M SDTAM 24 415 V AC DC overload fault indication Voltage AC 24 V 50 60 Hz 48 V 50 60 Hz 110 130 V 50 60 Hz 220 240 V 50 60 Hz and 208 277 V 60 Hz 380 415 V 50 Hz and 440 480 V 60 Hz 525 V 50 Hz and 600 V 60 Hz DC 12V 24V 30 V 48V 60 V 125V 250 V MN 48 V 50 60 Hz with fixed time delay Composed of MN 48 V DC Delay unit 48 V 50 60 Hz MN 220 240 V 50 60 Hz with fixed time delay Composed of MN 250 V DC Delay unit 220 240 V 50 60 Hz MN 48 V DC AC 50 60 Hz with adjustable time delay Composed of MN 48 V DC Delay unit 48 V 50 60 Hz MN110 130 V DC AC 50 60 Hz with adjustable time delay Composed of MN 125 V DC Delay unit 110 130 V 50 60 Hz MN 220 250 V 50 60 Hz with adjustable time delay Composed of MN 250 V DC Delay unit 220 250 V 50 60 Hz Schneider Electric MX LV429384 LV429385 LV429386 LV429387 LV429388 LV429389 LV429382 LV429390 LV429391 LV429392 LV429383 LV429393 LV429394 version 2 0 29450 29452 LV429451 LV429532 LV429424 LV429406 LV429407 LV429408 LV429409 LV429402 LV429410 LV429411 LV429412 LV429403 LV429413 LV429414 LV429412 LV429426
264. s at the end of the time delay m permanent latching In this case return to the initial state takes place via the communication function Static outputs 24 to 415 VAC V DC 80 mA max SDTAM module The SDTAM module is specifically for the motor protection Micrologic trip units 2 2 M 2 3 M and 6 2 E M 6 3 E M The SDTAM module linked to the contactor controller opens the contactor when an overload or other motor fault occurs thus avoiding opening of the circuit breaker Micrologic 2 M The SD4 output opens the contactor 400 ms before normal circuit breaker opening in the following cases m overload long time protection for the trip class m phase unbalance or phase loss The SD2 output serves to memorise contactor opening by SDTAM Micrologic 6 E M The SD4 output opens the contactor 400 ms before normal circuit breaker opening in the following cases m overload long time protection for the trip class m phase unbalance or phase loss m locked rotor m underload undercurrent protection m long start The SD2 output serves to memorise contactor opening by SDTAM Output characteristics Output reset can be m manual by a pushbutton included in the wiring diagram m automatic after an adjustable time delay 1 to 15 minutes to take into account the motor cooling time Static outputs 24 to 415 V AC V DC 80 mA max 24 to 415 V Manual _ Closing _ x reset spoT KAI order E KMI SD3 SD2
265. sary In a circuit equipped with a circuit breaker this function is carried out by an opening mechanism using an MN undervoltage release or an MX shunt release in conjunction with an emergency off button Rotary handle with an extended shaft to control devices installed atthe rear of switchboards thas the same characteristics as direct rotary handles It offers multiple locking possibilities using a keylock a padlock or a door interlock Remote tripping is carried out by an opening mechanism using an MN undervoltage release in conjunction with an emergency off button If power is lost the protection device opens the circuit breaker This is the standard control mechanism for the circuit breaker with a toggle that can be flipped up or down In a moulded case circuit breaker MCCB there are three positions ON O OFF and TRIPPED Once in the TRIPPED position manual reset is required by switching to O OFF position before reclosing The TRIPPED position does not offer isolation with positive contact indication This is guaranteed only by the O OFF position Handle used for motor control centres and providing IP43 and IK07 The optional motor mechanism module is used to remotely open close and recharge the circuit breaker Discrimination COSCO en Cascading Current discrimination Discrimination Energy discrimination Partial discrimination Time discrimination Total discrimination Zone selective interlocking
266. sibilities Interphase barriers or terminal shields are recommended They are mandatory for certain connection accessories in which case the interphase barriers are provided Bars When the switchboard configuration has not been tested insulated bars are mandatory Maximum size of bars Compact NSX circuit breaker 100 160 250 400 630 Without spreaders pitch mm 35 45 maximum bar size mm 20x2 32x6 With spreaders pitch mm 45 52 5 maximum bar size mm 32x2 40x6 Crimp lugs There are two models for aluminium and copper cables It is necessary to use narrow lugs compatible with device connections They must be used with interphase barriers or long terminal shields The lugs are supplied with interphase barriers and may be used for the types of cables listed below Cable sizes for connection using lugs Compact NSX circuit breaker 100 160 250 400 630 Copper cables size mm 120 150 180 240 300 crimping hexagonal barrels or punching Aluminium cables size mm 120 150 180 240 300 crimping hexagonal barrels Terminal extensions Extensions with anti rotation ribs can be attached to the standard terminals to provide numerous connection possibilities in little space m straight terminal extensions m right angle terminal extensions m edgewise terminal extensions m double L extensions m 45 extensions Spreaders Spreaders may be used to increase the pitch m NSX100 to 250 the 35 mm pitch c
267. t The trip class determines the trip curve of the thermal protection device for a motor feeder The standard defines trip classes 5 10 20 and 30 These classes are the maximum durations in seconds for motor starting with a starting current of 7 2 Ir where Ir is the thermal setting indicated on the motor rating plate This function steps in when the driven load is too low It detects a set minimum phase current which signals incorrect operation of the driven machine In the example of a pump under load protection detects when the pump is no longer primed 559E7100 indd version 1 0 Schneider Electric Compact NSX Glossary Electronic trip unit Micrologic gt A 16 Trip unit that continuously measures the current flowing through each phase and the neutral if it exists For Micrologic the measurements are provided by built in current sensors linked to an analog digital converter with a high sampling frequency The measurement values are continuously compared by the ASIC to the protection settings If a setting is overrun a Mitop release trips the circuit breaker operating mechanism This type of trip unit offers much better pick up and delay setting accuracy than thermal magnetic trip units It also provides a wider range of protection functions Magnetic release gt A 14 Release actuated by a coil or a lever Amajor increase in the current e g a short circuit produces in the coil or the lever a change in the magnetic field
268. t 2 adjustable from 10 to 40 default setting 30 accuracy 20 fine adjustments in 1 steps using the keypad activated during motor starting Time delay s tunbal 0 7 s during starting 1 to 10 seconds during normal operation default setting 4 seconds fine adjustments in 1 s steps using the keypad Pick up A Ijam Irx 1x8 Ir with Off position default setting Off accuracy 10 fine adjustments in 0 1 x Ir steps using the keypad disabled during motor starting Time delay s tjam 1 to 30 seconds fine adjustments in 1 s steps using the keypad default setting 5 s Pick up A lund Irx 0 3 x 0 9 Ir with Off position default setting Off accuracy 10 Fine adjustments in Ir x 0 01 steps using the RSU software activated during motor starting Time delay s tund 1 to 200 seconds fine adjustments in 1 s steps using the RSU software default setting 10 s Pick up A llong Irx 1x8 Ir with Off position default setting Off accuracy 10 Fine adjustments in Ir x 0 01 steps using the RSU software activated during motor starting Time delay s tlong 1 to 200 seconds fine adjustments in 1 s steps using the RSU software default setting 10 s 1 Motor standards require operation at 65 C Circuit breaker ratings are derated to take this requirement into account 2 The unbalance measurement takes into account the most unbalanced phase with respect to the average current 559E1500 in
269. t no Power supply VDC 5 24 30 54440 48 60 54441 100 125 54442 VAC 10 15 110 130 54443 200 240 54444 380 415 54445 Output voltage 24 V DC 5 Ripple 1 Overvoltage category OVC OVC IV as per IEC 60947 1 An external 24 V DC power supply module with an output current of 3 Ais also available Available external power supply modules Cat no Power supply VDC 110 230 VAC 110 240 ABL8RPS24030 Output voltage 24 V DC 5 Ripple 1 Overvoltage category OVC OVC II Total consumption To determine the required output current of the 24 V DC power supply it is necessary to sum up the currents consumed by the different loads supplied Consumption of Compact NSX modules Consumption mA Module Micrologic 5 6 20 BSCM module 10 FDM121 40 Modbus communication interface 60 NSX cord U gt 480 VAC 30 Schneider version 1 0 559E1400 indd Electric PB103790 20 PB103833 18 PB103799 24 PB103803 27 PB103794 32 DB115570 N Test battery cat no LV434206 _ n Battery module cat no 54446 J ee T 8 wer i e 24 V DC power supply NSX cord U gt 480 V terminal block cat no cat no LV434204 LV434210 Maintenance case cat no TRV00910 Configuration and maintenance module cat no TRV00911 Ir tr isd tsd li xin a O s ooeo Test connector P USB or Bluetooth si gt 110 240 V Using
270. t page A 54 A switch disconnector version of Compact NSX circuit breakers is available for circuit control and isolation All add on functions of Compact NSX circuit breakers may be combined with the basic switch disconnector function including m earth leakage protection m motor mechanism m ammeter etc To ensure a continuous supply of power some electrical installations are connected to two power sources m anormal source m a replacement source to supply the installation when the normal source is not available A mechanical and or electrical interlocking system between two circuit breakers or switch disconnectors avoids all risk of parallel connection ofthe sources during switching Schneider Electric They can be easily installed at all levels in distribution systems from the main LV switchboard to the subdistribution boards and enclosures All Compact NSX devices can protect against insulation faults by adding a Vigi module or Vigirex relay m more complete protection against overloads and short circuits with additional motor specific protection phase unbalance locked rotor underload and long start with Micrologic 6 E M trip units These versions also offer communication metering and operating assistance The exceptional limiting capacity of Compact NSX circuit breakers automatically provides type 2 coordination with the motor starter in compliance with standard IEC 60947 4 1 For allthese applications
271. t NSX630N 50 kA at 380 415 V 630A LV432893 LV432894 Electronic trip unit Micrologic 5 3 A LSI protection ammeter 8 3P 3d 4P 3d 4d 3d N 2 3d OSN Compact NSX400N 50 kA at 380 415 V 400A LV432699 LV432700 Compact NSX630N 50 kA at 380 415 V 630A LV432899 LV432900 5 3P 3d Compact NSX400N 1 3 M 50 kA at 380 415V 320A LV432749 Compact NSX630N 1 3 M 50 kA at 380 415V 500A LV432949 Electronic trip unit Micrologic 2 3 M LS I motor protection 5 3P 3d Compact NSX400N 2 3 M 50 kA at 380 415V 320A LV432776 2 Compact NSX630N 2 3 M 50 kA at 380 415V 500A LV432976 With electronic trip unit Micrologic 5 3 E LSI protection energy meter To be ordered with 2 catalogue numbers 1 basic frame 1 trip unit With electronic trip unit Micrologic 6 3 A LSIG protection ammeter To be ordered with 2 catalogue numbers 1 basic frame 1 trip unit With electronic trip unit Micrologic 6 3 E LSIG protection energy meter To be ordered with 2 catalogue numbers 1 basic frame 1 trip unit With electronic trip unit Micrologic 6 3 E M LSIG motor protection energy meter To be ordered with 2 catalogue numbers 1 basic frame 1 trip unit Schneider version 2 0 559E6200 indd ectric DB111455 DB111456 DB111457 DB111457 Catalogue numbers NSX400 630H complete fixed FC device Compact NSX400 630H 70 kA 380 415 V Compact NSX400 630H Electronic trip unit Micrologic 2 3 LS I protection Wit
272. t breaker terminals m Degree of protection IP40 IK04 m Class Il insulation between front and the power circuits m Built in connectors for cables from 1 5 to 2 5 mm Electrical characteristics m Rated operational voltage Ue 530 V m Frequencies of measured values 50 60 Hz m Three CTs with 5 A secondary windings for the rated primary current In class 0 5 to 1 for rated power consumption values at the output 125A 150 A and 250 A ratings class 1 for 1 1 VA 400 600 A rating class 0 5 for 2 VA Connection using a 2 5 mm2 cable up to 2 5 m long Four voltage measurement outputs including protection with automatic reset voltage measurement output impedance 3500 0 25 maximum current 1 mA The voltage measurement outputs are intended only for measurements 1 mA max and may not be used to supply the display Ammeter and Imax ammeter modules Ammeter module Measures and displays dial type ammeter the current of each phase selection of phases by 3 position switch in front Imax ammeter module Measures and displays dial type ammeter the maximum current flowing in the middle phase The Imax value can be reset on the front Installation m Identical for both types of ammeter module m The module is installed directly on the downstream circuit breaker terminals m The ammeter clips into the module in any of four 90 positions i e it can be installed of devices mounted both vertically and ho
273. t conditions make it necessary to oversize the contactor and in general the protective circuit breaker with respect to category AC3 DB115572 Functions and Motor protection characteristics Motor feeder characteristics and solutions The trip class determines the trip curve of Trip class of a thermal protection device the thermal protection device inverse time The motor feeder includes thermal protection that may be built into the circuit nn tie analiza Weiticrorstatingiine late foin stew seconce denen i P I ION I I var WwW z Standard IEC 60947 4 1 defines trip few dozen seconds high inertia load classes 5 10 20 and 30 Standard IEC 60947 4 1 defines the trip classes below as a function of current These classes are the maximum durations setting Ir for thermal protection in seconds for motor starting with a starting Trip class of thermal relays as a function of their Ir setting current of 7 2 Ir where Iris the thermal Class 1 051r 1 2 1r 0 1 5 Ir 2 7 21r setting indicated on the motor rating plate 5 t gt 2h t lt 2h t lt 2 mn 2s lt t lt 5s 10 t gt 2h t lt 2h t lt 4mn 4s lt ts10s 20 t gt 2h t lt 2h t lt 8mn 6s lt t lt 20s 30 t gt 2h t lt 2h t lt 12mn 9s lt t lt 30s 1 Time for a cold motor motor off and cold Example in lass 20 the motor must have finished 2 Time for warm motor motor running under normal conditions starting within 20 seconds 6 to 20 s for a starting current of 7 2 Ir
274. t s t s 2 2 j TM40D Im 12 x In i TM63D Im 8 x In 5 5 2 TM32D Im 12 5 x In 2 an a 4 1 05 05 02 02 01 gt t lt 10 ms 01 a t lt 10ms 005 005 002 002 001 001 571 2 345 7 10 20 30 5070100 200300 571 2 345 7 10 20 30 5070100 200300 lt i Ir Reflex tripping _ i I Ir version 1 0 559E5100 indd DB114763 DB114765 TM magnetic trip units cont TM80D TM100D 10 000 5 000 2 000 1 000 500 200 100 50 20 10 t s a N un a 05 02 01 005 002 001 5 71 2 345 7 10 l r Reflex tripping TM200D TM250D 10 000 5 000 2 000 1 000 500 200 100 50 20 10 t s gt N aa nN a 05 02 01 005 002 001 5 71 2 345 7 10 lllr Reflex tripping 559E5100 indd TM125D TM160D 10 000 5 000 DB114764 2 000 1 000 500 200 100 50 20 10 TM125D Im 10 x In t s arn ao TM160D TM80D TM100D Im 8xIn Im 8 xIn a N 05 02 01 005 gt gt 002 001 200 300 5 7 1 2 345 7 10 lt i lr 20 30 50 70100 20 30 5070100 200300 TM200D TM250D Im 5 10xIn gt 20 30 50 70100 200300 version 1 0 DB114766 DB114768 Additional characteristics Tripping curves Compact NSX100 to 250 Protection of distribution systems cont Micrologic 2 2 and 2 2 G electronic trip units
275. t source Stop both Normal and Replacement sources OFF Automatic operation Monitoring of the Normal source and automatic transfer from one source to the other Engine generator set start up control Delayed shutdown adjustable of engine generator set Load shedding and reconnection of non priority loads a Transfer to Replacement source if one of the Normal source phases a is absent Test By opening the P25M circuit breaker upstream of the controller By pressing the test button on the front ofthe controller Indications Circuit breaker status indication on the front ofthe controller ON OFF fault trip Automatic mode indication contact Other functions Selection of type of Normal source single phase or three phase Voluntary transfer to Replacement source Forced operation on Normal source if Replacement source is not operational Additional test contact not part of controller Transfer to Replacement source only if contact closed e g fora UR frequency check Setting of maximum start up time for the Replacement source a Power supply Control voltages 1 220 to 240 V 50 60 Hz 380 to 415 V 50 60 Hz a a 440 V 60 Hz a a Operating thresholds Undervoltage 0 35 Un lt voltage lt 0 7 Un m a Phase failure 0 5 Uns voltage lt 0 7 Un Voltage presence voltage 2 0 85 Un Characteristics of output contacts dry volt free contacts Rated thermal current A 8 Minimum load 10 mAat 12V AC DC Utilisa
276. tandards require operation at 65 C Circuit breaker ratings are derated to take this requirement into account 2 The unbalance measurement takes into account the most unbalanced phase with respect to the average current 11 U1 Additional technical characteristics Phase unbalance An unbalance in three phase systems occurs when the three voltages are not equal in amplitude and or not displaced 120 with respect to each other It is generally due to single phase loads that are incorrectly distributed throughout the system and unbalance the voltages between the phases 12 U2 These unbalances create negative current components that cause braking torques and temperature rise in asynchronous machines thus leading to premature ageing Phase loss Unbalance of phase currents and voltages Phase loss is a special case of phase unbalance m During normal operation it produces the effects mentioned above and tripping must occur t after four seconds A m During starting the absence of a phase may cause motor reversing i e it is the load that Motor off zone determines the direction of rotation This requires virtually immediate tripping 0 7 seconds Starting time in compliance with the class Micrologic 2 M For normal motor starting Micrologic 2 M checks the conditions below with respect to the thermal protection long time pick up Ir m current gt 10 x Ir motor off limit m overrun of 1 5 x Ir threshold then return below this thresh
277. teristics and performance of Compact NSX circuit breakers from 100 to 630A A 6 Compact NSX trip units A 8 Overview of trip units for Compact NSX A 10 Protection of distribution systems TM thermal magnetic and MA magnetic trip units A 14 Micrologic 2 and 1 3 M trip units A 16 Micrologic 5 6 AorE trip units A 18 Power Meter functions Electronic Micrologic 5 6 A or E A 20 Operating assistance functions Micrologic 5 6 Aor E trip units A 22 Switchboard display functions Micrologic 5 6 Aor E trip units A 24 Compact NSX communication Communications modules A 26 Networks and software A 28 RSU and RCU utilities A 30 Supervision software A 31 Accessories for Micrologic trip units A 32 Earth leakage protection Add on protection against insulation faults using a Vigi module or Vigirex relay A 34 Motor protection General information on motor feeders A 36 Motor feeder characteristics and solutions A 38 Compact NSX motor feeder solutions A 39 MA and Micrologic 1 3 M instantaneous trip units A 40 Micrologic 2 M electronic trip units A 42 Micrologic 6 E M electronic trip units A 44 Special applications Generator protection with Micrologic 2 2 G A 48 Protection of industrial control panels A 50 16 Hz 2 3 network protection A 51 Micrologic 5 A Z trip unit A 51 Protection of 400 Hz systems A 52 Switch disconnectors Overview of applications A 54 Switch disconnector functions A 55 Characteristics and performance of Compact NSX
278. thus enables measurement of high currents The output is however a very low current that is too low to supply the measurement electronics For Micrologic Rogowski CTs measure the current and a second CT with an iron core provides the electrical supply gt 10 Average of the instantaneous current or power values over an adjustable fixed or sliding time interval The highest value observed over the time interval is the peak value The time interval runs from the last reset gt aA 21 True rms value ofthe current measured by the current transformers over a sliding time interval Available on Micrologic 5 6 A or E gt A 21 True rms value of the voltage measured by the voltage sensors over a sliding time interval Available on Micrologic 5 6 A or E gt A 21 Micrologic 5 and 6 Aor E can record the minimum and maximum values of electrical parameters over set time periods gt A 20 Standard IEC 60664 1 stipulates that it is up to the user to select a measurement device with a sufficient overvoltage category depending on the network voltage and the transient overvoltages likely to occur Four overvoltage categories define the field of use for a device m Cat Devices supplied by a SELV isolating transformer or a battery m Cat II Residential distribution handheld or laboratory tools and devices connected to standardised 2P earth electrical outlets 230 V m Cat Ill Industrial distribution fixed distribution circui
279. tion A Compact NSX NA is combined with an MN or MX release connected to an emergency off button In an emergency an operator at a remote location can interrupt the circuit at rated load to isolate the entire switchboard and the downstream loads Motor mechanism Compact NSX NA devices equipped with a motor mechanism module enable remote closing and opening This function may be combined with the emergency off function In this case the emergency off function is combined with a closing lock out that must be intentionally reset electrical diagram with closing lock out Earth leakage protection AVigi module may be added to a switch disconnector to monitor all leakage currents in the outgoing circuits of the switchboard on which the switch disconnector is installed When the Vigi module detects an earth leakage current the switch disconnector interrupts the load current This function may be combined with the motor mechanism and the emergency off function using an MN or MX release Switch disconnector protection The switch disconnector can make and break its rated current For an overload or a short circuit it must be protected by an upstream device in compliance with installation standards The circuit breaker switch disconnector coordination tables determine the required upstream circuit breaker However due to their high set magnetic release Compact NSX100 to 630 A switch disconnectors are self protected Switch disconnector util
280. tion category IEC 60947 5 1 AC12 AC13 AC14 AC15 DC12 DC13 Operational current A 24 V 8 T 5 6 8 2 48 V 8 7 5 5 2 110V 8 6 4 4 0 6 220 240 V 8 6 4 3 250 V 0 4 380 415 V 5 440 V 4 660 690 V 1 The controller is powered by the ACP auxiliaries control plate The same voltage must be used for the ACP plate the IVE unit and the circuit breaker operating mechanisms If this voltage is the same as the source voltage then the Normal and Replacement sources can be used directly for the power supply If not an isolation transformer must be used version 1 0 Functions and Accessories and auxiliaries characteristics Overview of Compact NSX100 to 630 fixed version Insulation accessories p gt A 73 DB115581 Interphase barriers Sealable terminal shields Electrical auxiliaries p gt A 80 A Voltage release SDTAM module SDx module Protection and measurements gt A 86 Micrologic 2 trip unit Vigi module Current transformer module TM D TM G trip unit Ammeter module Schneider version 1 0 559E1800 indd v soon 000000000 559E1800 indd Connection p A 70 of eve ghe Terminal extensions gt Q Cable connectors Te One piece spreader g IT Rear connectors Communication and display p gt A 26 BSCM module Modbus interface FDM121 Control accessor
281. to 10 Ir 60 to 400 A The instantaneous pick up remains at 3000 A OF auxiliary contacts in 400 Hz networks Electrical characteristics of auxiliary contacts Contacts Standard Low level Utilisation cat IEC 60947 5 1 AC12 AC15 CA12 CA15 Operational current 24 V 6 6 5 3 A 48V 5 3 110 V 6 5 5 25 220 240 V 6 4 5 2 380 415 V 6 2 5 1 5 MN and MX voltage releases for Compact NSX 100 630 at 400 Hz and 440 V For circuit breakers on 400 Hz systems only 125 VDC MN or MX releases may be used The release must be supplied by the 400 Hz system via a rectifier bridge to be selected from the table below and an additional resistor with characteristics depending on the system voltage U V 400 Hz Rectifier Additional resistor 220 240 V Thomson 110 BHz or 4 2 k0 5W General Instrument W06 or Semikron SKB at 1 2 1 3 380 420 V Semikron SKB at 1 2 1 3 10 7 k0 10 W Note other models of rectifier bridges may be used if their characteristics are at least equivalent to those stated above SDx indication contacts The SDx module may be used in 400 Hz systems for voltages from 24 to 440 V An SDx relay module installed inside the circuit breaker can be used to remote the overload trip signal This module receives the signal from the Micrologic electronic trip unit via an optical link and makes it available on the terminal block The signal is cleared when the circuit breaker is closed These outputs can be reprogramm
282. to 250 NSX400 630 DB111500 DB115225 Distribution connector for Polybloc 100 160 A and 250A NSX100 to 250 distribution blocks Four positions Two lengths E DB111330 Connection of bare cables to NSX100 to 250 559E1840 indd Bare cables For bare cables without lugs the prefabricated bare cable connectors may be used for both copper and aluminium cables 1 cable connectors for Compact NSX100 to 250 The connectors snap directly on to the device terminals or are secured by clips to right angle and straight terminal extensions as well as spreaders 1 cable connectors for Compact NSX400 to 630 The connectors are screwed directly to the device terminals 2 cable connectors for Compact NSX100 to 250 and 400 630 The connectors are screwed to device terminals or right angle terminal extensions Distribution connectors for Compact NSX100 to 250 These connectors are screwed directly to device terminals Interphase barriers are supplied with distribution connectors but may be replaced by long terminal shields Each connector can receive six cables with cross sectional areas ranging from 1 5 to 35 mm each Polybloc distribution block for Compact NSX100 to 630 Polybloc connects directly to device terminals It is used to connect up to six or nine flexible or rigid cables with cross sectional areas not exceeding 10 mm or 16 mm to each pole Connection is made to spring terminals without screws
283. tors RoHS directive gt A 4 Restriction of Hazardous substances Safety clearances gt A 4 Temperature derating gt B 8 TEVA EIE AAEE AENEA EMC is the capacity of a device not to disturb its environment during operation emitted electromagnetic disturbances and to operate in a disturbed environment electromagnetic disturbances affecting the device The standards define various classes for the types of disturbances Micrologic trip units comply with annexes F and J in standard IEC IE60947 2 The flow of current through the circuit breaker poles produces Joule effect losses caused by the resistance of the poles An assessment on the impact of the construction and use of a product on the environment in compliance with standard ISO 14040 Environmental management life cycle assessment LCA principles and framework For Compact NSX this assessment is carried out using the standardised EIME Environmental Impact and Management Explorer software which makes possible comparisons between the products of different manufacturers It includes all stages i e manufacture distribution use and end of life with set usage assumptions m use over 20 years at a percent load of 80 for 14 hours per day and 20 for ten hours m according to the European electrical energy model It provides the information presented below m Materials making up the product composition and proportions with a check to make sure no substances forbidden b
284. tors 2 3 M Motors 5 3 E Distribution 6 3 E Distribution and generators and generators 5 3 A Z 16 Hz 2 3 networks s s Ls ELBE WG CB len den aap Der 4 30 8 Cs z ns DB112039 DB112041 DB111366 Ao 4 15 Mo A xlo xir Adjustment and reading Adjustment and reading Pick up set in amps with fine Pick up set in amps adjustment using dials Non adjustable time delay Connection to switchboard display unit Ir tr isd tsd isin o DB112042 DB111367 l gt gt 15A gt 90 gt 105 nel o s a E aO arg z DB112019 Fine adjustment via keypad Front indications eo isd isd in DB112043 non am ae oo0oo Adjustable time delays DB112040 S15A Communication to Modbus gt gt 90 gt 105 ke s a Test connector i O wr lt DB112019 Selftest Front indications e Test connector DB112040 Self test 559E1100 indd Schneider version 1 0 DB112044 Functions and characteristics The capabilities of Micrologic 5 6 A and E trip units come into full play with the FDM121 switchboard display unit When the two are connected via a simple cord with RJ45 connectors the combination offers full Power Meter capabilities and all the measurements required to monitor the electrical installation Ir tr isd tsd li xin N WA 2 B 3C OO oO Ammeter Micrologic A I measurements Current
285. total quality organisation and its business is to put electricity to work productively and effectively protecting people buildings and equipment Its low voltage electrical distribution equipment systems and services are used extensively in residential and commercial applications Telemecanique Telemecanique is a UK market leader and world expert in automation and control It provides complete solutions with its range of components Modicon range of high technology programmable controllers PLCs multiple fieldbus and ethernet communication networks HMI motion control systems variable speed drives and communications software In addition it offers power distribution through prefabricated busbar trunking Local customer support centres Scotland South West North West Schneider Electric Ltd Schneider Electric Ltd Schneider Electric Ltd Unit 18 PO Box 41 First Floor Claremont Centre Langley Road Market House 112a Cornwall Street South Chippenham Church Street Kinning Park Wiltshire SN15 1JJ Wilmslow Glasgow G41 1AA Cheshire SK9 1AY Product showrooms Industrial systems and solutions showroom Schneider Electric Ltd University of Warwick Science Park Sir William Lyons Road Coventry CV4 7EZ Building systems and solutions showroom Schneider Electric Ltd Stafford Park 5 Telford Shropshire TF3 3BL Energy and Infrastructure systems and solutions showroom Schneider Electric Ltd 123 Jack Lane Hunslet Leeds LS10 1BS membe
286. tripping Unlocking is required to go to the tripped then the OFF position m Keylock and padlock It is possible to install a Ronis or Profalux keylock optional on the base of the handle to obtain the same functions as with a padlock Early make or early break contacts optional Early make and or early break contacts may be used with the rotary handle It is thus possible to m supply an MN undervoltage release before the circuit breaker closes m open the contactor control circuit before the circuit breaker opens MCC switchboard control Control of an MCC switchboard is achieved by adding a kit to the standard handle In addition to the standard functions the kit offers the characteristics listed below tool control Compact NSX with a rotary handle Higher degree of protection IP Degree of protection IP43 IK07 The IP is increased by a built in gasket Door locking depending on device position m The door cannot be opened if the circuit breaker is ON or in the tripped position For exceptional situations door locking can be temporarily disabled with a tool to open the door when the circuit breaker is closed This operation is not possible if the Compact NSX with an MCC rotary handle handle IS locked by a pad lock m Circuit breaker closing is disabled if the door is open This function can be deactivated Machine tool control in compliance with CNOMO Control of a machine tool is achieved by a
287. ts That not withstanding Schneider Electric decided to comply with the RoHS directive Compact NSX products are designed in compliance with RoHS and do not contain above the authorised levels lead mercury cadmium hexavalent chromium or flame retardants polybrominated biphenyls PBB and polybrominated diphenyl ether PBDE When installing a circuit breaker minimum distances safety clearances must be maintained between the device and panels bars and other protection systems installed nearby These distances which depend on the ultimate breaking capacity are defined by tests carried out in accordance with standard IEC 60947 2 An ambient temperature varying significantly from 40 C can modify operation of magnetic or thermal magnetic protection functions It does not affect electronic trip units However when electronic trip units are used in high temperature situations it is necessary to check the settings to ensure that only the permissible current for the given ambient temperature is let through 559E7100 indd version 1 0 Schneider Electric Compact NSX Vibration withstand gt B 2 IEC 60068 2 6 WEEE directive gt A 4 Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment Glossary Circuit breakers are tested in compliance with standard IEC 60068 2 6 for the levels required by merchant marine inspection organisations Veritas Lloyd s etc m 2 to 13 2 Hz amplitude of 1 mm m 13 2 to 100 Hz constant acceleration
288. ts gt Compact NSX has an optional functional Integration in help software for parameter terminal shield that offers excellent protection settings and switchboard installation against direct contact IP40 on all sides further eases design IP20 at cable entry points and easy installation gt All Compact NSX devices can be equipped with a communication function via a pre wired connection with a Modbus interface module When the Modbus address is declared the Compact NSX device is integrated into the network gt There are four levels of functionalities e communication of device status On Off position trip indication and fault trip indication e communication of commands open close and reset e communication of measurements mainly I U f P E and THD e communication of operating assistance data settings parameters alarms histograms and event tables and maintenance indicators gt The switchboard plug amp play display unit connects to the trip unit without any special settings or configuration A cable fitted with an RJ45 connector allows for easy integration with communications networking Simple to use gt Users customise time stamped alarms for all parameters assign them to indicator lights choose display priorities and configure time delay thresholds and modes gt Event logs and tables are continuously activated Providing a wealth of information they enable us
289. ts in buildings main low voltage switchboards rising mains elevators etc m Cat IV Utility substations overhead lines certain industrial equipment gt A 32 Percentage of current flowing through the circuit breaker with respect to its rated current Micrologic 6 E M offers this information and can sum it over the total operating time to provide the load profile for the following ranges 0 to 49 50 to 79 80 to 89 and 2 90 gt A 23 The order in which the phases are connected L1 L2 L3 or L1 L3 L2 determines the direction of rotation for three phase asynchronous motors Micrologic 6 E M trip units provide this information gt A 23 The digital electronics in Micrologic 5 6 E calculate the instantaneous power levels apparent S in kVA active P in kW and Qin kV and integrate over a time interval to determine the corresponding energies kVAh kWh kvarh Calculations are for each phase and for the total gt A 21 Micrologic trip units store information on events e g alarms and their cause that are time stamped to within a millisecond gt A 23 DPOF EEE Protection function specific to electronic circuit breakers symbolised by G Ground This protection can calculate high threshold residual earth leakage currents in the order of tens of Amperes on the basis of phase current measurements Micrologic 5 6 offers this protection function with adjustable pick up Ig and time delay A 19 This p
290. ttings Ir 16 A and Im 63 A 400 Hz settings Ir 16 x 0 95 15A and Im 63A x 1 6 100A Schneider version 1 0 559E1600 indd Electric PB103363 044314 044313 DB115579 PB103377 gt Micrologic 5 E trip unit OF auxiliary contact MX or MN voltage release U volt gt ea N Wiring diagram SDx remote indication relay module with its terminal block 559E1600 indd MN MX 125 V DC Protection of 400 H systems cont Protection cont Micrologic electronic trip units Micrologic 2 2 2 3 or 5 2 5 3 with A or E measurement functions are suitable for 400 Hz The use of electronics offers the advantage of greater operating stability when the frequency varies However the units are still subject to temperature rise caused by the frequency The practical consequences are m limit settings to 0 9 In see the Ir derating table below m the long time short time and instantaneous pick ups are not modified see pages A 17 or A 19 m the accuracy of the displayed measurements is 2 class II Thermal derating maximum Ir setting Circuit breaker Maximum setting Max Ir setting at 400 Hz coefficient NSX100N 1 100 NSX250N 0 8 225 NSX400N 0 8 320 NSX630N 0 8 500 Example An NSX250N equipped with a Micrologic 2 2 Ir 250 A at 50 Hz must be limited to use at Ir 250 x 0 9 225A Its short time pick up with fixed time delay is adjustable from 1 5
291. ug in base Chassis NSX100NA NSX160NA NSX250NA NSX400NA NSX630NA 100 160 250 400 630 20 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 3 4 3 4 AC22A AC23A AC22A AC23A AC22A AC23A AC22A AC23A AC22A AC23A 100 160 250 400 630 100 160 250 400 630 100 160 250 400 630 100 160 250 400 630 100 160 250 400 630 DC22A DC23A DC22A DC23A DC22A DC23A DC22A DC23A DC22A DC23A 100 160 250 400 630 100 160 250 400 630 100 160 400 630 2 6 3 6 7 1 8 5 330 330 330 330 1800 2500 5000 6000 1800 2500 3500 5000 6000 690 960 1350 1930 2320 50000 40000 20000 15000 15000 AC22A AC23A AC22A AC23A AC22A AC23A AC22A AC23A AC22A AC23A 35000 30000 15000 10000 6000 20000 15000 7500 5000 3000 15000 10000 6000 5000 3000 8000 5000 3000 2500 1500 10000 10000 10000 2000 2000 5000 5000 5000 1000 1000 E E E Il Il Il Il Il E E E E E E E E E E E u E E 105 x 161 x 86 140 x 255 x 110 140 x 161 x 86 185 x 255 x 110 1 5 to 1 8 5 2 2 0 to 2 2 6 8 E E 559E1700 indd Schneider version 1 0 Electric PB103937 PB103936 PB103934 PB103935 Functions and characteristics Some installations use two supply sources to counter the temporary loss of the main supply A source changeover system is required to safely switch between the two sources The replacement source can be a generator set or another network Service sector m hospital operating rooms m safety systems for tall buildings m computer rooms banks insurance companies etc m
292. uits controlling the device Output of a relay made up of a thyristor or triac electronic component The low interrupting capacity means that a power relay is required This is the case for the SDx and SDTAM outputs BO FI ASEE AEA A A NA AEE EE Circuit breaker IEC 60947 2 j gt A 6 Circuit breaker utilisation category IEC 60947 2 PAG Contactor IEC 60947 1 ae gee gt A 36 Mechanical switching device capable of making carrying and breaking currents under normal circuit conditions and also making carrying for a specified time and breaking currents under specified abnormal circuit conditions such as those of short circuit Circuit breakers are the device of choice for protection against overloads and short circuits Circuit breakers may as is the case for Compact NSX be suitable for isolation The standard defines two utilisation categories A and B depending on breaker discrimination with upstream breakers under short circuit conditions m Category A Circuit breakers not specifically designed for discrimination applications m Category B Circuit breakers specifically designed for discrimination which requires a short time delay which may be adjustable and a rated short time withstand current in compliance with the standard Compact NSX100 to 630 circuit breakers are category A however by design they provide discrimination with downstream devices see the Complementary technical information guide
293. up to 2000 m Above this altitude it is necessary to take into account the decrease in the dielectric strength and cooling capacity of air The following table gives the corrections to be applied for altitudes above 2000 metres The breaking capacities remain unchanged Compact NSX100 to 630 Dielectric withstand voltage V 3000 2500 2100 1800 Insulation voltage V Ui 800 700 600 500 Maximum operational voltage V Ue 690 590 520 460 Average thermal current A at 40 C Inx 1 0 96 0 93 0 9 Vibrations Compact NSX devices resist electromagnetic or mechanical vibrations Tests are carried out in compliance with standard IEC 60068 2 6 for the levels required by merchant marine inspection organisations Veritas Lloyd s etc m 2 to 13 2 Hz amplitude 1 mm m 13 2 to 100 Hz constant acceleration 0 7 g Excessive vibration may cause tripping breaks in connections or damage to mechanical parts Degree of protection Compact NSX circuit breakers have been tested for degree of protection IP mechanical impact protection IK See page A 5 Electromagnetic disturbances Compact NSX devices are protected against m overvoltages caused by circuit switching m overvoltages caused by an atmospheric disturbances or by a distribution system outage e g failure of a lighting system m devices emitting radio waves radios walkie talkies radar etc m electrostatic discharges produced directly by users Compact NSX devices hav
294. us processes Manufacturing processes and individual machines Schneider version 1 0 559E1700 indd Electric PB103 199 28 PB103372 34 PB103629 31 Compact NSX100 to 630 NA switch disconnectors are available in fixed plug in and withdrawable versions They use the same accessories and offer the same connection possibilities as the circuit breaker versions They may be interlocked with another Compact switch disconnector or circuit breaker to form a source changeover system Compact NSX switch disconnector Compact NSX switch disconnector equipped with a motor mechanism module Compact NSX switch disconnector equipped with a Vigi module 559E1700 indd Switch disconnector functions Suitability for isolation with positive contact indication Compact NSX switch disconnectors are suitable for isolation as defined by standard IEC 60947 3 The corresponding conformity tests guarantee m the mechanical reliability of the position indication i e the O OFF position indicated by the control device always reflects the open position of the contacts o the required distance between contacts is provided o padlocks may not be installed unless the contacts are open m the absence of leakage currents m overvoltage withstand capacity between upstream and downstream connections Installation of a rotary handle or a motor mechanism does not alter the reliability of the position indication system Emergency off func
295. value of the resistance per pole is provided as a general indication for a new device The value of the contact resistance must be determined on the basis of the measured voltage drop in accordance with the manufacturer s test procedure ABT instruction document no 1 BEE 02 2 A Note this measurement is not sufficient to determine the quality of the contacts i e the capacity of the circuit breaker to carry its rated current Additional power loss Additional power loss is equal to the sum of the power dissipated by the following m Vigi module note that the deviation of the N and L3 bars required to pass through the toroid results in higher power losses compared to those of the L1 and L2 bars diagram opposite When calculating total power loss use L1 L2 L3 for a 3P device and N L1 L2 L3 for a 4P device m disconnecting contacts plug in and withdrawable devices m ammeter module m transformer module Calculation of total power loss Total power loss at full rated load and 50 60 Hz is equal to the sum of the device and additional power losses per pole multiplied by the number of poles 2 3 or 4 If a Vigi module is installed it is necessary to differentiate between N and L3 on one hand and L1 and L2 on the other Compact NSX100 to 250 equipped with TM D and TM G trip units NSX100 16 11 42 2 92 0 0 0 0 0 25 6 42 4 01 0 0 0 1 0 0 32 3 94 4 03 0 06 0 03 0 15
296. vel of 3rd order harmonics or orders that are multiples of 3 that accumulate in the neutral and create a high current In this case the device must be limited to Ir 0 63 x In for the maximum neutral protection setting of 1 6 x Ir m With 3 pole circuit breakers the neutral can be protected by installing an external neutral sensor with the output T1 T2 connected to the trip unit Zone selective interlocking ZSI AZSI terminal block may be used to interconnect a number of Micrologic control units to provide zone selective interlocking for short time Isd and ground fault Ig protection without a time delay For Compact NSX 100 to 250 the ZSI function is available only in relation to the upstream circuit breaker ZSI out Display of type of fault uu0000000000000 On a fault trip the type of fault Ir Isd li lg the phase concerned and the interrupted current are displayed An external power supply is required ICGIGANONS auiieaeiiariawintiadiniartionraietinianns OE Front indications gt 90 gt 105 O ir m Green Ready LED flashes slowly when the circuit breaker is ready to trip in the event of a fault m Orange overload pre alarm LED steady on when gt 90 Ir m Red overload LED steady on when gt 105 Ir Remote indications An SDx relay module installed inside the circuit breaker can be used to remote the following information m overload trip m overload prealarm Micr
297. with an adjustable pick up Isd There is a very short delay to let through motor starting currents Short circuits Non adjustable instantaneous protection li Instantaneous protection with non adjustable pick up li Phase unbalance or phase loss lunbal X This function opens the circuit breaker if a phase unbalance occurs m that is greater than the 30 fixed pick up lunbal m following the non adjustable time delay tunbal equal to 0 7 s during starting 4 s during normal operation Phase loss is an extreme case of phase unbalance and leads to tripping under the same conditions Indications sarcinis dsn nn Be Front indications m Green Ready LED flashes slowly when the circuit breaker is ready to trip in the event of a fault m Red alarm LED for motor operation goes ON when the thermal image of the rotor and stator is greater than 95 of the permissible temperature rise Remote indications via SDTAM module Compact NSX devices with a Micrologic 2 can be equipped with an SDTAM module dedicated to motor applications for m a contact to indicate circuit breaker overload m a contact to open the contactor In the event of a phase unbalance or overload this output is activated 400 ms before circuit breaker tripping to open the contactor and avoid circuit breaker tripping This module takes the place of the MN MX coils and an OF contact Schneider version 1 0 559E1500 indd Electric DB112114 DB115
298. xtended rotary handle installed at the back of a switchboard with the keylock option and key 559E1880 indd version 1 0 Schneider Electric PB103618 56 PB103588 68 559E1880 indd Extended rotary handle cont Device and door padlocking Padlocking locks the circuit breaker handle and disables door opening m standard situation in the OFF position using 1 to 3 padlocks shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm not supplied m with a simple modification in the ON and OFF positions Locking in the ON position does not prevent free circuit breaker tripping if a fault occurs In this case the handle remains in the ON position after the circuit breaker tripping Unlocking is required to go to the tripped then the OFF position If the door controls were modified to voluntarily disable door locking padlocking does not lock the door but does disable handle operation of the device Device locking using a keylock inside the switchboard It is possible to install a Ronis or Profalux keylock optional on the base of the rotary handle to lock the device in the OFF position or in either the ON or OFF positions Accessory for device operation with the door open When the device is equipped with an extended rotary handle a control accessory mounted on the shaft makes it possible to operate the device with the door open m The device can be padlocked in the OFF position m The accessory complies with UL508 Early make or early bre
299. y handle only CAO1 early break contact rotary handle only SDV earth leakage fault trip indication contact add on Vigi module 559E4100 indd Schneider version 1 0 Wiring diagrams Compact NSX100 to 630 Motor mechanism The diagram is shown with circuits de energised all devices open connected and charged and relays in normal position DB114666 After tripping initiated by the Push to trip button or by the undervoltage MN release or the shunt MX release device reset can be automatic remote or manual Following tripping due to an electrical fault with an SDE contact reset must be carried out manually e 0 A ae ah 1 EA CE E 1 SDE 681 BPO BPF Reset po PE MER i E 82 184 ei a A O O DB114667 DB114668 av ge B4 A1 motor mechanism power supply Be EA a BPO BPF Symbols i i Q circuit breaker A4 opening order A2 closing order j L1 manual position manu B2 SDE interlocking mandatory for correct operation a p BPO opening pushbutton am lt BPF closing pushbutton pea ae a SDE SDE fault trip indication contact short circuit i overload ground fault earth leakage Ae r version 1 0 559E4100 indd Electric DB115436 NSX cord 4 220 240 V TS BSCM TE DB114669
300. y limiting curves The limiting capacity of a circuit breaker is expressed by two curves which are a function of the prospective short circuit current the current which would flow if no protection devices were installed m the actual peak current limited current m thermal stress A s i e the energy dissipated by the short circuit in a conductor with a resistance of 1 Q Example What is the real value of a 150 kArms prospective short circuit i e 330 kA peak limited by an NSX250L upstream The answer is 30 kA peak curve page E 14 Maximum permissible cable stresses The table below indicates the maximum permissible thermal stresses for cables depending on their insulation conductor Cu or Al and their cross sectional area CSA CSA values are given in mm and thermal stresses in A s CSA 1 5 mm 2 5 mm 4 mm 6 mm 10 mm PVC Cu 2 97x10 8 26x10 2 12x10 4 76x10 1 32x10 Al 5 41x10 PRC Cu 4 10x10 1 39x105 2 92x105 6 56x10 1 82x10 Al 7 52x10 CSA 16 mm 25 mm 35 mm 50 mm PVC Cu 3 4x10 8 26x10 1 62x107 3 31x107 Al 1 39x10 3 38x10 6 64x108 1 35x107 PRC Cu 4 69x10 1 39x107 2 23x107 4 56x107 Al 1 93x10 4 70x10 9 23x10 1 88x107 Example Isa Cu PVC cable with a CSA of 10 mm adequately protected by an NSX160F The table above indicates that the permissible stress is 1 32x10 A s All short circuit currents at the point where an NSX160F Icu 35 kA is installed are limited with a th
301. y the RoHS directive are included m Manufacture on Schneider Electric production sites that have set up an environmental management system certified ISO 14001 m Distribution packaging in compliance with the 94 62 EC packaging directive optimised volumes and weights and optimised distribution flows via local centres m Use no aspects requiring special precautions for use Power lost through Joule effect in Watts W must be lt 0 02 of total power flowing through the circuit breaker Based on the above assumptions annual consumption from 95 to 200 kWh m End of life products dismantled or crushed For Compact NSX 81 of materials can be recycled using standard recycling techniques Less than 2 of total weight requires special recycling Environmental indicators are also frequently used for the PEP sheet available on request for Compact NSX m Depletion of natural resources m Depletion of energy m Depletion of water m Potential for atmospheric warming greenhouse effect m Potential for stratospheric ozone depletion m Creation of atmospheric ozone ozone layer m Acidification of air acid rain m Production of hazardous waste European directive 2002 95 EC dated 27 January 2003 aimed at reducing or eliminating the use of hazardous substances The manufacturer must attest to compliance without third party certification Circuit breakers are not included in the list of concerned products which are essentially consumer produc
302. ylock for locking in OFF position m Operations counter for the Compact NSX400 630 indicating the number of ON OFF cycles Must be installed on the front of the motor mechanism module Characteristics Motor mechanism ss MT100t0MT60 Response time ms opening lt 600 closing lt 80 Operating frequency cycles minute max 4 Control voltage V DC 24 30 48 60 110 130 250 AC 50 60 Hz 48 50 Hz 110 130 220 240 380 440 Consumption 7 DC W opening lt 500 closing lt 500 AC VA opening lt 500 closing lt 500 1 For NSX100 to NSX250 the inrush current is 2 In for 10 ms Electrical endurance Circuit breaker motor mechanism module in thousands of operations NS100 IEC 60947 2 at 440 V NS160 NS250 NS400 O NS630 0 1 0 2 0 3 05 07 1 gt In Schneider version 1 0 559E1880 indd Electric 044313 DB115605 DB115606 PB103752 32 DB115608 MX or MN voltage release Failsafe opening Possible opening 0 0 35 0 7 1 1 Un Opening conditions of the MN release Failsafe closing 0 Remote tripping MX or MN voltage releases are used to trip the circuit breaker They serve primarily for remote emergency off commands It is advised to test the system every six months MN undervoltage release The MN release opens the circuit breaker when its supply voltage drops to a value below 35 of its rated voltage Un Undervoltage trip

Compact NSX - elektro oprema

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents